Home

G7 manual _draft version

1. 9 27 Displays during the IrDA interface connectign et 9 28 SETUP list the USER FILTERS text highlighted displayed 9 28 USER FILTERS windows SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected seen 9 29 SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the VIEW text highlighted serene 9 29 VIEW windows the filter selection 9 29 fiter Wind OWS EE 9 29 SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the EDIT text highlighted esee 9 30 EDIT windows the filter selection et 9 30 51 filter windows the coefficient selection et 9 30 SPECTRUM BASED FILTER window the CLEAR position Selected pp 9 31 CLEAR windows the selection of the filters to be cleaTred eene 9 31 Displays during and after the execution of CLEAR operatign 9 31 SETUP list the VIBRATION UNITS text highlighted displayed 4 9 31 VIBRATION UNITS windows with the available 9 31 SETUP list the WARNINGS text highlighted displayed 9 32 WARNINGS windows RESULTS NOT SAVED selected pe 9 32 Displays with LAST RESULTS NOT SAVE warning et 9 32 WARNINGS windows USB DISK FREE SP selected 4 9 33 WARNINGS windows MIN FREE SPACE selection pe 9 33 Xvi G7 USER MANUAL
2. Displays with the results stored the logger presented with different DYNAMIC parameter 6 2 1 3 Scaling the horizontal axis of the graphical presentation X ZOOM The X ZOOM enables the user to change the horizontal axis in the SPECTRUM presentation mode by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the lt ENTER gt push button which closes also the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored In 1 1 OCTAVE mode available values are 3x 4x and 5x In 1 3 OCTAVE mode available values are 2x 3x 4x and 5x DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE SCALE LOG DVMRMIC DVMRMIC 80B Z00M M F 200M BRID zE GRID 4 GRID 4 AUTOSCALE AUTOSCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE LOG CYHAMIC S86 4 200M GRID AUTOSCALE NER d ERES E RR RES E ER IE Displays in 1 1 OCTAVE SPECTRUM 3x 4 and 5x X ZOOM 6 15 G7 USER MANUAL Displays in FFT SPECTRUM 1x 2x 4x and 5x X ZOOM 6 2 1 4 Switching on off the grid in the graphical mode presentation GRID The GRID enables the user to switch on or off the grid in any graphical presentation placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the GRID text by means of the lt g
3. SPECTRUM VIEW windows the TYPE selection 6 2 3 3 Selection of the MAX spectrum for the presentation MAX In the MAX position the corresponding spectrum can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes L oa SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH EXTENDED VIEW EXTENDED AVERAGED TYPE AVERAGED Hd CJ SUE SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MAX selection 6 2 3 4 Selection of the MIN spectrum for the presentation MIN In the MIN position the corresponding spectrum can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes oa oa SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH EXTENDED EXTENDED AVERAGED AVERAGED Tw As x 6 18 G7 USER MANUAL SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MIN selection 6 2 4 Selection of the Weighting Filters TOTAL VALUES The TOTAL VALUES which is available only in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis enables the user to select the weighting filter In order to enter this window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed TOTAL VALUES text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The TOTAL VALUES window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt 5 gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the ENTER push butt
4. 8 8 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 8 8 Display the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT STATISTICS 3 8 8 Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection 8 9 Example of the printed statistics from the SOUND LEVEL METER mode format 5 2 222 8 11 Example of the printed statistics from the SOUND METER mode DOSE METER format 4 8 12 Displays during the statistics printing when there is no transfer a and no data b sss 8 12 REPORT windows with the PRINT FILE selected in SM a and VM 2 0 12 000000 000000 8 12 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 13 Display in the REPORT list the PRINT FILE position when no files were Sayed pp 8 13 Displays during the selection of the file to be PTinted nennen nennen 8 13 Display during the execution of the PRINT FILE 8 13 Display during the file sending out when there is no data transfer nennen 8 13 Example of the printed file from the VIBRATION METER mode 1 3 OCTAVE format 5 8 15 Example of the printed file from the SOUND METER mode LEVEL METER format 4
5. 8 17 REPORT windows with the PRINT LOGGER selected in SM a and VM b pp 8 17 PRINT LOGGER window opened Function not available message seen 8 17 REPORT windows with the PRINT USER FILTERS selected in SM and in VM ppp 8 17 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 18 PRINT USER FILTERS windows the user filter selection pe 8 18 Display the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT USER FILTERS eene 8 18 Display during the file transfer from the logger when there is no data transfer pp 8 18 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S1 format 4 8 19 xiv G7 USER MANUAL Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S2 format AS 8 19 REPORT windows with the PRINT CATALOGUE selected in SM and VM b pp 8 19 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 2 8 20 Display the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT 8 20 Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejectign eene trennen 8 20 Example of the printed catalogue format A4 ee 8 20 Example of the printed catalogue format 5 8 21 Display during the catalogue printing when there is no data transfer 8 21 REPORT windows with the OPTION select
6. dB dB 10 10 2 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 70 70 80 80 530 30 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz 26 0 0 Sloe 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 7 5 16 5 28 5dB Characteristics of the Wj digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM The Wm filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human bogy It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards af e 40 40 80 50 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 1024 Hz 38 2 21 0 0 5 l ef 8 5 15 2 21 9 32 7 43 5 62 6 86 2dB Characteristics of the Wm digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM D 25 G7 USER MANUAL The Wh filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human bogy It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB dB 1 0 10 2 20 3 3 40 40 50 50 50 60 70 70 80 80 50 30 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4036 Hz 44 56 32 0 o18 8 bie 24022 930 3 346 BI 23 8uB Characteristics of the Wh digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM The Wg filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vi
7. eere 4 7 Displays while the instrument is waiting for the calibration measurement to commence esee 4 7 Displays during the calibration measurements 4 4 8 Displays after the calibration measurements nennen ene enne 4 8 Displays after pressing the ENTER push button after calculation of the calibration factor value 4 8 Displays in the CALIBRATION window the LAST CALIBRATION text selected a the LAST CALIBRATION window opened with ten calibration records b pp 4 9 Displays with the LAST CALIBRATION records nnne 4 9 Display with the empty LAST CALIBRATION 4 9 CALIBRATION window TEDS text highlighted nre eene enne nenne 4 9 TEDS window opened NO DATA AVAILABLE message Ne 4 10 Main list with the INPUT text selected inresa eternam een IHR UID peer RR 5 1 INPUT list in the LEVEL METER 2 in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser b in DOSE METER c and 1n FET analyser d 5 ttr teet ceder ve EXE e EVE PNE 5 1 Displays with not active sub lists of INPUT list during measurement sese 5 1 Displays with the MEASUREMENT SETUP nennen nennen eene enne ener 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 1 second 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows
8. D 29 xviii G7 USER MANUAL 1 INTRODUCTION The G7 is digital Type 1 sound amp vibration level meter along with analyser The instrument is intended to general acoustic and vibration measurements environmental monitoring occupational health and safety monitoring Three acoustic or vibration profiles allow parallel measurements with independently defined filters and RMS detector time constants Each profile provides significant number of results like Leq LMax LMin LPeak Spl SEL in the case of sound measurements or RMS PEAK VDV MTVV in the case of vibration measurements Advanced time history logging for each profile provides complete information about measured signal in non volatile 32 MB internal memory or external USB Memory Stick and can be easy downloaded to any PC using the USB interface and SvanPC software required weighting filters e g A Wk Wc Wh including the latest ISO 2631 1 amp 2 standard are available with this instrument The RMQ detector enables direct measurement of the Vibration Dose Value VDV Using computational power of its digital signal processor the G7 instrument can simultaneously to the meter mode perform real time 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis including statistical calculations acoustic dose measurements FFT analysis and Reverberation Time measurements The time history logging of 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis is provided The time domain signal record
9. MEASURE TRIGGER windows In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the A v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the window requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the current display The MEASURE TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button 5 4 1 4 Switching the triggering on and off TRIGGER The triggering of the measurements TRIGGER can be switched off using the lt lt gt push button MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER window TRIGGER switched off The triggering is switched on if one of its five modes is selected SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL or GRAD The selection of the triggering mode is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons If the instrument works with the triggering switched on the Antenna icon is flashing on the display in the case when the triggering condition was not fulfilled 5 13 G7 USER MANUAL arfi SPL Fast Displays during the measurements while the triggering condition is not fulfilled In the case when the SLOPE is selected the measurement starts when the arising signal will pass the level determined in the LEVEL In the case when the SLOPE is selected the measurement starts when the falling down signal will pass the level determined in the LEVEL The measurement is stopp
10. eese 8 1 SETUP list with the USB HOST PORT selected and this window with the activated 5232 8 1 SETUP list with the RS232 selected and the exemplary contents of this window pt 8 1 REPORT windows in SM SOUND METER mode 3 8 2 REPORT windows in the vibration Mode enne nennen rete en rennen entree erre tenete 8 2 REPORT windows with the TITLE selected in SM a and VM b ener enne 8 3 Displays in the text edition of the report s header 4 8 3 Displays with all available characters 4 8 3 Displays with all available characters COnt ee 8 4 REPORT windows with the PRINT RESULTS selected in SM a and VM b 8 4 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 8 4 Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT 5 75 8 4 Example of the printed results AS format eset petere eim ei irte e Retreat pred rette 8 5 Example of the printed results from the SOUND METER mode LEVEL METER A4 format 8 6 Example of the printed results from the VIBRATION METER mode 1 3 OCTAVE A4 format 8 7 Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection 8 7 Displays during the results printing when there is no transfer and no data b sees 8 8 REPORT window with the PRINT STATISTICS selected
11. Display with USB DISK FREE SPACE warning nennen nette trennen tren 9 33 Effect of mechanical vibration perpendicular to the plane of microphone diaphragm sess C 6 Effect of mechanical vibration parallel to the plane of microphone diaphragm see C 6 54 22 Free Field Characteristics tr DD p OPE re REPE to pO TD C 7 Diffuse field filter implemented in G7 instrument eese eee trennen C 8 Effect of extension cable for the measurements with Z filter for U 2 1 C 9 Typical free field frequency response of G7 instrument pe C 9 Typical case effect of G7 instrument and compensation filters characteristics eee C 11 G7 directional response with ACO 7052H and SV 12L for given frequencies C 18 Total directional characteristics of G7 with ACO 7052H microphone and SV 12L preamplifier C 19 TNC connector external view nes eec ea C 32 Power supply connector 5 5 2 1 mm external view 4 C 33 RCA Jack Cinch external VIEW eee t tee ree ee bie rese Ee LO gare C 33 USB socket extemal view 2 one REUS Gems C 35 USB socket extern l view eee p ERE EE GE ERE C 35 Results shown in the first presentation mode of statistical D 6 Results shown in the second pr
12. 9 20 SETUP list the SHIFT MODE text highlighted displayed 9 20 SHIFT MODE windows the available SHIFT settings 4 9 21 SHIFT MODE windows the available ST SP settings esee nennen nennen enne eene 9 21 SETUP list the STATISTICAL LEVELS sub list selected enne 9 2 Displays in the STATISTICAL LEVELS sub list et 9 22 SETUP list the TIMER text highlighted displayed inversely seen 9 22 TIMER windows the mode Selection 4 9 23 TIMER windows setting day of the instrument s switch on et 9 23 TIMER windows setting hour and minute of the instrument s switch ON 9 24 TIMER windows setting REPETITION parameter pe 9 24 Exemplary settings made for the desired execution of the TIMER function pe 9 25 Counting down during the warming up of the instrument after switching it on et 9 25 Displays during the executing of the TIMER function et 9 25 SETUP list the USB HOST PORT text highlighted displayed inversely eee 9 25 Displaysan the USB HOST PORT reete ete emet Re Oe DU o ripe tf 9 26 Displays during the entering of the access code to SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING itin dente ie tete Ie ee Ebr Pec Pet Eee Eee be neis 9 26 Displays with the different USB disk 9 27 Contents of the DIRECTORY
13. Notice The converter SV 55 serves as the HS 232 interface The SV 55 connection to the USB Host socket is detected and after successful detection the headphone icon is switched on The transmission using the SV 55 is possible only in the case when the instrument is not connected to a PC with the USB Device port The RS232 is the default setting in the USB HOST PORT in the SETUP list Only in this option the USB host controller is awaken and the power consumption is the lower one DERAF USE IrDA SHIFT MODE USB DISK STATISTICAL LEWELS SRT RECORDIHG TIMER WAVE RECORDING USB HOST PORT EVENT RECORDING SETUP list with the USB HOST PORT selected and this window with the activated RS232 The user has to be sure that the RS232 is activated path MENU SETUP USB HOST PORT RS232 before starting printing reports Additionally the RS232 list path MENU SETUP RS232 the user has to select the proper speed of the transmission and the parameter called TIME OUT L L SETUP R5232 R5232 REFERENCE LEVELS REMOTE BAUD RATE 20 BAUD RATE RMS INTEGRATION f TIME OUT RTC SHIFT MODE SETUP list with RS232 selected and the exemplary contents of this window 8 1 G7 USER MANUAL The RS 232 interface transmission BAUD RATE speed can be selected from the following available values 1200 bits second 2400 bits s 4800 bits s 9600 bits s 19200 bits s
14. DAY TIME LIMITS DhY TIME LIMITS Displays with the available DAY TIME LIMITS 9 6 G7 USER MANUAL 9 5 Exposure time setting EXPOSURE TIME The EXPOSURE TIME enables the user to set the desired value of the exposure time that is used for the calculation of different DOSE METER functions as well as LEPd that is also calculated in the LEVEL METER mode cf App D for the definitions of the functions In order to enter the window the user has to select the EXPOSURE TIME text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt This sub list is available only in the sound mode in vibration mode it is taken off from the SETUP list CURRENT SETUP list with the EXPOSURE TIME text highlighted displayed inversely The EXPOSURE TIME values are within the range 00h01 08h00 The required value be set using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons after each pressing the exposure time is decremented incremented by one second The step be decremented incremented up to 30 minutes after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or ESC push buttons ignoring a change made in the position oa oa oa oa EXPOSURE TIME EXPOSURE TIME EXPOSU
15. Input G7 Sound amp Vibration Analyser IEC 61672 2002 Type 1 IEC 61260 1995 Type 1 ISO 10816 1 1995 x Made in Poland by SVANTEK X amp ce 4x AA battery Serial no 10000 USB USB Host Device Rear panel of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale G7 USER MANUAL 3 SETTING THE INSTRUMENT In order to perform the measurements using the instrument the user has only to plug in the preamplifier with the microphone or the proper transducer and to switch the power on Notice The user has to press the ALT and START STOP push buttons in parallel in order to switch the power 3 1 Basis of the instrument s control The instrument is controlled by means of nine push buttons of the keyboard Using these push buttons one can access all available functions The functions are placed in the system of lists and sub lists The main list contains the headers of six lists which also contain sub lists or positions elements The main list is opened after pressing the MENU push button This list contains the following lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP The elements of each list are described in details in Chapters 4 9 Only one list can be accessed at a time the one which name is highlighted displayed inversely The change of the highlighted line is done after pressing the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons Notice The number of
16. 4 4 Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor b 4 4 4 Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode eee 4 4 Displays with the SENSITIVITY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible esce es tested eee cel 4 5 Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the ENTER push button with the calibration factor calculated 5 2 12 1 04120000200010000000000000000000000000000000 4 5 Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the ENTER push button with the calibration factor calculated 2 eene 4 5 Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor b Nt 4 5 Displays during the calibration measurement sess nennen en 4 6 Displays after the measurements a and after the acceptance of the value of the calibration factor b 4 6 Displays with the question about switching on the compesation filter sss 4 7 Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode
17. Menus Name Comment block id nn2block length 0 OxnnOE Oxnn26 OxnnOE averaged spectrum results Oxnn27 Oxnn26 min spectrum results Oxnn27 max spectrum results 1 0x0101 used profile profile s mask 2 LowestFreq the lowest 1 1 OCTAVE frequency 100 Hz 100 FULL BAND or 3150 AUDIO BAND 3 NOct number of 1 1 OCTAVE values 15 FULL BAND or 10 AUDIO BAND 4 NOctTot number of TOTAL values 3 5 20 Octave i 1 1 octave i value 10 dB i 1 NOct NoctTot 1 16 Table B 1 12 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results Comment block id nn2block length 0 Oxnn10 Oxnn28 Oxnn10 averaged spectrum results Oxnn29 Oxnn28 min spectrum results Oxnn29 max spectrum results 1 0x0101 used profile profile s mask 2 LowestFreq the lowest 1 3 OCTAVE frequency 100 Hz 80 FULL BAND or 2000 AUDIO BAND 3 NTer number of 1 3 OCTAVE values 45 FULL BAND or 31 AUDIO BAND 4 NTerTot number of TOTAL values 3 5 50 Tercje i 1 3 octave i value 10 dB i 1 NTer NTerTot 1 46 Table B 1 13 Header of the FFT analysis Word Name Comment B 15 G7 USER MANUAL number Oxnn11 11 id nn block s length reserved reserved LowestFreqNo number of the first line in the FFT spectrum NFft number of lines in the spectrum 1920 NFftTot number of TOTAL lines in the spectrum 1 Ff
18. SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the RAM FILE After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the RAM FILE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active V after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt 5 gt push button The RAM FILE functionality is available only in the LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE mode In the DOSE METER FFT RT60 modes the line with the RAM FILE text does not appear on the display after entering the SAVE OPTIONS sub list 7 2 2 Replacement of the existing files by the new ones REPLACE The result of the attempt to save the file with the name which already exists in the memory depends on the setting of the REPLACE It is possible to erase the old file and to save the new one with the same name if the position is active V The activation or deactivation of the REPLACE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 7 10 GZ USER MANUAL SAUE OPTIONS SAUE OPTIONS LT s SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the REPLACE The message is displayed that such operation is not available in the case when this position is not active cf the description of the SAVE In the
19. 4 L 4 95 miefTrBirdT Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and lt ALT gt push buttons After pressing the lt A gt or v and ALT push buttons the VIEW is changed path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER VIEW VIEW So after pressing these push buttons and then repeating the previous sequence the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the ALT one the user can observe the displays presented below Ce see aici ce 63 8 METTI Dir Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt ALT push buttons Another measurement is started after next pressing of the lt START STOP gt push button The measurement is stopped after the selected INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD names of the next saved files are automatically 7 14 G7 USER MANUAL incremented by one The same remarks are valid in this case as it was already stated in the description of the SAVE NEXT function 7 2 5 Direct access to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function DIRECT SAVE The DIRECT SAVE enables one to select the instrument s reaction on the simultaneous pressing of the ENTER and ALT push buttons If this option is not active 1 after pressing these push buttons the SAVE window is accessed if the measu
20. AVERAGING AVERAGING AVERAGING AVERAGING CLEAR AVERAGING HO 8 AVERAGING HO Ho RT60 AVERAGING window the change of AVERAGING NO after measurement position is not accessible 9 15 Setting the auxiliary parameters of RT 60 mode RT60 OPTIONS The RT60 OPTIONS is accessible in the SETUP list in the SOUND METER mode when the RT60 function is selected in the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION window path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION RT60 This sub list is opened after the selection of the RT60 OPTION text from the SETUP list by means of the A v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The RT60 OPTIONS consists of two parameters which influence the calculation of the RT60 measurements results SMOOTHING and NOISE MAR oa OPTIONS _ SMOOTHING gt ENTER gt MAR i8 BdB SHIFT MODE RT60 selected in the SETUP list and the RT60 OPTIONS window opened 9 15 1 Setting the sound pressure level decay curve averaging SMOOTHING In the SMOOTHING position the user can set the parameter of decay curve averaging In this position available values are from 0 to 15 The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 9 18 G7 USER MANUAL with step equal to 1 or by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one with the step equal to 5 The confirmation of the sel
21. essere 5 6 Relations between INTEGR PERIOD and LOGGER STEP pp 5 7 INPUT list with the MEASUREMENT RANGE selectegd nennen eene eene 5 7 MEASUREMENT RANGE windows in sound mode the RANGE selection pp 5 8 MEASUREMENT RANGE windows in vibration mode the RANGE selection pp 5 8 Displays with change of the default range values in sound mode caused by the calibration factor 5 8 Displays with change of the default range values in vibration mode caused by the calibration factor 5 8 INPUT list with the PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 selected pp 5 8 PROFILE x windows the selection of the weighting filter in ME 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in acceleration 2 244 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements esee 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measurements 5 10 PROFILE x windows SM the selection of the RMS 5 10 PROFILE 1 windows vibration mode the selection of RMS detectoTr pp 5 10 PROFILE x windows sound mode the PEAK result to be not saved or saved a logger s file 5 11 PROFILE x windows vibration the PEAK result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file
22. 1 LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS 1 INPUT and PROFILE x windows weighting filter selection in acceleration measurements The HP1 filter is used for the acceleration measurements the vibration signal in the frequency range from 1 Hz to 20 kHz 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 13 8 6 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 129 2568 512 1024 2048 4056 Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the HP1 digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements in the VM The HP3 filter is used for the acceleration measurements the vibration signal in the frequency range from 3 5 Hz to 20 kHz D 15 G7 USER MANUAL dB dB 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 146 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 Hz Hg Sg Sores gu n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the HP3 digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements in the VM The HP10 filter is used for the acceleration measurements the vibration signal in the frequency range from 10 Hz to 20 kHz 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 32 54 128 256 512 1024 2048 4056 Hz 8 3 59 0 41 2 25 1 11 2 1 3 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the HP10 digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements the VM D 16 G7 USER MANUAL D 2 2 2 Digital filters implemented in the vibration mode for the velocity measurements The following four filters Vel1
23. G7 USER MANUAL 1 00 0 50 0 50 1 00 1 50 Typical case effect of G7 instrument and compensation filters characteristics See Case effect and results after Case compensation on the Figure and the Table below Table C 14 The effect of the windscreen and case effect of G7 Case effect 0858 ner tap compensation 188 100 0 0 00 0 059532018 0 06 125 0 0 00 0 064265446 0 06 160 0 0 00 0 071586079 0 07 200 0 0 00 0 078788819 0 08 250 0 0 00 0 082444783 0 08 315 0 0 10 0 072904441 0 03 400 0 0 09 0 03381 1826 0 06 500 0 0 02 0 042657203 0 02 630 0 0 23 0 119792113 0 11 800 0 0 05 0 004424002 0 05 1000 0 0 48 0 445074651 0 03 1250 0 0 29 0 459474889 0 17 1600 0 0 88 0 803966206 0 08 2000 0 0 03 0 013049722 0 02 2240 0 0 35 0 444071285 0 10 2500 0 0 04 0 021245411 0 02 11 G7 USER MANUAL 0 12 0 112923794 0 00 0 23 0 043943765 30 18 0 17 0 322327216 0 15 0 57 0 512218726 0 06 0 35 0 375648693 0 03 0 51 0 269436004 0 24 0 17 0 0301991 0 14 0 50 0 290948905 0 21 0 70 0 649880548 0 06 1 00 0 909905836 0 09 0 38 0 434172102 0 05 0 44 0 393991273 0 05 0 57 0 756209137 3D 19 0 7
24. This push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one enables the user to enter the main list containing six sub lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP Each of the mentioned above sub lists consists of the sub lists elements and data windows These main sub lists will be described in details in the following chapters of the manual Double pressed MENU push button enters the list containing eight last opened sub lists It often speeds up the control of the instrument as the user has the faster access to the frequently used sub lists 2 2 G7 USER MANUAL lt SAVE gt This push button pressed together with the lt ALT gt one enables the user to save measurement results as a file in the internal instruments memory or on the USB memory stick There are two available functions SAVE NEXT save file with the name increased by one e g 02JANO 02JAN1 02JAN3 SAVE save a file with the edited name lt ESC gt This push button closes the control lists sub lists or windows It acts in opposite to the ENTER push button When the window is closed pressing the lt ESC gt push button any changes made in it are ignored in almost all cases This push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one enters the CALIBRATION sub list in which the user can enter one of the available sub lists BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT LAST CALIBRATION and TEDS lt PAUSE gt
25. 2 6 Front panel of the G7 instrument in SC 2 7 Rear panel of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale nennen nennen retener tenete 2 8 Displays with the highlighted elements of the main list 4 3 1 Display with the recently accessed menu items after double pressing of the MENU push button 3 1 Displays with the main list a and the elements of the INPUT list b enne 3 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP window opened path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP 3 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP window the INTEGR PERIOD position accessible eee 3 2 Displays with the accessed INTEGR PERIOD position after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons fespecttvely Ge E ete bete 3 2 Displays after three consecutive pressing of the lt ESC gt push button from the MEASUR SETUP sub list 3 2 Displays during and after the accessing the FREE SPACE window path MENU FILE FREE SPACE 3 3 Displays during the edition of the text which has to be printed as a header in the measurement reports path MENU 7 REPORT ER 3 3 Control diagram of the FUNCTION list 3 3 4 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE mode eee 3 7 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the DOSE METER mode sse nennen 3 7 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the FFT mode 4 3 7 Control diagram o
26. A Note The measurement result is coded in binary form as dBe10 e g 34 5 dB is sent as binary number 345 A 6 G7 USER MANUAL A 5 Function 4 Read out of the data file from the internal Flash Disc 4 function enables the user to read out the data file from the internal Flash disc memory The data file formats are given in Appendix B 4 function formats are defined as follows 4 0 the file containing the catalogue 4 0 the count of the files 4 0 index count the part of the file containing the catalogue where index first record count number of records in the catalogue 4 1 fname the file containing the measurement results 4 1 fname file size 4 1 fname offset length the part of the file containing the measurement results 4 1 lt address length the part of the file containing the measurement results where fname name containing not more than eight characters offset offset from the beginning of the file length number of bytes to read address absolute internal address 4 2 fname the file containing the logger results 4 2 fname file size 4 2 fname offset length the part of file containing the logger results where fname name containing not more than eight characters offset offset from the beginning of the file length number of bytes to read 4 3 the RAM file 4 3 size of RAM file 4 3 offset length the part of RAM file where
27. FilterP 2 filter type in the 2 profile 0 Z 1 HP1 2 HP3 3 HP10 4 Vel 5 Vel3 6 Vel10 7 VeIMF 8 DIN 9 Dil3 10 Dil10 15 KB 16 Wk 17 Wd 18 Wc 19 Wij 20 Wm 21 Wh 22 Wg 23 Wb BufferP 2 logger contents in the 2 profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 P P 4 MAX 8 RMS CalibrFactor 2 calibration factor 10 dB in the 2 profile ProfileFlags 2 flags in the 2 profile Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 3 detector type in the 3 profile 0 100 ms 1 125 ms 2 200 ms 3 500 ms 4 16 G7 USER MANUAL 5 26 6 56 7 10s FilterP 3 filter type in the 3 profile 0 Z 1 HP1 2 HP3 3 HP10 4 Vell 5 Vel3 6 Vel10 7 8 Dil 9 Dil3 10 Dil10 15 KB 16 Wk 17 Wd 18 Wc 19 Wj 20 Wm 21 Wh 22 Wg 23 Wb BufferP 3 logger contents in the 34 profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 4 8 RMS CalibrFactor 3 calibration factor 10 dB in the 3 profile ProfileFlags 3 flags in the 3 profile Table B 1 10 SLM Main results in the case of SLM mode ud Name Comment 0 07 07 id block s length 0x0307 used profile profile s mask Oxmm08 08 id mm sub block s length MeasureTime time of the measurement Result 1 1 PEAK value
28. IEC 1260 e RT 60 mesurements option FFT real time analysis 1920 lines in up to 22 4 kHz band option e DOSE METER measurements G7 USER MANUAL 1 2 G7 as Vibration Meter amp Analyser 1 3 General vibration measurements acceleration velocity and displacement and optionally HVM meeting ISO 8041 2005 and ISO 10816 1 standards in the frequency range depends on the parameters of the attached accelerometer i e with DYTRAN 3185D general purpose transducer is equal to 2 Hz 20 kHz parallel RMS VDV MTVV or MAX PEAK PEAK PEAK measurements Z HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb weighting filters 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE real time analysis optional 15 filters with centre frequencies 1 Hz 16 kHz 1 IEC 1260 and 45 filters with centre frequencies 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 optional FFT spectra calculation 1920 lines in real time up to 22 4 kHz with Hanning rectangle flat top or Kaiser Bessel window and linear averaging parallel to the VLM operation General features of G7 Advanced Data Logger including spectra s logging on the USB Memory Stick providing almost unlimited logging capacity Time domain signal recording option Advanced trigger and alarm functions USB 1 1 Host amp Client interface real time PC front end application supported RS 232 and IrDA interfaces options Integration time programmable up to 24 h Power supply by four AA rechargeable or standard
29. cccccccccccccsesssssceeececeenesececececeeseneceseeeceesesssaeeeeees 9 10 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ALARM LEVEL setting et 9 11 SETUP list the HUMAN VIB text highlighted displayed inversely pt 9 11 Displays during the entering of the access code to a function nennen enne 9 11 SETUP list the CURRENT text highlighted displayed inversely eee 9 11 CURRENT windows the supply selection eene nnne trennen 9 12 SETUP list the REFERENCE LEVELS text highlighted displayed inversely sess 9 12 REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level setting of acceleration signal ppp 9 12 REFERENCE LEVEL windows setting the reference level of velocity signal eee 9 13 REFERENCE LEVELS windows setting the reference level of displacement 2 22 2222 9 13 REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level of the acoustic signal pp 9 13 SETUP list the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text highlighted displayed inversely 9 13 REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows the TYPE selection pt 9 14 XV G7 USER MANUAL REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows packet size selection 9 14 SETUP list with the RMS INTEGRATION text highlighted displayed 2 9 14 Displays and with the available options of the RMS 9 15 SETUP list the RS232 text hig
30. 0 Off Xxx 1 Continuous Xxx 2 Packet 7 RP This function returns the packet size for remote communication in the format 7 RP xxx 7 RP Xxxx This function sets the packet size for remote communication and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RP The possible values are as follows 1024 512 256 128 64 7 WU This function returns the vibration unit type in the format 7 WU x 7 WU x This function sets the vibration unit type non metric x 0 or metric x 1 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 WU 7 RA This function returns the ACC reference levels in the format 7 RA xxx 7 RA Xxx This function sets the ACC reference levels where xxx e 1 100 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RA A 13 G7 USER MANUAL T7 RV This function returns the VEL reference levels in the format 7 RV xxx 7 RV XXX This function sets the VEL reference levels where xxx e 1 100 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RV 7 RD This function returns the DIL reference levels in the format 7 RD xxx 7 RD xxx This function sets the DIL reference levels where xxx e 1 100 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RD 7 MB This function returns the tonality maximum band in the format 7 MB xxx 7 MB xxx This function sets the tonality maximum band in percentage where 5 25 and returns the follo
31. DISPLAY MODES LOG FILE amp L G3 E RECORDS 16 SCREEH PC13 RM amp E BATTERY FREE 15087 UNTT LABEL AVAILABLE 15867 KB a DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SCREEN SETUP DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER CONTRAST 4 UiT T LABEL BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT x DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER 1 SCREEN SETUP VOLTAGE 5 40 oo BATTERY a SURNTEK 67 DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SN 12800 SCREEH SETUP MEMORY S2MB BATTERY LEVEL METER v6 06 WHIT LABEL ANALYZER v6 06 2 Control diagram of the DISPLAY list oa LOGGER VIEW EXTERNAL POWER 12 10 G7 USER MANUAL FILE one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button gt SAVE name of the file available values SAVE NEXT SAVE SAVE NEXT option simplifies the way of saving the file the file name is generated automatically basing on the date set in the instrument or on the last name given for the file next result is saved as a file with the name increased by one e g 11 11JAN1 11JAN2 n the SAVE option the name of the file can be fully edited in the FILE NAME window after pressing the lt A gt push button The cursor is moved with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The current character is changed with lt SHIFT gt lt A gt SHIFT24 v push buttons The combination lt SHIFT gt lt
32. DO CO CO CO iS uS uS GA gt Xm gt gt gt GA gt XA gt XS gt XS gt O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 OO OO OO OO CO OO XO XO CO CO COO NN J OO O r2 P MN C gt Oy I C QO P PN CO A S CO tO XO QOO P IN 0 S XO oO QO pP INO 4S Oy Oy O0 XO No C0 4S O1 Oy OO P O1 0 4S Oy XO IND 4S QOO C P2 C Oy xo I O1 O1 O IN OI I o C0 BOAN ON O0 IS 4S I ON BA iO F2 0001 00 01 lt lt O 5 BO L94 38 6 L95 37 3 L96 3549 L97 35 0 L98 35 4 L99 35 L 47 47 47 47 46 45 gt BD 56 56 559 54 54 O0 nmn G7 USER MANUAL Example of the printed statistics from the SOUND LEVEL METER mode format A5 C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 03 v6 06 6 06 2 14 05 39 TITLE T as oat eet eee eles GETTINGS m deeccdnoescc SETIINGS o 222 22 Device mode SOUND METER Field cor
33. The change of the selected displayed inversely profile is done pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the lt ALT gt and or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the profile Ten statistics set by the user path MENU SETUP STATISTICAL LEVELS or set in the instrument as a default L01 110 120 L30 140 150 160 170 180 190 are visible in this mode after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons 80 80 C PEAK C 80 Loo Leo LTO T PraFilscm ER Prailscm 1243 1243 Displays with the statistics made with linear integration presented in 3 PROFILES mode During the measurements which are indicated by the loudspeaker icon the current time from the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD is displayed on the right bottom clock The envelope icon indicates that results selected in the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are logged 6 10 GF USER MANUAL Profileci3 eis odes Displays during the measurement performed in SM with the active LOGGER ET Profiled ProFile D e There is also possible to present differently the measurement data in 3 PROFILES after pressing the ALT and A or ALT and v push buttons In this case
34. a a oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 3 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO a b c DISPLAY MODES windows in VM The LOGGER mode of results presentation is available if and only if the data from at least one profile are logged in the logger s file If the LOGGER position is switched on V but there was nothing stored in the logger s file in the selected profile there were selected results PEAK MAX MIN or RMS in the case of SM and PEAK MAX or RMS in the case of VM but the instrument still waits for the logger results i e the LOGGER STEP is long the NO RESULTS text is displayed When the LOGGER is selected as active and the LOGGER positions in all profiles are not selected the LOGGER mode of results presentation is skipped 6 2 G7 USER MANUAL RESULTS Display the LOGGER mode when there is nothing in the logger to be displayed after setting LOGGER as active The display with the measurement result in so called one profile mode is presented below On the top of the display under the icons line there are the following data the function name SPL LEQ SEL Lden LEPd Ltm3 Ltm5 Lxx OVL PEAK MAX MIN in the case of sound measurements or RMS VDV OVL PEAK MTVV in the case of vibration measurements the detector time constant in SM when the detector is exponential IMP
35. offset offset from the beginning of the RAM file length number of bytes to read Notice The character is treated as the file name of the catalogue and must be sent to the instrument All data words are sent as lt LSB gt lt MSB gt When an error is detected in the file specification or data the instrument will send 4 The catalogue of the files is a set of the records containing 16 words 16 bits each Each record describes one file saved in the instrument s Flash disc The record structure is as follows words 0 3 8 characters of the file name word 4 file type binary number word 5 reserved word 6 the least significant word of the file size word 7 the most significant word of the file size words 8 15 reserved A 7 G7 USER MANUAL A 6 Function 5 Statistical analysis results read out 5 function enables one to read out the statistical analysis results 5 function format is defined as follows T5 p where p the source of the statistical analysis results for p 1 2 or 3 it is the corresponding profile and for p 0 the results obtained during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis The device responds sending the current classes of the statistics in the following format 5 p lt Status Byte LSB of the transmission counter MSB of the transmission counter NofClasses BottomClass ClassWidth Counter of the class Counter of the class Status Byt
36. weighting to 98 6 dB A weighting Table C 3 Linear operating ranges for LEQ value 4 kHz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters Linear operating range for frequency 4 kHz RANGE LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and nominal microphone sensitivity 22 mV Pa LOW from 25 dB weighting to 116 dB weighting HIGH from 36 dB A weighting to 139 dB weighting Table C 5 Linear operating ranges for LEQ value 8 kHz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters Linear operating range for frequency 8 kHz RANGE LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and nominal microphone sensitivity 22 mV Pa LOW from 25 dB weighting to 113 9 dB A weighting HIGH from 36 dB A weighting to 136 9 dB A weighting C 2 G7 USER MANUAL Table C 5 Linear operating ranges for LEQ value 12 5 kHz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters Linear operating range for frequency 12 5 kHz RANGE LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and nominal microphone sensitivity 22 mV Pa LOW from 25 dB A weighting to 110 7 dB A weighting HIGH from 36 dB A weighting to 133 7 dB A weighting Measuring range for the Peak value Table C 6 Linear operating ranges for PEAK value 1 kHz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters Linear operating range PEAK for the microphone sensitivity 22 mV P
37. UNIT LABEL windows opened and after scrolling with the lt A gt lt gt push buttons Notice The contents of the UNIT LABEL should be always transmitted to the Svantek s service in the case of any problems faced by the user during the instrument s operation 6 26 G7 USER MANUAL 7 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS FILE The registration of the measurement results is an essential task for the efficient use of the instrument All available measurement results can be stored in the FLASH type memory of the instrument or on the USB memory stick There are two main ways for storing the measurement data in the instrument 1 Save files containing the main results and setup settings using the FILE list 2 Save data in the logger s file Notice The instrument s ogger memory is independent from the results and setup memory The capacity of the available memory is equal to 32 MB and is divided between logger 16 252 428 bytes and results and setup settings 15 859 224 bytes Notice All of the options except DEFRAGMENTATION from the FILE list be used for the USB memory stick Saving files In the case of the G7 instrument there are files containing data e from Sound LEVEL METER e from Vibration LEVEL METER e from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e from 1 3 OCTAVE mode e from DOSE e from FFT analysis e from RT60 mode e stored in the instrument s logger accessible in the
38. gt ENTER gt 12350CT9 lt 2 Saved SAVE FILE 12380CTS Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEW Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE not active 7 15 G7 USER MANUAL 12350CT9 Saved PRESS ANY Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE active 7 2 6 Saving maximum values in the spectrum SAVE MAX SPECT The SAVE MAX SPECT enables the user to save the highest values of the INSTANTENEOUS spectra calculated with 100 milliseconds time step in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis which occured during the INTEGR PERIOD set in the INPUT list path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD The activation or deactivation of the SAVE MAX SPECT is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the activation is confirmed The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SAVE OPTIO SAVE OPTIO SAVE RAM FILE SAVE OPTIO RAM FILE REPLACE AUTO SAVE HS if E 1 E HS HS E 1 o if 1 E 1 E 1 SRUE 1 DIRECT SRUE EDT iL SAVE MAS SPECT EA SAVE SPECT SAVE SPELCT L 1 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE SPECT in SM a and VM b a SAVE MAS SPECT H b SAVE
39. rbelete SH Insert FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons SAVE FILE 2508 SRUE SAVE FILE 2508 SRUE SAVE FILE 280 SRUE SAVE FILE 7608 SRUE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP S5H Delete 5H Inzert FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete 5 Insert S5Hz Delete Insert The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing the ENTER push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one SAVE FILE SAVE 280CT0 SAVE OPTIONS 1 is used LOAD SH Delete gt Insert PRESS ANY DEFRAGMENTATION Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP G7 USER MANUAL L SAVE SAVE FILE 2300 TH FILE OCT EET SAE 380CTO Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Saved Dp Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP DELETE ALL Press UP to EDIT SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY DEFRAGMENTATION Displays during the attempt of overwriti
40. v push buttons are used for the selection of the ASCII characters Digits small and big letters as well as special characters all together 91 are available cf the view of the displays below Small and big letters are placed one after another Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons causes that the highlighted character is erased from the text DEL function Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt causes that the whole text is shifted one position to the right INSERT function The window is closed and the instrument returns to the REPORT list after pressing the ENTER or lt ESC gt push button In the first case the edited text is saved and will be added to the printed reports In the latter case newly introduced text or the amendments made in the old one are ignored o TITLE 4i TITLE 6i eFfiasHhIiJiKkLl1MmHno OP eGR Ss Tto S oa TITLE r211 123456789 RaBbCcDdER SH Delete 5H Inzert 5Hz Delete 5 Insert S5Hz Delete Insert Displays with all available characters 8 3 G7 USER MANUAL TITLE r 911 Ek TITLE r811 S5H Delete 5H z Inzert S5Hz Delete SH gt Insert Displays with all available characters cont 8 2 Printing of the measurement results PRINT RESULTS The PRINT RESULTS enables the user to print the report on the attached printer or to send out the report to a PC using the SvanPC software and the U
41. 11 17 83 OCT FE modify press or 5H amp change or 5H amp change or 5H amp change or 5H amp change RTC windows with the different parameters to be set A Notice The new value of a parameter is confirmed after each pressing of the lt lt gt or lt gt gt together with the lt SHIFT gt push buttons new value is selected without any confirmation from the ENTER push button The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER or lt ESC gt push button 9 14 The RT 60 averaging function RT60 AVERAGING The RT60 AVERAGING appears in the SETUP list when the RT60 function is selected in the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION window path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION RT60 It is available only in sound mode This window is opened after the selection of the RT60 AVERAGING text from the SETUP list by means of the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The RT60 AVERAGING contains three positions AVERAGING AVERAGING CLEAR and AVERAGING NO SETUP list the RT60 AVERAGING text highlighted displayed inversely 9 14 1 The RT 60 averaging AVERAGING In the AVERAGING position the user can switch on averaging option for the RT60 measurements The activation is made by setting of On text in the AVERAGING line by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the activation requ
42. 2 6 Ah with USB 1 1 Host function not active and backlight off e USB interface 500 mA HUB The BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY looks differently depending on the current powering source BATTERY BATTERY BATTERY a BATTERY EXTERNAL POWER 12 1 EXTERNRL POMER USB POWER 9 2U 5 04 a b BATTERY windows with different sources powering the instrument SA 15 external DC power adapter a SA 17A external battery pack b internal batteries c and USB power d For the external powering the SA 15 adapter should be connected to the Power socket located on the bottom cover of the instrument When the instrument is powered from the external power supply or by the USB interface the red diode on the right corner of the front panel bottom of the device switches on In the case of SA 15 the EXTERNAL POWER message appears in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY 3 22 G7 USER MANUAL When the instrument is powered from batteries the Battery icon is presented on the top of the display When voltage of the batteries is too low the icon is flashing To change the batteries the user has to switch off the instrument take off the black bottom cover of the instrument unscrew battery cover change the batteries and reassemble the parts of the instrument The fully charged battery ensures more than 16 hours of the continuous work of the instrument with the backlight off and USB 1 1 Host
43. D 23 G7 USER MANUAL The Wd filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the x and y directions and for horizontal recumbent direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB dB 10 10 2 20 3 3 40 40 50 50 50 60 70 70 80 80 50 30 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 16 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz sag so cB 0 2 0 3 5 8 11 9 18 0 24 1 30 8 41 8 58 6 6 2 dB Characteristics of the Wd digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM The Wc filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body during the seat back measurements It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB dB 10 10 2 20 30 3 40 40 50 50 0 70 70 80 80 50 30 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz 299000 2088 cs 1 23 0 0 0 2 0 2 1 0 5 8 12 0 18 7 28 48 8 64 7 dB Characteristics of the Wc digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM D 24 G7 USER MANUAL The Wj filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal under the head of the recumbent person It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards
44. IEPE CURREHT SETUP REGLAGES _ NIUEHRU STATIST MINUT USB HOST PORT FILTRE UTIL WHITES WIBRAT AUERTISSEMENTS RECENT ITEMS LANGUAGE MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFIL MEASUREMENT SETUP a RAPPORTO STAMPA RISULT STAMPA STATIST Ustawienia zapisu Wczytaj Usuri Usur wszystko Defragmentacja HEHU FUNKCTS oa BESTAND SAVE OPTIES LRRD SCREEH SETUP BATTERIE ETIQUETTE SAVE OPTIOHS LOAL DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRRGHEHTRTIGOH SRLURTREG MAHUALE IMP ST SRHLURHTHG CARICA DATI FILE FILE DR ELIM CRHCELLR FILE DEF RAMMENTA2 TONE Zakres pomiarowy Profil 1 Profil 2 Profil 3 FFT m HERSUR K SLELTETES IMT IDS CIELUS ISM LOGGER PUFF LEPES LOGGER NAME amp LOG15 SETUP HEHU FUHCTIE m Ll HERSUR DELRI 5 SETUP LOGGER amp LOG15 Displays with the French version of the user interface 9 3 G7 USER MANUAL oa oa oa oa LANGUAGE ARCHIVO ENTRADA FUHCI H DEUTSCH MEDICI N ENGL ISH OPCIOHES MEASUREMENT RANGE CARGAR 1 FuHC MEDICI H ITRLIRHO BORRAR CRLIBRRCI H FLEMISH BORRAR TOCO FIL 3 FERHHCRIS DEF RAGMENTACIGH TRIGGER Displays with the Spanish version of the user interface L Sprachauswahl Datei 14 drucken Mess Einstell m Datei Hr Startverz ger Speicheroptionen Dateiname 2 Interar Zeit ESPFHRNDL laden Pegelmes
45. MSRM DETECTOR 1 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER P P LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS PROFILE 4 gt FILTER EE DETECTOR 1 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS L1 G7 USER MANUAL L1 PROFILEC1 FILTER DETECTOR 1 L GGER PEHK L GGER P P LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of old weighting filters in human vibration option The mentioned above filters can be set in the same manner as the other filters in the PROFILE x windows The first one of them the W Bxy filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the horizontal direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 rev dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 0 13 38 2 0 25 20 8 0 50 7 5 8 0 12 0 18 l 14 0 64 24 2 30 8 8 128 41 8 256 55 7 512 6 1024 Hz 85 3 dB Characteristics of the W Bxy digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM The W Bz filter is used for the assessment of the vibration signal influence on the human body in the vertical direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 rev dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 0 25 25 4 0 50 14 1 0 6 3 2 0 3 2 4 0 0 2
46. O1 O1 OO F2 XO P2 4 Oy CQ OO P2 C P O1 OI C 8 16 G7 USER MANUAL L42 43 0 52 3 71 41 192 39 4 48 0 57 5 143 42 9 52 2 70 8 193 39 1 47 8 144 42 9 52 1 70 5 194 38 6 47 6 56 7 L45 42 8 52 0 70 2 L95 37 3 47 4 56 2 146 42 8 5149 69 9 L96 39 49 47 2 5b 7 L47 42 7 51 9 69 7 L97 35 6 47 0 55s 1 148 42 6 51 8 69 6 198 35 4 46 3 54 6 149 42 6 51 7 69 4 199 35 1 45 4 54 0 150 42 5 51 6 69 2 Example of the printed file from the SOUND METER mode LEVEL format 4 8 5 Printing of the logger results PRINT LOGGER The PRINT LOGGER enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger or to send them to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT LOGGER text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER This option is under development Function not available text appears on the display FRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT USER FILTERS b PRINT CATALOGUE a REPORT windows with the PRINT LOGGER selected in SM a and VM b D a Function Hot available PRESS ANY KEW PRINT LOGGER window opened Function not available message 8 6 Printing of the coefficients of the user filters PRINT USE
47. RMS CAL FACTOR 6 68mm s 475 58 S4dum s Smis C 3 5206 zlimm is 6657 52 Zi immis 94 4m s Displays with change of the default range values in vibration mode caused by the calibration factor 5 3 Setting parameters in a profile PROFILE x The user enters the PROFILE x sub list after pressing the ENTER push button on the displayed inversely PROFILE x text which has to be selected by means of the lt lt lt gt gt push buttons In the PROFILE x sub list the following parameters can be programmed independently for each profile weighting filter FILTER RMS detector type DETECTOR and profile s results logged in a file LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN and LOGGERRMS in the case of sound measurements and LOGGER PEAK LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX and LOGGER RMS in the case of vibration measurements IHPUT IHPUT IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP INPUT list with the PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 selected 5 8 G7 USER MANUAL A Notice The change of the profile parameters is not possible when the measurement is performed The user has to finish the current measurement 5 3 1 Weighting filter selection in a profile FILTER The foll
48. a a a REFERENCE LEUELS EEFEREHCE LEUELS FEFEREHCE LEVELS 221 d nms DIL REFERENCE LEVELS windows setting the reference level of displacement signal In the case of sound measurements the REFERENCE LEVELS sub lists is used only to inform the user that the reference level of the acoustic signal is equal to 20 uPa After pressing the lt ESC gt or lt ENTER gt push buttons the sub list is closed a REFERENCE LEVELS 24 Pa REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level of the acoustic signal 9 10 Parameters of remote communication REMOTE COMMUNICATION The REMOTE COMMUNICATION enables the user to select the type and set the packet size of the packet communication In order to enter the position the user has to select the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt SETUP DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHRL 170 SETUP IEPE CURREHT REFEREHCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP list the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text highlighted displayed inversely 9 13 G7 USER MANUAL 9 10 1 Selecting the type of remote communication TYPE The TYPE enables the user to select the type of the REMOTE COMMUNICATION Three options are available Off CONTINUOUS and PACKET The selection of the required option is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made by pressing
49. cf Tab B 1 9 result3 MIN result depending on the value of BufferP 1 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result4 gt RMS result depending on the value of BufferP 1 cf Tab B 1 9 2 results of the measurement from the second profile if the corresponding LOGGER position was active paths MENU INPUT PROFILE 2 LOGGER PEAK MENU INPUT PROFILE 2 LOGGER MAX MENU INPUT PROFILE2 LOGGER MIN INPUT PHROFILE2 LOGGER RMS up to four words are written lt result1 gt PEAK result depending on the value of BufferP 2 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result2 gt MAX result depending on the value of BufferP 2 cf Tab B 1 9 result3 MIN result depending on the value of BufferP 2 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result4 gt RMS result depending on the value of BufferP 2 cf Tab B 1 9 3 results of the measurement from the third profile if the corresponding LOGGER position was active paths MENU INPUT PROFILE 3 LOGGER PEAK MENU INPUT PROFILE 3 LOGGER MAX MENU INPUT PROFILES LOGGER MIN INPUT PHOFILES LOGGER RMS up to four words are written lt result1 gt PEAK result depending on the value of BufferP 3 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result2 gt MAX result depending on the value of BufferP 3 cf Tab B 1 9 result3 MIN result depending on the value of BufferP 3 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result4 gt RMS result depending on the value of BufferP 3 cf Tab B 1 9 4 results of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis if 1 1
50. in the other lists aol MEASUR FUNCTION LEWEL METER L1 141 OCTAVE 175 OCTAVE oa FUNCTION MODE gt gt gt CAL IERAT ICH 1 1 1 RTGS DOSE METER DOSE METER 3 27 G7 USER MANUAL HERSUR FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION 1 LEVEL METER 5 1 1 1 OCTAVE 1 1 OCTAVE 11 5 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT 1 1 DOSE METER ao HERSUR FUNCTION 1 LEWEL METER 1 1 L L e Displays with FUNCTION list opened in SM MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available options b c d e f and g A function is selected by placing the special character in the line with the function s name The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v push buttons After placing the character in the line with the functions name the user has to press the ENTER push button The window for entering the access code to a function is opened in the first essay of its execution after pressing the ENTER push button in the case when a function was not purchased together with the instrument VALID CODE oa ENTER CODE ENTER CODE E 97124119 SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete SH gt Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to a function The introduction of the access code is performed in the same way as the edition
51. source of the triggering signal TriggerSource 0 RMS 1 the RMS result from the first profile in the case of TriggerMode SLOPE or SLOPE 1 External lO level of triggering TriggerLev 24 136 dB 10 radient of triggering in case of TriggerMode GRAD Tnggerciued ae ie ae TriggerPre reserved TriggerPost reserved B 5 G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 6 LOGGER TRIGGER parameters Word Name number Comment Oxnn2C 2C id nn block s length TriggerMode trigger mode 0 OFF LEVEL 4 LEVEL in the case of RT60 function and DECAY method 5 DECAY in the case of RT60 function and IMPULSE method 1 SLOPE TriggerSource source of the triggering signal 0 RMS 1 the RMS result from the first profile in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE analyser nn number of 1 1 OCTAVE filter 8 NOct in the case of 1 3 OCTAVE analyser nn number of 1 3 OCTAVE filter e 23 NTer in the case of RT60 function 48 TOTAL Z NTer NTotal TriggerLev level of triggering 24 136 dB 10 TriggerGrad in the case of RT60 function and DECAY method decay of triggering 10dB 10 in other cases reserved TriggerPre number of the records taken into account before the fulfilment of the triggering condition 1 50 TriggerPost number of the records taken into account after the fulfilment of the triggering condition 1 200 Table B 1
52. 0 00 0 63 0 00 0 42 0 83 1 14 0 00 0 83 0 86 0 00 1 53 0 00 1 44 1 59 2 22 0 00 1 69 1 93 0 00 2 02 0 00 1 86 2 01 2 39 2 47 0 00 2 18 1 17 2 10 0 00 1 24 1 52 1 84 1 85 1 92 0 00 0 00 1 94 2 04 3 03 0 00 2 62 0 00 3 10 0 00 2 97 0 00 2 23 2 28 3 41 2 66 0 00 3 15 3 18 0 00 3 57 3 89 0 00 3 33 4 42 0 00 3 37 4 38 3 71 0 00 3 90 4 82 0 00 5 33 0 00 4 01 4 22 0 00 3 18 4 46 0 00 3 24 4 58 0 00 3 73 4 63 5 02 0 00 4 68 5 89 0 00 6 36 0 00 5 07 5 62 4 50 4 97 5 55 0 00 4 34 6 09 0 00 4 89 5 17 0 00 5 89 0 00 5 52 6 50 0 00 6 27 0 00 5 77 4 99 5 01 5 33 5 99 0 00 7 05 0 00 7 21 0 00 0 00 6 86 0 00 6 68 0 00 5 82 7 44 0 00 6 13 7 05 00 0 7 30 8 04 9 05 0 00 8 63 0 00 7 78 7 09 7 99 0 00 8 83 0 00 9 22 0 00 9 51 0 00 Angle 135 140 140 145 145 150 150 155 155 160 160 165 165 170 170 175 175 180 0 27 0 29 0 00 0 28 0 31 0 32 0 00 0 32 0 33 0 37 0 40 0 42 0 45 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 0 54 0 57 0 59 0 61 0 64 0 65 0 66 0 67 0 68 0 16 0 00 0 07 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 00 0 25 0 00 0 25 0 00 0 22 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 16 0 44 0 00 0 43 0 00 0 37 0 00 0 25 0 00 0 20 0 62 0 65 0 66 0 00 0 61 0 00 0 44 0 00 0 35 0 79 0 88 0 92 0 00 0 85 0 00 0 67 0 00 0 65 0 08 0 21 0 28 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 13 0 20 0 23 0 36 0 54 0 68 0 71 0 48 0 00 0 17 0 00 0 00 0 68 0 86 1 12 1 31 1 11 0 00 0 56 0 00 0 26 C 21 G7
53. 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 05 0 12 0 14 0 00 0 03 0 16 0 00 0 05 0 16 0 44 0 54 0 00 0 33 0 00 0 09 0 28 0 42 0 65 1 12 1 17 0 00 0 77 0 00 0 53 0 00 0 27 0 00 0 65 0 00 0 35 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 20 0 48 0 89 1 40 0 00 0 70 0 00 0 37 0 65 0 13 0 43 0 81 1 17 0 00 0 42 0 00 0 41 0 86 0 00 0 41 0 97 1 33 0 00 0 14 0 23 0 69 0 94 1 06 1 51 2 13 2 39 0 00 1 13 1 55 1 96 0 00 1 92 2 70 2 71 0 00 1 28 1 53 2 16 0 00 2 38 1 06 1 86 2 44 0 00 1 13 1 64 1 74 0 00 1 87 1 48 2 07 3 00 3 33 0 00 2 40 2 65 0 00 2 80 0 00 2 40 3 37 2 39 0 00 2 55 2 68 2 88 0 00 2 14 3 30 4 59 2 89 3 04 3 40 3 53 3 63 0 00 3 76 5 03 0 00 3 36 3 87 4 00 4 33 4 82 0 00 3 55 4 59 0 00 2 97 3 36 3 59 3 85 4 76 0 00 4 77 6 27 0 00 4 54 4 65 5 02 5 11 5 80 0 00 4 99 5 77 0 00 4 38 4 48 5 08 5 39 0 00 4 75 C 22 G7 USER MANUAL 5 87 6 41 0 00 5 30 5 34 5 42 6 53 0 00 5 62 4 69 6 50 7 01 5 96 6 09 6 53 0 00 6 97 0 00 6 82 0 00 6 05 6 45 6 57 6 59 7 19 0 00 6 68 8 70 0 00 7 80 7 90 8 26 0 00 8 59 8 93 0 00 8 96 0 00 8 10 0 00 8 65 0 00 8 69 8 75 0 00 Angle 225 230 230 235 235 240 240 245 245 250 250 255 255 260 260 265 265 270 0 31 0 00 0 30 0 00 0 24 0 00 0 24 0 00 0 21 0 38 0 00 0 33 0 00 0 26 0 00 0 22 0 00 0 18 0 65 0 00 0 59 0 00 0 46 0 00 0 36 0 00 0 26 0 17 0 00 0 17 0 00 0 14 0 00 0 09 0 00 0 05 0 38 0 00 0 38 0 00 0
54. 0 23 0 44 0 59 0 00 0 50 1 11 1 26 0 01 0 04 0 00 0 11 0 31 0 69 0 82 0 98 1 31 0 02 0 05 0 08 0 00 0 02 0 22 0 63 0 70 0 98 0 21 0 00 0 00 0 31 0 47 0 63 0 80 0 97 1 37 0 07 0 26 0 55 0 67 0 77 1 10 1 34 1 48 1 67 0 00 0 02 0 07 0 23 0 42 0 50 0 69 0 81 1 55 0 01 0 09 0 20 0 28 0 00 0 21 0 22 0 85 1 02 0 05 0 00 0 40 0 54 0 00 0 92 1 17 1 43 2 04 0 68 0 73 0 79 0 94 1 21 1 64 1 87 2 03 2 51 0 43 0 82 0 95 0 98 1 37 1 51 1 99 2 35 2 78 Angle 45 50 50 55 55 60 60 65 65 70 70 75 75 80 80 85 85 90 0 04 0 00 0 04 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 07 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 07 0 08 0 00 0 16 0 00 0 16 0 00 0 15 0 00 0 10 0 00 0 02 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 13 0 15 0 18 0 11 0 00 0 09 0 00 0 06 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 01 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 00 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 19 0 20 0 23 0 28 0 33 0 38 0 41 0 42 0 00 0 28 0 60 0 63 0 00 0 60 0 00 0 53 0 54 0 57 0 59 0 46 0 00 0 34 0 00 0 08 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 09 0 66 0 71 0 00 0 43 0 00 0 03 0 23 0 54 0 83 0 85 0 91 1 05 1 16 0 00 0 88 0 42 0 46 0 73 0 27 0 00 0 02 0 03 0 05 0 19 0 23 0 00 0 25 0 31 0 00 0 44 0 76 1 01 0 00 0 99 1 02 0 00 0 46 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 14 0 52 0 82 0 00 0 73 0 11 0 15 0 00 0 23 0 00 0 00 0 57 0 85 0 87 0 45 0 81 1 14 1 26 0 00 1 13 0 98 1 49 1 91 0 00 0 86 1 07 1 48 1 82 0 00 1 37 0 00 2 41 0 46 0 60 0 93 0 00 0 48 0 85 1 44
55. 1 360 0 RPS RPM Unit Xu1 RPM XTO switched off OFF Logger Triggering mode TriggerMode XT1 LEVEL XT2 LEVEL Logger Triggering level TriggerLev in SLM mode XLnnn nnn level in dB 24 136 Logger Triggering XQnn nn number of records saved in the logger before the triggering condition nn 0 50 G7 USER MANUAL Logger Triggering Number of records taken into account after the fulfilment of the triggering condition TriggerPost Xqnnn nnn number of records saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition nn e 0 200 A 21 G7 USER MANUAL B DATA FILE STRUCTURES B 1 Structure of the G7 file Each file containing data from the G7 instrument consists of several groups of words In the case of the G7 the internal file system version 6 04 there are different types of files that contain the results stored in the file in the instrument s logger cf App B 2 the measurement results from the Sound Level Meter mode cf App B 3 the measurement results from the Vibration Level Meter mode cf App B 4 the results of the DOSE METER function cf App B 5 the results from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis cf App B 6 the results from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis cf App B 7 the results from the FFT analysis cf App B 8 the results of the RT60 function cf App B 9 the setup data cf App B 10 Each file has the following elements a file header cf T
56. 12 06 00 00 00 00 66 69 L 66 69 L TIMER windows setting day of the instrument s switch on 9 18 3 Setting hour of the instrument s switch on START HOUR The START HOUR determines hour of the measurement start The required hour can be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the START HOUR text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list In order to set minutes one has to enter their position pressing the lt A gt v pushbuttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt 5 gt push button MODE SINGLE MODE SINGLE MODE SINGLE TART DAY Bi FEB START DAY Bi FEB START DAY Bi FEB 5 START HOUR SSi START HOUR 81 fi START HOUR 9 23 G7 USER MANUAL L L TIMER TIMER TIMER MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR START DAY B3 START DAY Bi START DAY 85 START HOUR Sfi START HOUR SA START HOUR 02 fis REPETITION 12 88 REPETITION 12 88 REPETITION 12 88 TIMER windows setting hour and minute of the instrument s switch on 9 18 4 Selecting the start hours for four irregular automatic m
57. 180 150 2800Hz E 45 p 15 a Ea Aen Oe 45 2800Hz FBR wh 0 i 1 T 180 150 400 50 0 50 100 150 180 Eas A5 3550Hz ISA om n i 1 180 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 180 Stopnie 3150 Hz 4000 Hz G7 USER MANUAL v so 4000Hz n n i n 180 450 50 0 50 100 150 180 Stopnie 75 C 15 G7 USER MANUAL 4500 Hz 5000 Hz 5000Hz 180 180 180 5600 Hz 6300 Hz 7100 Hz 8000 Hz gp 8000HZ C 16 8500 Hz G7 USER MANUAL Biad dB 9000 Hz 9500 Hz ECER 3 50 0 50 100 150 150 Stopnie 10000 Hz 150 9500 2 9500Hz 10000Hz ETT 1 0 i n 100 0 50 100 150 19 180 459 100 50 0 50 100 Stopnie t z 150 180 C 17 G7 USER MANUAL 10600 Hz 11200 Hz 11800 Hz 12500 Hz 11800Hz G7 directional response with
58. 315 400 500 630 units Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz 0 deg dB 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 04 Freq 800 MOR 25 I TO 2 0 Dey AO 5 0 6 3 8 0 10 0 12 5 16 0 20 0 units Hz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz Hz kHz kHz nes 0 08 0 08 0 12 0 19 033 0 62 0 79 127 206 299 401 3 82 681 922 Ea C 7 G7 USER MANUAL Diffuse field compensation filter dB LdB 5 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 2 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 20 3 0 3 0 4 0 4 1000 i260 1587 2000 2520 3175 4000 5040 6350 S000 10079 12699 16000 20158 Hz 0 07 0 11 D 17 0 27 0 42 0 63 0 94 1 35 1 86 2 41 2 90 3 15 Diffuse field filter implemented in G7 instrument Effect of an Extension cable length 3 and 10 meters 3 06 2 22 dB Table C 12 Typical effect of vibration perpendicular to the plane of microphone diaphragm Attenuation dB for Input voltage 1 Vrms Input voltage 4 Vnus f Hz with SV 12L with with with SV 12L with wit
59. 5 11 PROFILE x windows SM the MAX result to be not saved or saved in a logger s 20202222 2 5 11 PROFILE x windows VM the MAX result to be not saved or saved in logger s 5 11 PROFILE x windows result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file esses 5 12 PROFILE x windows the MIN result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file ee 5 12 PROFILE x window SM the RMS result to be not saved or saved in a logger s le 5 12 PROFILE x windows VM the RMS result to be not saved or saved in logger s file pp 5 12 TRIGGER SETUP selected in the INPUT list and the TRIGGER SETUP window eee 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER windows 45 etat o pter DRE PP ro RO ER 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER window TRIGGER switched Off eene nennen een rennen 5 13 Displays during the measurements while the triggering condition is not fulfilled 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SLOPE modes selected Ne 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL modes selected pp 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER window with the GRAD mode selected Ne 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with not active SOURCE signal 5 15 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SOURCE signal selectign enne 5 15 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode eene 5 15 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode 1
60. B 1 19 the parameters of the RT60 function cf Tab B 1 20 the results from the RT60 function cf Tab B 1 21 the averaged results from the RT60 function cf Tab B 1 22 the RPM results cf Tab B 1 23 the settings of the instrument saved in the setup file cf Tab B 1 24 B 1 G7 USER MANUAL e the logger header cf Tab B 1 25 e the data stored during the measurements in the logger cf Tab B 1 26 Below all file structure groups are described separately in Tab B 1 1 Tab B 1 27 The format used in the columns named Comment with the square parenthesis xx yy means the contents of the word with xx is the most significant byte MSB and yy the lowest significant byte LSB of the word The format Oxnnnn means that the nnnn is four digit number in hexadecimal form Table B 1 1 File header facien Name Comment 0 OxnnO1 01 id nn block s length 1 4 FileName file or logger name 8 characters 5 Reserved reserved 6 CurrentDate file creation date 7 CurrentTime file creation time 8 11 AssBufFileName name of the associated logger or file 8 bytes Table B 1 2 Unit and software specification E Name Comment 0 Oxnn02 02 id nn block s length 1 UnitNumber unit number 2 UnitType unit type 957 3 SoftwareVersion software version 100 4 SoftwarelssueDate software issue date device mode 5 DeviceMode 0 Vibrati
61. Counter of the class is a four byte word containing the number of the measurements belonging to the current class Notice The bytes in the words are sent according to the scheme lt LSByte gt lt MSByte gt A 8 G7 USER MANUAL A 7 Function 6 Remote setting of the user filters Function 6 enables one to send to the instrument the coefficients of the user filters In the available formats description of 6 functions the following symbols are used type 0 for the vibration filters 1 for the acoustic filters name name name filter names given by the user V real type value expressed in dB first integer type value number of the coefficient in the user filter pos integer type value Total value number avd for the vibration filters 0 Acc 1 Vel 2 Dil for the acoustic filters this parameter is always equal to 0 cal the calibration coefficient given as the real number expressed in dB chn channel number 1 2 3 or 4 6 function formats are defined as follows 6 type L This function returns the list of the defined existing in the instrument filters in the following format 6 type n name name 6 type W name v v V This function sets the coefficients of the new user filter named as name The name parameter should be unique in the instrument there is not any other filter with the same name otherwise it will be an error The function answers in the
62. ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER E E E Displays with the activated markers The exemplary presentation of the markers on the time history plot is shown below to view a plot with markers the user has to transfer data to the proper software 80 4 70 60 4 50 4 e Leq 40 d s Marker 1 LCD CR IUE Marker 2 30 4 Saal s Marker a Marker 4 20 T T T T T 1 13 30 00 13 30 09 13 30 17 13 30 26 13 30 35 13 30 43 13 30 52 Time history plot with the indication of the active markers 2 5 G7 USER MANUAL 2 2 Input and output sockets of the instrument The measurement input called Input is placed in the centre of the instrument s top cover It is TNC socket The microphone preamplifier SV 12L has the proper plug in with the screw The accelerometers have to be connected to the instrument using also the TNC connector After plug in the preamplifier or the accelerometer to the measurement input the screw should be twisted to the light resistance The full description of the signals connected to the sockets is given in the Appendix C Top cover of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale In the bottom cover there are four sockets placed from the right to the left as follows Ext Pow USB Host USB Device USB Client and Ext I O Bottom cover of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale The USB Device 1 1 interface is the serial interface wo
63. EXTERNAL POWER EXTERNAL POWER USE POHER 12 1U 9 2U 5 0u BATTERY windows for different sources powering the instrument 6 6 Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL 6 25 G7 USER MANUAL The UNIT LABEL enables the user to check the type of the instrument its serial number the current software versions installed in it and the standards which the instrument fulfils In order to enter the list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed UNIT LABEL text of the DISPLAY list The UNIT LABEL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or the ENTER push button Ll DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY list the UNIT LABEL text highlighted After pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt or lt A gt v push buttons the displayed text is scrolled on the display and the user can check the number of the standard fulfilled by the instrument and the current software version number The window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or ENTER push button Ll oa L1 Ll UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL C SURHTEK RHRLVZER we o6 2 APPIEC 884 1985 P ar 68904 2088 1 1268 61672 1 2682 1998 150 8841 150 5041 1999 SH 12688 MEMORY 32MB LEVEL METER v AMALYZER ve 2 Tupe 1 61266 1995 61672 1 2862
64. FAST SLOW or Lin when the detector is linear and in VM 100 ms 125 ms 10 0 s Notice the case of LINEAR RMSINTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR for LEQ SEL SEL8 E E 8h LEPd PSEL and Lxx results on the display appears Lin instead of IMP FAST or SLOW detector time constant Notice There is not any indication of the detector in the case of PEAK and OVL results The name of the implemented filter path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER is presented as the last element of the first line C 7 in SM or HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb in VM PERK MAX Fast MIN Fast SPL Fast 20 as 95 928 48 0 59 5 Profileci gt Frafiletl Frafiletl F Frafiletl LEO Lin LEPd Lin 54 2 ap VP 54 2 ap Profilecl ES i E Profilecl ES Profilecl ES rofile E rofile E rofile Ltn3 Fast Lins Fast Loa Lin 59 5 tre 59 5 ap 59 8 Profileci3 E Frafileci E Frafileci Measurement results in SM made with linear integration presented in one profile mode The result of the measurement together with its unit dB or m s for almost all results and only for OVL is given in the second line The profile the results are coming from is visible in the bottom of the display Profile 1 Profile 2 or Profile 3 The vertical line showing the value of the result in th
65. FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP DEFRAGMENTATION text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list 7 29 G7 USER MANUAL Notice The DEFRAGMENTATION must not be broken the user should never press lt 5 gt or any other push button during the DEFRAGMENTATION process 7 6 1 Merging result and setup files memory FILES DEFRAGMENTATION The FILES DEFRAGMENT is used to join the result and setup files memory In order to select this the user has to display inversely the FILES DEFRAGMENT text in the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list using the A or lt lt gt push button oa DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRRGMEHT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT FILES DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to continue the execution of the function one has to press the ENTER push button The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation The next pressing of the ENTER push button when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the window the return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button m a FILES DEFRHGHM FILES DEFERGH Are uou Hre uou sure
66. SLM only the presence depends the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 18 Results of the statistical analysis performed in 1 3 OCTAVE mode SLM only the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 19 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 8 Structure of the file with the FFT analysis results File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended settings cf Tab B 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM or Tab B 1 9 VLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM or Tab B 1 10 VLM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 RPM results cf Tab B 1 23 VLM only the presence depends on the RPM On flag Header of the FFT analysis cf Tab B 1 13 FFT analysis results cf Tab B 1 14 Header of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 16 Results of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 17 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 25 G7 USER MANUAL B 9 Structure of the file containing RT60 functions results File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1
67. SPECT To see the MAX values on the display during the the real time 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis measurement the user has to activate the option in the DISPLAY list oath MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SPECTRUM VIEW MAX or path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 7 2 7 Saving the lowest values in the spectrum SAVE MIN SPECT The SAVE MIN SPECT enables the user to save the lowest values of the INSTANTENEOUS spectra calculated with 100 milliseconds time step in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis which occured during the INTEGR PERIOD set in the INPUT list path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD The activation or deactivation of the SAVE MIN SPECT is done by pressing the lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the activation is confirmed The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SAUE OPTIO SAVE OPTIO FILE REPLACE HS SE 1 1 iE 1 a SAVE MIN 5 2 SAVE MIN SPECT SAVE MIN SPECT RA 2 b SAVE MIN 5 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MIN SPECT in SM a and in VM b To see the MIN values on the display during the real time 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user has to activate the option in the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SPECTRUM VIEW MIN with active SPECTRUM mode or
68. Se0cTa SAVE SAVE FILE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H Insert 5Hz Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete 5H Insert S5H Delete SH Insert SAVE FILE HRHME gEDCTE SRUE SAVE FILE SRUE SAVE FILE SRUE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete Insert SAVE FILE HRME MencTa SAVE SAVE FILE Se0CTa SAVE SAVE FILE SRUE FILE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF SHirDelete 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete SH Insert Display during the selection of the character SAVE FILE 2800TA SAVE SAVE FILE 2208 CTA SAVE SAVE FILE 2200 CT SAVE SAVE FILE 2200 SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAWE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP S5H Delete 5H Insert 5Hz Delete SH gt Insert 5 1 SH gt Insert
69. The cumulative density function expressed by the equation P L t L 1 P L t lt is directly used to determine so called statistical levels Ln or position parameters of the distribution D 4 The Ln is the certain boundary level surpassed by the temporary noise level values in more than n of the observation period G7 USER MANUAL Cumulative Density 97 Example Let us assume that L35 is equal to 76 8 It means that during 91 the measurements the noise level 76 8 dB o5 Em was exceeded in not more than 3596 of the observation period 79 The cumulative density function 73 for the exemplary data is presented in Figure 67 on the right side In order to determine the Ln level one has to draw the horizontal cursor 61 and find out the crossing point between 55 the cumulative density function and 3 38 w Test the cursor In G7 instrument the user can 9 determine 99 statistical levels from 101 to 43 L99 1 step of observation period The display in G7 instrument has only 64 pixels on the vertical axis and 128 on the horizontal one It is obvious that 25 the change of the axes is more suitable for 3 the presentation of 99 statistical levels In this case the user has to draw the vertical cursor 13 and the value on it gives the required 7 statistical level the value of the noise level which happened d
70. UTE DIT SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the EDIT text highlighted The selection of the position in this sub list is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button when the S1 S2 S3 or any other in the EDIT window text is displayed inversely the sub list containing the values of the coefficients for all 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters is opened n n n EDIT EDIT E 2 IE GLCAAVLABG EDIT windows the filter selection The opened window contains the centre frequencies of the filters and their coefficients 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB 1 00 Hz available values of 1Hz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB fe fe X fe fe 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB The selection of the position in the set is performed by means of the A v push buttons The value is introduced by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the USER FILTERS sub list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all settings made in the sub list or lt ESC gt push button ignoring all settings made in the sub list cum fel S1 filter windows the coefficient selection 9 20 1 3 Clearing the coefficients of the user filters CLEAR
71. e the linear detector is selected to the LEQ calculations LO e the narrow band frequency analysis is performed in 22 4 kHz band r1 e the HANNING window is used during the analysis wO e the linear averaging is used during the analysis a0 e the triggering is switched off e the SPL result from the first profile is used as the triggering signal 50 e the sixth 1 1 OCTAVE filter is treated as the triggering signal for 1 1 OCTAVE analysis 06 e the value of the seventeenth 1 3 OCTAVE filter is treated as a source of the triggering signal for 1 3 OCTAVE analysis t17 the trigger level in SLM mode is equal to 75 dB 175 e the trigger level in VLM mode is equal to 100 dB n100 e the number of the records before the triggering saved in a file of the logger is equal to 20 p20 the number of records registered after the moment in which the measured signal does not fulfil any longer the condition of the triggering is equal to 30 q30 e the gradient SLM mode in MEASURE TRIGGER is equal to 25 dB ms O25 e the gradient in VLM mode in MEASURE TRIGGER is equal to 30 dB ms k30 e the spectrum analysis is performed in a full band 0 e the exposure time is equal to 120 minutes e120 e the criterion level is equal to 84 dB c2 e the threshold level is equal to 75 dB h1 e the exchange rate is equal to x3 the FFT analysis is performed using 1920 lines y0 the FFT logger is switched off 20 e the logger i
72. gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation 6 3 Selection of the logger s file to the display presentation LOGGER VIEW The LOGGER enables the user to examine the contents of the logger files In order to open this window the user has to press the ENTER push button when the LOGGER VIEW text is displayed inversely 6 21 G7 USER MANUAL DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP SCREEN SETUP BATTERY UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted In the first line the available still loggers memory is displayed followed by The selected number of the logger s file and the number of all saved files FILE NO The name of the logger s file LOG FILE e The number of the records in the file which name is displayed in the previous line RECORDS e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the first profile P 1 e The results saved if are present in the logger from the second profile P 2 e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the third profile P 3 e The type of spectrum if 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT e The size of the remaining free memory for logger files FREE e The size of the available memory for logger file AVAILABLE a LOGGER 15459kEB LOGGER 15459KB Ms FRE 15459 32 RURILRBLE 15459 Displays the LOGGER VIEW sub list The change of the number of the
73. sure Confirmation windows during the execution of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed and after few seconds instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed after pressing the ENTER push button on the active YES option the instrument checks whether the used result and setup files memory is continuous or not If this memory is continuous the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not executed and the special message is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list 7 30 G7 USER MANUAL DEFRAGMENTATION 1 Unnecessary PRESS ANY Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary If there are conditions to execute the DEFRAGMENTATION operation it is done and the current progress is shown on the display After the successful execution the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the
74. the setting of the START DELAY with 10 seconds step 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 1 second 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of INTEGR PERIOD with 10 seconds step 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 1 and 10 minutes step 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of INTEGR PERIOD with 10 hours 5 3 Displays during setting the predefined INTEGR PERIOD sequence sss eee 5 3 Dsplay when the INT PERIOD is too short for AUTO SAVE option eee enn eene 5 4 REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to eoe beet de eei tee bi Eee etos 5 4 REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to 20 een rennen 5 4 Displays with the LOGGER deactivated and activated 2 enne 5 5 Displays during setting the LOGGER STEP available values in a sequence 1 2 5 esses 5 5 LOGGER STEP setting available values in milliseconds eese nennen eene 5 5 LOGGER STEP setting available values from 500 milliseconds to 1 hour seen 5 6 LOGGER NAME edition in MEASUREMENT SETUP essere ener trennen ene 5 6 viii G7 USER MANUAL Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file
75. voltage from 6 V to 15 V The voltage ripple should not exceed 5 The external power requirement is voltage dependant for 6 V 150 mA DC for 15 V 100 mA DC Power supply connector 5 5 2 1 mm external view Table C 21 Pin out of 5 5 2 1 connector EM The instrument can be also powered from the USB port PC In this case the following conditions and limitations should be considered e Until the internal batteries voltage is higher than ca 4 6 V the instrument operates from this source e When the internal batteries voltage decreases below 4 6 V and the USB is connected to a PC the instrument switches to operate from the USB that is indicated by the removal of the Battery icon from the display e Current capability of the USB port should be as high as 250 mA In the case of battery powered PCs the user should consider this additional current requirement e When an external power supply e g SA 17A or car battery is connected to Ext Power terminal the current is not drawn from the USB as well as from internal batteries EXT I O Extended Input Output digital Input Output 3 3 V input amp output levels User programmable Input Output connector RCA Jack external view Table C 22 Pin out of the RCA Jack connector C 33 G7 USER MANUAL Socket RCA Jack CINCH type Output Voltage 63 1 MVams 5 at 114 dB reference level
76. with the RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES text using the lt gt gt or v push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when no option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt 5 gt push button FILES RESULT FILES D ng COPY FILES RESULT FILES D ao COPY FILES J LOGGER FILES ae 1 RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES iD J SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JAN a Press EHTER to COPY RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation a the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation b LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JAH DIRECTORY 25JAH Fress EHTER to COPY b Fress EHTER to COPY After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state When the measurements are performed the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation is not allowed In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instrument returns to the FILE list 7 41 G7 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument starts the operation After the operation Files Copied O K message is presented on the display If a file ha
77. 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 Hz 10 2 8 21 3 27 8 28 4 27 2 242 18 4 13 8 pg 3 8 20 6 38 7 57 2dB Characteristics of the KB digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM D 27 G7 USER MANUAL D 2 3 Digital HP filter implemented in 1 1 amp 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis i 2 30 40 50 60 70 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 i024 2048 4096 Hz 2 8 6 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Characteristics of the HP digital filter implemented in the instrument in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis D 2 4 Digital 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters implemented in the G7 0 125 D 1277 0 25 0 354 0 5 0 202 1 1 414 2 2 828 4 FeFo 105 56 87 2 658 5 45 9 27 5 3 00 0 00 3 01 28 2 83 1 131 2 dB Characteristics of the exemplary digital 1 1 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument D 28 G7 USER MANUAL dE dE 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 650 60 70 70 80 50 50 530 0 158 0 25 0 315 0 397 0 5 0 63 0 294 1 1 26 1 58 2 FeFo 88 6 75 8 6 6 7 58 0 48 8 37 5 183 6 0 00 25 8 0 8 122 3 dB Characteristics of the exemplary lower digital 1 3 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument dB dE 0 0 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50
78. 08 0 00 0 00 G7 USER MANUAL 0 04 0 05 0 04 0 06 0 06 0 04 0 00 0 13 0 00 0 33 0 1 0 02 0 02 0 01 0 02 0 21 0 07 0 00 0 01 0 05 0 68 0 43 C 25 G7 USER MANUAL C 2 Specification of G7 as 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT sound analyser The G7 instrument as 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT sound analyser conforms to the to he Type 1 of the international standards IEC 61672 sound level meters and the IEC 61260 standard for the pass band filters See Appendix C 1 for the basic specification Antialiasing filter Built in antialiasing filter ensuring correct sampling of the measured signal Pass band 1 dB 24 2 kHz Stop band 27 1 kHz Attenuation in the stop band 100 dB Sampling frequency 48 kHz internal only Analogue to digital converter 24 bit Reference range HIGH Input attenuator accuracy for f 1 kHz and T 236 0 1 dB Internal oscillator accuracy for f 1 kHz and T 236 0 01 96 Digital Filters see Appendix D High pass filter Z cut off frequency 27 0 Hz 0 1 dB 10 0 Hz 3 0 dB pass band ripple 0 1 dB roll off 6 dB octave 1 1 OCTAVE 15 filters with centre frequencies from 1 Hz to 16 kHz base 2 meeting DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Annex B and ANSI 51 11 1986 for Type 1 1 3 OCTAVE 45 filters with centre frequencies from 0 8 Hz to 20 kHz base 2 meeting DIN 45651 IEC 1260 Annex B and ANSI 51 11 1986 for Type 1 FFT Analysis 1920 lines of the
79. 0s detector in profile n Storing the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in logger s file in SLM mode Bx n x sum of the following flags flags 1 logger with PEAK values in profile n 2 logger with MAX values in profile n 4 logger with MIN values in profile n 8 logger with RMS values in profile n Logger type in profile n in VLM mode bO switched off b1 switched on N Storing the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in logger s file in VLM mode Gx n x sum of the following flags flags 1 logger with PEAK values in profile n 2 logger with values in profile n 4 logger with MAX values in profile n 8 logger with RMS values in profile n 00 switched off 91 switched on V G7 USER MANUAL Logger step Integration period dnnn nnn number in milliseconds e 2 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 500 1000 dnns nn number in seconds 1 60 dnnm nn number in minutes 1 60 Repetition of the measurement cycles RepCycle DO infinity measurement finished by pressing the STOP push button or remotely by sending SO control code Dnns nn number in seconds Dnnm nn number in minutes Dnnh nn number in hours Detector type in the LEQ function KO infinity measurement finished by pressing the STOP push button or remotely by sending SO control code Knnnn nnnn number of repet
80. 1 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT logger 0 off 1 on in other cases reserved ExposureTime exposure time 1 480 min CriterionLevel or criterion level in case of DOSE METER 80 84 85 90 10 dB RT60 method in case of RT60 function RT60Method 1 DECAY 2 IMPULSE in other cases reserved threshold level only DOSE METER ThresholdLevel 0 75 80 85 90 10 dB ExchangeRate exchange rate only DOSE METER 2 3 4 5 last calibration type CalibrType 0 none 1 by measurement 2 by sensitivity B 3 G7 USER MANUAL CalibrDate last calibration date CalibrTime last calibration time reserved reserved outdoor filter OutdoorFilter 0 off 1 on OutdoorType outdoor filter type 0 ENVIRONMENT 1 AIRPORT compensating filter for microphones 0 off 1 on voltage input Voltagelnput 0 off 1 on 0 1 5 mA HighCurrentlIEPE 1 45 reserved Table B 1 4 VLM Parameters and global settings in the case of VLM mode Word number Name Comment B 4 Oxnn04 04 id nn block s length MeasureStartDate measure start date MeasureStartTime measure start time DeviceFunction device function 1 LEVEL METER 2 1 1 OCTAVE analyser 3 1 3 OCTAVE analyser 6 FFT analyser Measurelnput measurement input type 5 Accelerometer measurement r
81. 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT and RT60 and the mode SOUND or VIBRATION is given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the CATALOGUE window 7 33 G7 USER MANUAL The date and time of the SAVE operation are displayed in the fifth and sixth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or A with lt SHIFT gt The setup file is indicated by the SETUP text displayed in the third line instead of the LEVEL METER DOSE METER text ao m m CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE FILE H 45 175 FILE 141 OCTAVE CSOUND 1 FILE 19 MAR 2007 19 MAR 2887 19 288r 16 26 28 18 48 28 18 22 20 FILE SETI ETUPF DATE 28 MAR 1 15 25 58 Contents of CATALOGUE window Notice Many result files can be associated with one logge
82. 15 Header of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 16 Results of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 17 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 6 Structure of the file with 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended I O settings cf Tab 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM or Tab B 1 9 VLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM or Tab B 1 10 VLM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 RPM results cf Tab B 1 23 VLM only the presence depends on the RPM On flag 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results cf Tab 1 11 1 1 OCTAVE analysis MIN results the presence depends on the MIN SPECT cf Tab B 1 11 B 24 position G7 USER MANUAL 1 1 OCTAVE analysis MAX results the presence depends on the MAXSPECT position cf Tab B 1 11 Header of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 16 Results of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 17 Header of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCT
83. 2 profile Result 2 1 1 TLAV value in the 274 profile UnderRes 2 underrange value in the 2 profile Oxmm08 08 id mm sub block s length Reserved reserved Result 3 1 PEAK value in the 3 profile Result 3 2 reserved Result 3 3 maximal value MAX in the 3 profile Result 3 4 minimal value MIN in the 3 profile Result 3 5 SPL value in the 3 profile Result 3 6 LEQ value in the 3 profile Result 3 7 Lden value in the 3 profile Result 3 8 Ltm3 value in the 3 profile Result 3 9 Ltm5 value in the 3 profile Result 3 10 LAV value in the 3 profile Result 3 1 1 TLAV value in the 3 profile UnderRes 3 underrange value in the 3 profile G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 10 VLM Main results in the case of VLM mode wore Name Comment number 0 Oxnn07 07 id nn block s length 1 0x0307 used profile profile s mask 2 Oxmm08 08 id mm sub block s length 3 4 MeasureTime time of the measurement 5 Result 1 1 PEAK value in the 1s profile 6 Result 1 2 P P value in the 1s profile 7 Result 1 3 maximal value MAX in the 1 profile 8 Result 1 4 minimal value MIN in the 15 profile 9 Result 1 5 SPL value in the 1st profile 10
84. 25 108 46 3 56 7 80 9 109 46 0 56 4 80 3 110 45 8 56 1 297 111 45 7 55 9 TIR L12 45 5 b bid 78 8 E13 45 4 55 25 78 5 L14 45 2 55539 78 1 L15 45 T 55 4 71 8 L16 44 9 54 9 sp eb L17 44 8 54 8 71 2 L18 44 7 54 7 71 0 L19 44 6 54 6 65b L20 44 5 54 5 76 1 L21 44 4 54 4 75 8 G7 USER MANUAL 8 9 G7 USER MANUAL 8 10 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 L32 L33 L34 L35 L36 L37 L38 Ee EE et Is Gama 0 ECR E E nm CQ I0 EO E E eA 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 L81 L82 L83 L84 L85 L86 L87 L88 L89 L90 L91 L92 L93 44 44 44 44 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 39 39 39 4S OY P IN C iS XO ND INN C0 CO iS O1 OY Oy CO CO XO XO P PO OI OY MN IN C C iS O1 XO iO O IPS Ds
85. 30 0 00 0 23 0 00 0 16 0 35 0 00 0 29 0 00 0 10 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 33 0 25 0 00 0 23 0 24 0 27 0 31 0 36 0 00 0 68 0 54 0 56 0 62 0 68 0 73 0 76 0 77 0 28 0 34 0 23 0 00 0 09 0 14 0 00 0 04 0 07 0 00 0 09 0 61 0 63 0 00 0 46 0 57 0 76 0 80 0 72 0 99 1 17 0 00 1 03 1 22 1 34 0 00 0 88 0 20 0 36 0 20 0 22 0 45 0 50 0 00 0 10 0 27 0 91 0 98 0 98 1 23 0 00 0 95 0 00 0 54 0 77 0 89 0 00 1 08 0 00 0 58 0 00 0 44 0 59 0 74 0 00 0 60 1 12 0 00 0 31 0 45 0 50 0 61 0 86 1 59 2 05 2 09 0 00 1 34 1 35 1 70 1 85 0 00 2 43 0 00 1 85 0 00 1 85 2 17 2 40 0 00 1 42 0 00 1 78 0 00 1 23 1 39 1 87 2 06 0 00 0 80 2 86 2 92 2 10 2 49 2 88 2 97 0 00 1 81 2 33 3 11 3 13 2 57 3 01 3 28 0 00 2 08 2 70 2 88 4 38 0 00 3 77 4 45 0 00 2 92 3 90 0 00 2 53 3 77 3 90 5 16 0 00 3 23 4 54 0 00 3 44 3 67 3 57 4 12 4 85 0 00 4 65 0 00 3 27 3 91 0 00 4 50 5 42 3 84 5 12 0 00 3 71 4 39 0 00 3 50 4 86 6 13 0 00 4 65 5 89 0 00 5 06 0 00 4 19 6 20 6 83 0 00 6 30 0 00 5 97 0 00 4 68 0 00 6 03 6 94 5 49 6 97 0 00 5 63 0 00 4 88 4 93 0 00 6 99 7 58 0 00 7 52 0 00 6 32 0 00 5 46 9 47 0 00 9 23 0 00 8 07 0 00 7 15 7 42 0 00 8 69 0 00 9 39 0 00 7 38 7 77 0 00 6 78 0 00 Angle 270 275 275 280 280 285 285 290 290 295 295 300 300 305 305 310 310 315 0 22 0 23 0 00 0 18 0 19 0 00 0 16 0 00 0 15 0 00 0 14 0 00 0 09 0 00
86. 325 330 330 335 335 340 340 345 345 350 350 355 355 360 0 14 0 00 0 10 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 02 0 01 0 01 0 03 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 10 0 00 0 08 0 00 0 06 0 00 0 06 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 00 0 23 0 00 0 19 0 00 0 12 0 00 0 06 0 01 0 01 0 40 0 00 0 28 0 00 0 16 0 00 0 04 0 01 0 01 0 44 0 00 0 14 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 01 0 45 0 00 0 37 0 00 0 28 0 00 0 09 0 00 0 02 0 68 0 00 0 31 0 00 0 06 0 00 0 03 0 04 0 01 0 75 0 00 0 59 0 00 0 27 0 00 0 04 0 01 0 02 0 80 0 00 0 65 0 00 0 26 0 00 0 04 0 01 0 01 0 13 0 15 0 17 0 19 0 00 0 14 0 00 0 05 0 01 0 39 0 54 0 56 0 00 0 21 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 65 0 00 0 06 0 00 0 10 0 14 0 00 0 08 0 03 0 00 0 53 0 00 0 38 0 00 0 09 0 00 0 04 0 09 0 34 0 00 0 21 0 29 0 35 0 00 0 22 0 00 0 19 0 84 0 00 0 48 0 00 0 05 0 12 0 00 0 03 0 02 C 24 0 54 1 23 0 00 0 00 0 63 1 37 0 00 1 14 1 02 0 00 0 00 0 57 0 00 0 80 0 30 0 00 0 00 0 73 0 00 0 00 1 87 1 54 0 00 0 41 0 00 0 00 0 49 0 80 0 00 0 32 0 50 0 00 0 00 0 27 0 57 0 32 0 23 0 00 0 00 0 32 0 00 0 00 1 41 1 09 0 00 0 65 0 00 0 24 0 04 0 69 0 00 0 08 0 06 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 06 0 27 0 00 0 81 0 84 0 00 0 24 0 00 0 08 0 00 0 09 0 01 0 00 0
87. 6 22 Displays the LOGGER VIEW sub list the selection of the file to be seen 6 22 Displays in the LOGGER VIEW sub list the scrolling of the file to be seen 6 22 Display in the LOGGER VIEW sub list in the case when the files do not exist pp 6 23 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the cursor 6 23 Displays with the selected logger s file the scrolling to the Tight 6 23 Displays with the selected logger s file the scrolling to the left 6 23 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the axis relation es 6 23 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the profile pp 6 24 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the result from a profile 6 24 DISPLAY list the SCREEN SETUP text highlighted nennen nennen 6 24 SCREEN SETUP windows the change of the contrast et 6 25 SCREEN SETUP windows the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT active and not active 6 25 DISPLAY window with BATTERY text highlighted ee 6 25 BATTERY windows for different sources powering the instrument nennen 6 25 DISPLAY list the UNIT LABEL text highlighted essere ener nemen nennen 6 26 UNIT LABEL windows opened and after scrolling with the lt A gt lt V gt push buttons pp 6 26 Main list the FILE text highlighted displayed inversely eese nennen nennen
88. 60 60 70 70 80 50 50 430 0 157 0 198 0 25 0 315 0 397 0 5 0 63 0 794 1 1 26 1 58 FeFo STORAN 81 5 E wg A 46 0 5535220 I8 5 0 03 A 87 9 dB Characteristics of the exemplary middle digital 1 5 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument dE dE 0 10 20 3 40 50 60 r 8 50 0 125 0 157 0 138 0 25 0 315 01 337 n 5 0 63 0 7394 1 1 26 FeFo 100 3 s23 30 1 108 9 74 0 e0 0 47 5 328 15 4 0 03 30 0 dB Characteristics of the exemplary upper digital 1 5 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument D 29
89. 7 RECORDER TRIGGER parameters Word number Name Comment Oxnn2D 2D id nn block s length TriggerMode trigger mode 0 OFF 1 SLOPE 2 SLOPE 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 6 GRAD TriggerSource source of the triggering signal 0 RMS 1 the RMS result from the first profile in the case of TriggerMode SLOPE or SLOPE 1 External I O TriggerLev level of triggering 24 136 dB 10 TriggerGrad gradient of triggering in case of TriggerMode GRAD B 6 G7 USER MANUAL 1dB ms 100dB ms TriggerPre reserved TriggerPost reserved Table B 1 8 EXTended I O parameters Word number Name Comment Oxnn2E 2E id nn block s length Mode mode 0 ANALOG OUT 1 DIGITAL IN 2 DIGITAL OUT Function in case of ANALOG OUT reserved in case of DIGITAL IN 0 EXTERNAL TRIGGER in case of DIGITAL OUT 0 TRIG PULSE 1 ALARM PULSE ActiveLevel in case of DIGITAL OUT and ALARM PULSE 0 LOW 1 HIGH in other cases reserved Source in case of DIGITAL OUT and ALARM PULSE 0 PEAK 1 1 SPL 1 2 LEQ 1 in other cases reserved AlarmLevel in case of DIGITAL OUT and ALARM PULSE 30 140 dB 10 in other cases reserved AO_Direct in case of ANALOG OUT 0 off 1 on in other cases reserved AO_DA in case of ANALOG OUT 0 off 1 on i
90. DEFRAGMENTATION Unnecessary PRESS ANY Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary If there are conditions to execute the DEFRAGMENTATION operation it is done and the current progress is shown on the display After the successful execution the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user Any push button should be then pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one After pressing push button the instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list L Defragmentation Clearing DEFRAGMENTATION Please wait Please waiter finished PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The displays below illustrate the results of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENT after the execution the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE become equal while the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE remain unchanged 7 32 GZ USER MANUAL a oa a oa FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AWAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE et TOTAL AWAILABLE 15842148 bytes Result of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 7 Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE The CATALOGUE is used for checking the contents of the memory the list of the result and setup files In order to enter the window the user has to select the CATALOGUE text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt pu
91. DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW window Notice The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required Each file consists of some elements which are the same for all kind of files e afile header e the unit and software specification e the user s text stored together with the measurement data e the parameters and global settings e the special settings for profiles e the marker of the end of the file The other elements of the file structure depend on the type of the file SLM VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT RT60 logger and on the setting of SAVE STAT path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS SAVE STAT These elements are as follows e main results e results coming from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e the results coming from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the results coming from DOSE METER mode e the header of the FFT analysis performed in the selected band 7 1 G7 USER MANUAL e the FFT analysis results e results coming from RT60 mode e statistics header e the results of statistical analysis e header of the statistical analysis performed 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e results of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the header of the file from the logger e the data stored during the measurements in the logger s file Notice The detailed description of all types of file structures
92. FILTER windows the activation of the OUTDOOR AIRPORT filter D 14 Frequency characteristics of AIRPORT filter implemented in the instrument pp D 14 MENU FUNCTION and MODE windows vibration mode selection pp D 14 INPUT and PROFILE x windows weighting filter selection in acceleration measurements D 15 Characteristics of the HP digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements in the VM D 15 Characteristics of HP3 digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements in the VM D 16 Characteristics of the HP10 digital filter implemented for the acceleration measurements in the VM D 16 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements see D 17 Characteristics of the Vell digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM D 17 Characteristics of the Vel3 digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM D 17 Characteristics of the Vel10 digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM D 18 Characteristics of the VelMF digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM D 18 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measurements eres D 19 Characteri
93. IHTEBR PERIOD IHTEBR PERIOD REP CYCLE Inf Inf CYCLE Inf REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER LOGGER LOGGER STEP i LOGGER STEP LOGGER STEP oa oa oa oa HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY lef 184 DELAY 12 DELAY IMTEGE PERIOD Ms z IMTEGE PERIOD 4 IMTEGE PERIOD Or oa a oa a MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY O START DELAY sn START DELAY P L GGER STEP LOGGER 10512 LOGGER 10512 5 5 G7 USER MANUAL m m m HEASUR SETUP HEASUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY 1s INTEGR PERIOD is C Inf Or GER STEP LOGGER amp LOG12 LOGGER STEP setting available values from 500 milliseconds to 1 hour 5 1 6 Logger file name edition LOGGER NAME The LOGGER NAME enables the user to name the logger file The default one is amp LOG The name cannot be longer than eight characters including not edited first one character amp After entering this line the special help is displayed in the display s last line The name edition is performed similarly to the name edition in the FILE NAME line of the SAVE or SAVE SETUP window The edition process is presented below The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt lt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are u
94. In the case of vibration mode during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the following filter is available e 2 type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard 5 27 G7 USER MANUAL SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM FILTER FILTER _ FILTER BAND BRHD BAND FULL FULL LOGGER C 1 LOGGER C 1 LOGGER SPECTRUM window the FILTER selection in sound mode 5 7 2 Selecting the band during the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis BAND The BAND position enables the user to select the band in which the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of the signal has to be performed Available values of the bands of the analysis are as follows AUDIO FULL in the case of sound mode and FULL in the case of vibration mode The selection of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button a a SPECTRUM SPECTRUM FILTER FILTER re BRHD EURO ED RUDIO SE L GGER L GGER SPECTRUM window the BAND selection in sound mode 5 7 3 Activation of logger for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results LOGGER The RMS result from 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the logger s file of the instrument or on the USB memory
95. LEVEL selection 10 dB step up in vibration mode 5 19 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection in sound mode seen 5 19 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection in vibration 5 19 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection for different LOGGER STEPS sss 5 20 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST 5 20 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER 8 6 2222 5 20 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER STEPS in vibration mode 5 21 TRIGGER SETUP window the RECORDER TRIGGER text highlighted pe 5 21 RECORDER TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection et 5 21 RECORDER TRIGGER windows the source selection for SLOPE a and SLOPE b 5 22 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step Up pe 5 22 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in vibration mode level expressed in linear units 1 dB step up a and 10 dB step up 5 22 G7 USER MANUAL RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in sound and vibration mode 10 dB step up 5 22 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB step UP pp 5 23 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB step up 5 23 DOSIMETER SETUP selecte
96. MENU INPUT RPM RPM written as two words lt word1 gt lt word2 gt WYK_OKR_OBR 64 m res 1 amp 0x00007f lt lt 16 res 0 amp Ox007fff lt lt 1 w res 1 gt gt 8 amp 0x00007f 23 W YK_OKR_OBR d m pow 2 0 w RPS 1 d RPM 60 d B 2 1 2 Record with the state of the markers The record with the state of the markers consists of one word 0x8nnn in which 12 bits nnn denote the state of the markers b11 state of 12 marker b10 state of 11 marker b1 state of 2 marker bO state of 1 marker B 2 1 3 Record with the breaks in the results registration The record with the breaks in the results registration consists of four words 0xBOii 0xB1jj lt OxB2kk gt OxB3nn in which ii jj kk nn bytes denote 4 bytes counter of left or skipped records nnkkijii ii is the least significant byte nn the most significant byte B 3 Structure of the file with the results from the SLM mode File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended settings cf Tab B 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 Head
97. NEXT or AUTO SAVE functions after the end of the measurements caused by the selected reasons It is not possible to save the results during the execution of the measurements In the case when the saving was done the name of the logger s file is presented in the bottom line of one profile display and the clock starts to show the real time L Loa Lin Loa Lin PEAK 61 6 a8 61 6 ap 70 5 n En n Profiles32 ES Profiles32 1 32 PRESS ANY Filez2zBa cTz i FilezzB CTz Filez2zBa cTz Displays after stopping the measurements with the name of the logger s file the data are saved The display in one profile mode with the results coming from the DOSE METER in SM looks nearly the same as it was described above for the LEVEL METER mode The measurement result PEAK MAX MIN SPL DOSE D 8h LAV LEQ SEL SEL8 E E 8h LEPd PSEL Ltm3 Ltm5 Lxx and OVL cf the definitions in App D is presented in the first line of the display Next either the detector path MENU INPUT PROFILE x DETECTOR time constant Fast Slow or Impulse is given for all results except PEAK and OVL or in the case of LINEAR RMS INTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR for LEQ SEL SEL8 E E 8h LEPd PSEL and Lxx results the Lin text appears on the display Notice There is not any indication of the detector in the case of PEAK and OVL results The name of the implemented filte
98. Peak detection e Resolution 0 1 dB e Range 999 9 dB e Crest Factor unlimited for signals in 20 kHz band Time weighting characteristics Exponential averaging SLOW S according to IEC 61672 Type 1 Equivalent Time Constant 1000 ms FAST F according to IEC 61672 Type 1 Equivalent Time Constant 250 ms IMPULSE 4 according to IEC 61672 Type 1 Equivalent Time Constant 35 ms Hold Time 1500 s Reference conditions e Type of the acoustic field free Reference acoustic pressure 114 0 dB related to 20 uPa e Reference frequency 1000 Hz Reference temperature 20C e Reference relative humidity 65 96 Reference static pressure 1013 hPa Reference incidence direction perpendicular to the microphone diaphragm Calibration Acoustical with the SV 30A acoustic calibrator or equivalent Reference level for free field calibration 113 9 dB Reference level for diffuse field calibration 114 0 dB See ACO 7052H free field correction table below Microphone ACO 7052H type prepolarised free field 12 condenser microphone nominal sensitivity 22 mV Pa corresponding to 33 dBV Pa re 1 V Pa capacitance 18 pF preamplifier SV 12L nominal preamplifier attenuation 0 7 dB Maximum level of sound pressure level which can affect the microphone without its destruction 155 dB Maximum peak voltage of input sinusoidal signal which can be applied to the SLM without its destruction 30 V Peak Peak Environmenta
99. Profilecia E Files MAR11 The profile is changed after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and A or lt SHIFT gt and v push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons The statistics i e these set in the instrument as a default L01 L10 L20 L30 L40 L50 160 170 L80 and L90 which are available only in SM are visible in one profile s mode after pressing the lt SHIFT gt lt lt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The user can make the selection of these ten statistics Lxx in the STATISTICAL LEVELS window path MENU SETUP STATISTICAL LEVELS The statistics are not longer displayed after pressing the lt gt gt or the push buttons 6 4 G7 USER MANUAL Loa Lin L10 Lin L20 Lin L30 Lin 18 das Frafiletl E Frafiletl E Frafiletl Frafiletl Lao Lin L50 Lin Leo Lin L70 Lin 11 6 2 El TTia 1 19 E 1 19 E 1 1 E Frofilecl 1 amp 1 amp Leo Lin Lin 15 3 i 12 9 i 1 19 5 1 19 Displays with the statistics made with linear integration presented in one profile mode The change of the RMS integration path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION from linear to exponential influence a little bit the presentation instead of Lin there is the time constant FAST SLOW IMP on the displ
100. RMS RR FILEC1 FILTER HPI FILTER HPI DETECTOR EELIS EEE LOGGER PEAK C 1 LOGGER PEAK C 1 LOGGER LOGGER LOGGER MAN LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS 1 LOGGER RMS 1 PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt FILTER HPI DETECTOR LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows vibration mode the selection of the RMS detector 5 3 3 PEAK result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER PEAK Up to four measurement results from each profile can be saved in the logger s file of the instrument In order to save the PEAK result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 5 10 PROFILE i gt FILTER Al DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PERK LOGGER MAX 1 LOGGER LOGGER RMS 1 L1 PROFILE i gt FILTER oa PROFILE 3 gt FILTER 72 DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX LOGGER HIM 1 LOGGER RMS 1 Ll PROFILECZ FILTER DETECTOR F
101. SCREEN SETUP text highlighted 6 4 1 Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST The CONTRAST enables the user to set the proper contrast of the display by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button on the highlighted displayed inversely CONTRAST text The user can select 21 different values of this parameter Notice The new value of the contrast is confirmed after each pressing of the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons new value is selected without any confirmation from the ENTER push button The window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt 5 gt or lt ENTER gt push button 6 24 G7 USER MANUAL oa oa oa SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP CONTRAST CONTRAST i CONTRAST CONTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 4 EACKLIGHT TIMEOUT C BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT C47 BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT L4 SCREEN SETUP windows the change of the contrast 6 4 2 Automatic switch off of the backlight BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT Taking into account the saving of the internal source of the instrument s power the backlight should be used relatively rare It is possible to set the backlight s automatic switch off In the case when this option is set after 30 seconds from pressing any push button the backlight is switched off If it happened
102. SETUP EXT SETUP EXT SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT FUHCTIQH ERE PESE ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL ACTIVE LEVEL LOW SOURCE SOURCE LEG 13 ALARM LEWEL 166 FUHCTIQH ALARM PULSE SOURCE EPLE ALARM LEVEL 188 8dB ina Bde ALARM LEWEL EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the SOURCE selection 9 6 6 Alarm level selection on the digital output of I O ALARM LEVEL In the ALARM LEVEL it is possible to set the level of the result to be monitored during the measurements If the result is greater than the one set in this line the instrument will generate the alarm signal in the selected logic The available levels are within the range 30 0 dB 140 dB The ALARM LEVEL current value decreasing increasing by 0 1 dB is possible by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The step can be decreased increased up to 1 dB after pressing simultaneously the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the lt SHIFT gt one The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made in the window or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes I O SETUP EXT DIGITAL OUT MODE L I O SETUP EXT SETUP EXT DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE I 0 SETUP DIGITAL OUT 9 10 I 0 SETUP DIGITAL OUT FUMCTION ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL LO
103. SETUP FILES Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion After the execution of the result files removing from the memory usually the FREE SPACE memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE rests the same as before the deletion but TOTAL AVAILABLE memory is increased It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION in which all files are moved to the continuous space In order to illustrate it let us consider the result file named EXAMP4 which is 1946 bytes long FILE INFO FILE GEXAMPS FILE SIZE 19466 FILE NAME gt lt ENTER gt gt DATE 26 MAR 2007 LEVEL METER CSOUNDI Deleted TIME 15 18 44 FILE amp LOGIBI ELAPSED TIME 8 10 26 2887 TIME 15 18 44 PRESS ANY KEY oa a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15845586 bytes 15852752 bytes 15845506 bytes 13854706 bytes TOTAL AVAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE 15852752 bytes 15798734 bytes 15854706 bytes 15798734 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE 15798734 bytes 15831326 bytes 15795734 bytes 15831326 bytes Execution of the EXAMP4 fi
104. SPACE 82992 FREE SPACE 52992 KB Please wait Counting files Edit directory name Edit directory name S5H Delete 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete SH gt Insert Select directory DIR HO 2 DIR HO 72 IR HO DIR 17 DIR 1JRHN DIR 11JHH FILE list the DIRECTORY window Notice After connecting a USB memory stick to the device the paper sheet icon appears in the top of the display 7 12 Copying files to the external USB memory stick COPY FILES TO USB The COPY FILES TO USB is used for copying files to the external USB memory stick The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the COPY FILES TO USB text in the FILE list is displayed inversely The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button n D FILES RESULT FILES L FILE CATALOGUE FREE SPACE SRUE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIRECTORY LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JAH b Fress EHTER to COPY a FILE list with the COPY FILES TO USB text selected a and the COPY FILES window opened b The COPY FILES TO USB sub list consists of three positions to be selected RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES and DIRECTORY position with the name of the directory in which the files from the internal memory of the instrument will be stored In order to copy required type of the files the user has to place the special character in the line
105. SPACE MELIUS HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP s FREE SPACE MERITIS a HARNINGS RESULTS MOT SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP x FREE SPACE oa HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP FREE SPACE HERE Ll HARNINGS RESULTS MOT SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP x FREE SPACE ao HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP x FREE SPACE HERI oa HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP FREE SPACE MEER ao HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP FREE SPACE MEENE HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP x FREE SPACE WARNINGS windows MIN FREE SPACE selection The selected limit has to be within the range 1 MB 1024 MB If the available memory is not greater than that limit the warning will be displayed The limit is set by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the step equal to one MB The step is increased up to ten MB pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt 5 gt The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt 5 gt push button ignoring a change made in the position The exemplary warning is presented
106. T HG 1928 1928 miz TER H FALA ERALA HRHHIHG 1928 FFT window the BAND selection 5 6 4 Selecting the time window for the FFT analysis WINDOW The WINDOW position enables the user to select the coefficients of time window which are used in the FFT analysis Available time windows of the FFT analysis are as follows HANNING RECTANGLE FLAT TOP KAISER BESSEL The selection of the window is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button FFT FFT FFT FFT RUERRGING LINEAR RUERRGING LINEAR AVERAGING LINEAR RUERRGING LINEAR 27 4kHz 22 4kHz 22 4kHz 22 4kHz HRHHIHG RECTANGLE FLAT 1928 1928 FFT sublist the WINDOW selection 5 6 5 Selecting the number of the lines of FFT analysis LINES The LINES position enables the user to select the number of lines of the FFT analysis There are three values available 1920 960 and 480 The selection of the value is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressi
107. TRIGGER _ SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE SOURCE H EXT 1 0 SOURCE SOURCE H EXT IZD LEUEL LEUEL d MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SOURCE signal selection Notice Only one signal measured in the instrument the RMS detector in the first profile be used as the triggering signal Additionally the signal from Ext l O can be also used as the trigger source in the SLOPE and SLOP modes 5 4 1 3 Setting the level of the triggering signal LEVEL The level of the triggering signal LEVEL can be set in 1 dB step or 10 dB steps from 24 dB to 136 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt a oa MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE OURCE 1 o ORMSCII ORMSCID 1 SOURCE ORMSCII 5612 LEUEL MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode Notice The LEVEL value of the triggering signal refers to the instantaneous value of the RMS result from the first profile calculated during the period depending on selected DETECTOR path MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 DETECTOR oa oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE lt lt TRIGGER SLOPE SHIFTS SLOPE SOURCE RMSCID LEUEL SOURCE ORMSCII RMSCID LEUEL EL MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLO
108. USER MANUAL 0 23 0 00 0 32 0 63 0 65 0 00 0 28 0 45 0 51 0 00 0 40 0 67 1 09 1 32 0 00 0 39 0 00 0 09 0 03 0 00 0 41 0 85 1 08 0 00 0 35 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 18 0 29 0 80 1 31 0 00 0 19 0 00 0 19 0 00 1 31 0 00 1 77 2 48 0 00 1 25 0 00 0 89 0 00 1 29 1 73 2 55 2 85 0 00 1 35 0 00 1 15 1 74 0 00 0 98 0 00 1 85 2 47 0 00 1 23 0 00 2 71 0 00 2 61 0 00 2 57 3 54 0 00 2 15 0 00 0 00 2 87 0 00 2 60 2 37 3 44 3 56 0 00 1 59 0 00 3 66 0 00 3 23 2 96 4 06 4 42 0 00 2 13 5 13 4 45 0 00 3 81 0 00 4 16 5 21 0 00 2 76 0 00 3 79 0 00 3 00 3 37 4 62 0 00 2 41 0 00 5 88 0 00 5 72 0 00 4 50 4 74 6 15 0 00 3 58 5 92 0 00 5 38 4 50 0 00 5 64 0 00 4 01 0 00 6 45 0 00 5 99 0 00 5 13 0 00 6 54 0 00 4 41 6 32 6 97 0 00 6 50 5 84 0 00 6 88 6 92 0 00 6 34 0 00 6 27 0 00 5 42 6 42 7 18 0 00 5 19 8 10 8 23 0 00 8 00 0 00 7 01 7 53 0 00 6 61 8 70 8 93 0 00 7 99 8 07 8 19 9 16 0 00 7 07 Angle 180 185 185 190 190 195 195 200 200 205 205 210 210 215 215 220 220 225 0 35 0 00 0 34 0 36 0 00 0 34 0 00 0 34 0 00 0 00 0 54 0 00 0 52 0 00 0 47 0 00 0 42 0 00 0 69 0 70 0 00 0 71 0 00 0 71 0 00 0 69 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 05 0 07 0 10 0 13 0 16 0 17 0 00 0 19 0 23 0 26 0 29 0 32 0 35 0 37 0 00 0 17 0 18 0 21 0 24 0 27 0 30 0 33 0 34 0 00 0 30 0 00 0 33 0 36 0 39 0 42 0 00 0 41 0 68 0 74 0 82 1 03 1 13 1 21 1 22 0 00 1 01
109. Vel3 Vel10 and VelMF are dedicated for the velocity measurements of the vibration signal in the different frequency ranges L PROFILE 19 a PROFILE i gt 1 45 oa PROFILE i gt FILTER ay DETECTOR 1 a PROFILE i gt 1 45 FILTER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER MAX 1 1 LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements The Vel filter is used for the velocity measurements the vibration signal in the frequency from 1 Hz to 20 kHz dB 20 30 20 30 40 60 70 50 10 0 25 0 50 40 8 0 1800 32 54 128 256 1024 2048 4086 3 3 20 0 6 8 21 3 28 0 34 0 4 46 1 52 1 58 1 4 1 21 1 7 6 2 82 2 B8 1 Characteristics of the Vell digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM range dB 50 530 110 Hz dB Vel3 filter is used for the velocity measurements in the frequency range from 1 Hz to 20 kHz 20 30 40 60 70 50 0 25 0 50 421 8 0 16 0 32 54 128 256 412 1024 2048 4036 A 56 8 38 6 26 7 28 2 34 0 40 0 46 1 52 1 58 1 64 1 70 1 76 2 82 2 B8 1 Characteristics of the Vel3 digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM 10 dB 50 530 11 Hz dB G7 USER MANUAL The Vel
110. a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the SLM measurement results 3 24 Displays in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the VLM measurement results 3 24 Displays in 3 PROFILES display mode with the measurements results which are from LEVEL METER mode continuous lines b and with the results which are not from the LEVEL METER dotted lines 3 25 Display with all available 160n eerte terr tree e rere e per e e pH E een 3 25 Display with Paper sheet and Battery icons et 3 26 Display with Computer 160M 2 23 23 ecoute Ie Ue E Ro epe eed 3 26 Display with Antenna Tree sete pre EOD RUD PE Dr TR EH ps CR t Erin 3 26 Display with Loudspeaker 1Coms sci 3 26 Displays with Headphone Envelope and Bell 3 26 Displays with Timer and Arrows icons 4 3 27 FUNCTION list opened MODE selected and MODE sub list opened with all available modes b c 3 27 Displays with FUNCTION list opened in SM MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available options b d e f and g 3 28 Displays during the entering of the access code to a function nene 3 28 Display after the unsuccessful verification of the access code et 3 28 Scheme of
111. after saving the 9EXAMPI je 7 7 Settings and the FILE INFO after the performed measurement 7 7 FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP2 7 7 Settings before the execution of the measUrementS et 7 8 Settings for the current measurements et 7 8 FILE INFO during and after the measurements 4 7 8 FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP3 and amp LOG100 files eese 7 8 Settings before the execution of the measurements sessi ener 7 9 Settings and the FILE INFO during and after the measuUrementS nennen eene 7 9 FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP4 and amp LOG100 files pe 7 9 FILE list with the SAVE OPTIONS text highlighted displayed 7 10 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the RAM FILE sees nen nnne 7 10 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the REPLACE 4 7 11 SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the REPLACE sese 7 11 Displays during the file saving when the REPLACE is switched off and on pe 7 11 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE 5 8 00 7 1 SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the SAVE STATISTICS 7 12 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the AUTO SAVE et 7 12 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection
112. also shown The default settings set up by the producer for the profiles are as follows PROFILE 1 A weighting filter FILTER A FAST type of the RMS detector DETECTOR FAST the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN LOGGER RMS PROFILE 2 C weighting filter FILTER C FAST type of the RMS detector DETECTOR FAST the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN LOGGER RMS 3 24 G7 USER MANUAL PROFILE 3 Z weighting filter FILTER 2 FAST type of the detector DETECTOR FAST the results of the measurements are not stored in the loggers file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN LOGGER RMS The default settings set up by the producer for the profiles in the case of vibration measurements are as follows PROFILE 1 HP1 weighting filter FILTER HP1 1 0s type of the RMS detector DETECTOR 1 06 the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS PROFILE 2 HP3 weighting filter FILTER HP3 1 0s type of the RMS detector DETECTOR 1 06 the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX J LOGGER RMS PROFILE 3 HP10 weighting filter FILTER HP10 1 0s type of the R
113. amp 8 G80 18 Pcrz2 2 PERK RMS Poso MAxX gt FILE INFO during and after the measurements The size of the file is equal to 466 bytes and it is visible in the FILE INFO window The detailed description of the level meter file structure is given in App B The EXAMPS3 file saved in the result files memory decreases the amount of the FREESPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE memory by the value of the file size 466 bytes plus 4 bytes containing the addresses of the previous file and 4 bytes containing the address of the next file all together 474 bytes The size of the logger files memory the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE is also decreased by the value of 2064 bytes 8 bytes for the addresses 1682 bytes for the selected results from the profiles and 374 bytes for the additional information described in details in App B a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mi TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE 5 mi TOTAL RURILRBLE FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP3 and amp LOG100 files Example 4 Let us assume the settings presented below where one measurement is performed with the integration period equal to 10 seconds the statistics are saved and the LOGGER is activated On The measurement results are saved in the file named EXAMP4 7 8 G7 USER MANUAL ao oa L SAVE OPTIONS HERSUR SETUP FILE NAME ish CYCLE 1 BER STEP lame LOGGER 105181 SHi Del
114. any 7 24 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 7 24 Selection of the SETUP FILES to be deleted teri eerte treni Pt Ert yen o ete EUR 7 24 Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion 3 7 25 Execution of the SET3 file deletion and its influence on the memory 7 25 Execution of the SETS file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory 7 25 DELETE ALL text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE 6 7 26 RESULT FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation esee 7 26 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 26 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL 7 26 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of RESULT FILES selection eee 7 27 LOGGER FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation pp 7 27 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 7 27 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL 7 27 Execution of the DELETE AL
115. at the left side of the display three analogue like indicators are shown each one for the selected result from a profile The currently active profile is marked by the cursor and inversely displayed name of the function The filter selected in that profile and the integration type in the case of the linear one or the detector type in the case of exponential are written below the measurement results During the measurements the bottom right clock displays the current time from the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD The current result from a selected profile is changed after pressing the lt gt gt or the push buttons The profile the results are coming from is changed after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and v The same result can be achieved after pressing the lt ALT gt and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons When the statistics level Lxx is presented the another levels from the set of ten values are available after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The results can be saved using SAVE SAVE NEXT or AUTO SAVE functions after the end of the measurements caused by the selected reasons It is not possible to save the results during the execution of the measurements In the case when the saving was done the name of the logger s file is presented in the bottom line of one profile display and the clock starts to show the real time The presentatio
116. batteries Hand held light weight and robust case Easy in use 1 4 Accessories included e 7052H prepolarised polarisation O V 12 microphone with nominal sensitivity 22 mV Pa SV 12L microphone preamplifier e SC 16 USB 1 1 cable SC 09 AC output Lemo 1 to BNC cable four AA batteries SvanPC for windows 2000 XP software 1 5 Accessories available SA17A external battery pack SA22 windscreen G7 USER MANUAL e SC 26 extension 3 m cable TNC plug to TNC socket e SV 25 dosimeter microphone with integrated preamplifier and cable e SA 43 carrying case for instrument and accessories e SA 45 carrying case for instrument and accessories waterproof e SA 46 carrying belt bag for instrument leather e 47 carrying bag for instrument and accessories fabric material e SV 55 RS 232 option for the instrument e SV 56 IrDA interface option 1 6 Software options available e G7 Type 1 Sound amp Vibration Analyser including 1 1 octave analyser G7 2 1 3 octave analysis option for the G7 G7 4 FFT analysis option for the G7 e G7 5 RT60 option for G7 e G7 9 Human Vibration filters option e G7 10 Dosimeter option for the G7 without SV 25 microphone G7 15 Time domain signal recording to the USB Flash Disk srt or wav format Notice The software options can be purchased in any time as only the introduction of the special code is re
117. below The return to the programme execution is done after pressing any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT D a USB DISK FREE SP 15 PRESS ANY KEY Display with USB DISK FREE SPACE warning 9 33 G7 USER MANUAL A REMOTE CONTROL The USB 1 1 interface is the serial one working with 12 MHz clock Its speed is relatively high and it ensures the common usage of USB in all produced nowadays Personal Computers The HOST USB functionality is also available The USB HOST controller installed in the instrument enables the user to connect to this meter the USB memory sticks USB hard disks USB printers etc The RS 232 interface is also available but as an option In order to activate this option the user has to by a special cable with a programmed processor This interface complies with CCIT V 24 standard Practically all Personal Computers can be linked to the instrument by means of this interface The maximum available transmission speed is equal to 115200 bits sec Note For reliable operation of the RS 232 proper synchronisation of the transmission by CTS and RTS lines according to their definitions is required The IrDA serial interface is also available as an option It requires dedicated hardware and the programme can be unlocked by a software code The functions which are developed in order to control data flow in the serial interfaces ensure bi directional data transmission remote
118. button the instrument starts the measurement LOAD HO FILES Display during the execution of the LOAD operation The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line of the LOAD window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT and RT60 and the mode SOUND or VIBR are given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line G7 USER MANUAL Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the LOAD window The date and time of the SAVE operation are displayed in the fifth and sixth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt l
119. button can be set as the Shift mode or the 2nd Fun mode in the SHIFT position path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE SHIFT see description of the SETUP list ALT This push button enables one to choose the third push button function in case of lt SAVE gt and lt PAUSE gt push buttons In order to select the third function the user must press the ALT and the second push button simultaneously The lt ALT gt push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one enables the user to enter the Markers on the plots during the measurement A Notice The simultaneous pressing of the lt ALT gt and lt START STOP gt push buttons switches the instrument on and off lt START STOP gt This push button enables one to start the measurement process when the instrument is not measuring or to stop it when the instrument is in course of the measurement It is also possible to set such mode of this push button in which in order to start or stop the measurements the user has to press it simultaneously with the lt SHIFT gt one Notice The change of the START STOP push button mode is performed in the SHIFT MODE window of the SETUP list see description of the SETUP list ENTER This push button enables one to enter the selected operation mode or to confirm the control options Some additional functions of this push button will be described in the following chapters of this manual MENU
120. buttons and press the lt ENTER gt one L SETUP REMOTE GRA SETUP list the STATISTICAL LEVELS sub list selected 9 21 G7 USER MANUAL The default statistic levels have the following settings 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 and 90 All values have to be within the range 1 99 Each one value can be set independently from the others The selection of the Nx is made using the A v push buttons The upper Nx visible on the display is active after pressing the A together with the lt SHIFT gt push button The lower Nx visible on the display is active after pressing the v together with the lt SHIFT gt push button The Nx current value decreasing increasing by one is possible by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be decreased increased up to ten after pressing simultaneously the lt gt gt push buttons with the lt SHIFT gt one The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made in this list or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes STAT LEVELS STAT LEVELS STAT LEVELS STAT LEVELS H n me gt ln 1H 1H 1H 20 40 50 28 28 2H 38 40 40 40 50 50 50 Ha 5 5 F m F Displays in the STATISTICAL LEVELS sub list 9 18 Programming
121. different modes which differ slightly each other These modes are changed after pressing the ALT and A or the ALT and v push buttons or they can be set in the VIEW path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP LOGGEH VIEW VIEW Exemplary displays with the measurement results saved in the logger 6 1 5 Setting on off the view of the file description FILE INFO The possibility of the additional file description presented on the instrument s display can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the FILE INFO text by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored oa oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 1 SPECTRUM DV V WI FILE IMFO Setting on and off the file description presentation mode In the FILE INFO window the file name its size date and time of the registration of the main results cf App B and time so called ELAPSED TIME during which the main results saved in the logger were measured The value presented there belongs to the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD and depends on the moment and the way the measurements were stopped oa a FILE INFO FILE INFO FILE i160CT
122. first partition has to serve FAT32 or FAT16 file system Only short name file up to 8 characters similar to DOS system is implemented The existing longer names are shortened Notice The disconnection of the USB disk during the data transmission can cause the lost of data saved in the USB disk as well as in the instrument s internal flash The IrDA is the wireless interface used for the communication between the instrument and a PC The connection of the IrDA converter results in displaying the info window and switching on the paper sheet icon at the left side of the upper line In the case of the unsuitable settings in the USB HOST PORT window or connecting wrong device another info window is displayed The transmission parameters are selected automatically during the negotiation process The fastest available speed equals to 115 200 kb s In this case the real speed is not bigger than 1 5 kB s The IrDA programming is based on a virtual COM port emulation in a PC D a Da USB UNKNOWN 5TIc4z u DEUICE PRESS ANY KEY 55 ANY KEY Displays during the IrDA interface connection 9 20 Setting the coefficients of the user filters USER FILTERS The USER FILTERS position enables the user to introduce the values of the coefficients of the user filters In order to enter the position the user has to select the USER FILTERS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt g
123. first pressing of any push button switches the backlight on gt BATTERY it informs the user about the source of powering of the instrument and current power supply voltage available sources BATTERY USB POWER and EXTERNAL POWER UNIT LABEL it informs the user about the type of the instrument the serial number of the unit the internal memory size available measurement modes and it s software version and the standards which the instrument fulfils a T DISPLAY SCALE ISPLAY SETUP LOGGER VIEW TOTAL VALUES SCREEN SETUP LOGGER VIEW BATTERY UNIT LABEL a SPECTRUM VIEW VIEW FULL TYPE INSTANTANEOUS Mi v MIN BEA Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP list in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of sound 3 10 G7 USER MANUAL a a Sam ale DISPLAY SCALE VIEW SCALE X 200M 2 2 GRID v LOGGER VIEW TOTAL VALUES LOGGER VIEW Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP list in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration 3 11 G7 USER MANUAL 3 12 a a oa MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES FUNCTIDN id E DISPLAY SETUP SPECTRUM 3_PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER UHIT LABEL FILE IMFO DISPLAY SPECTRUM 3_PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER FILE IMFO a DISPLAY oa DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY MODES A A E LOGGER SCREEH SETUP BATTERY UHIT LABEL LR HLE LOGGER oa DISPLAY SETUP a oa DISPLAY LOGGER
124. format 6 6 type R name This function returns the coefficients of the user filter named as name If the name filter does not exist an error occurs The function s answer is in the following format 6 type n vV1 Vo 6 type D name This function deletes from the instrument the user filter named as name If the name filter does not exist an error occurs The function answers in the format 6 6 type S name Vv V V This function sets the user filter named as name If the name filter already exists its coefficients are redefined If the name filter does not exist the filter is created The function answers in the format 6 6 type C name first v v V This function sets the coefficients in the user filter named as name starting from the first position If the name filter does not exist an error occurs The function answers in the format 6 6 type N name name This function changes the name of the user filter from to names The function answers the format 6 6 type chn L This function returns the names of the user filters assigned to the channel chn consecutive TOTAL values in the following format 6 type chn 3 name name2z name3 6 type chn pos A 9 G7 USER MANUAL This function returns the description record of the user filter assigned to the pos TOTAL value of channel chn in the following format 6 type chn pos name avd cal the description record contains the
125. function not active The operation time is decreased about 20 with the backlight switched on The battery condition can be checked by means of the BATTERY function It is also presented continuously on the display by means of the Battery icon ka BATTERY CF EENENENIITI 20 Profilet px i Profiles Ds 2 b Displays with Battery icon a and in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY b LOW BATTERY Display with LOW BATTERY message When there is a connection to the USB interface USB Device socket is connected by means of the cable to a PC the Computer icon is presented on the top of the display and in the BATTERY window there is the USB POWER 5 0 V message a BATTERY USB POWER 5 00 1 19 b Displays with the Computer icon a and in the BATTERY window b Notice In the case when Battery icon is flashing it is strongly recommended to use as soon as possible the external power adapter or USB interface In the other case the instrument after a while will be switched off by itself The backlight of the display can be activated by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together For saving the power of the battery in the normal day light operation it is recommended to keep the backlight off The user can set the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT path MENU DISPLAY SCREEN SETUP BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT which will cause th
126. gt ISO 9001 INSTRUMENTATION FOR SOUND amp VIBRATION SVANTEK MEASUREMENTS AND ANALYSIS ZETOM CERT G7 SOUND amp VIBRATION ANALYSER draft version USER S MANUAL SVANTEK Sp 2 WARSAW August 2007 G7 USER MANUAL Notice This users manual presents the software revision named 6 03 6 03 03 cf the description of the UNIT LABEL position of the DISPLAY list The succeeding software revisions marked with the bigger numbers can slightly change the view of some displays presented in the text of the manual G7 USER MANUAL CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 1 G7 as Sound Level Meter amp Analyser 1 1 1 2 G7 as Vibration Meter amp Analyser 1 2 1 8 General features of G7 1 2 1 4 Accessories included 1 2 1 5 Accessories available 1 2 1 6 Software options available 1 3 1 7 Current list of G7 options and accessories 1 3 2 MANUAL CONTROL THE INSTRUMENT 2 1 2 1 Control push buttons on the front panel 2 1 2 2 Input and output sockets of the instrument 2 6 3 SETTING THE INSTRUMENT 3 1 3 1 Basis of the instrument s control 3 1 3 2 Powering of the instrument 3 22 3 3 Initial setup of the instrument 3 24 3 4 Selection of the working mode MODE 3 27 3 5 Activation of optional functions 3 27 3 6 Memory organisation 3 28 4 FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT FUNCTION 4 1 4 1 Selecting the mode of the instrument MODE 4 1 4 2 Measurement functions of the instrument MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 4 1 4 3 Instrume
127. gt one The edition process is presented on the Figure below The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt A v and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters oa oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE EILE NAME LES SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete SH Insert Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons L1 SAVE SETUP FILE _ SRUE SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE oa oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE NEU MET FILE _9 _ SRUE SRUE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete SH Insert Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited The available ASCII characters can be changed using the lt A gt or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after eac
128. is signalled by displaying inversely a parameter s field Moreover normally displayed field means that the parameter cannot be changed The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is performing the measurements ow MEASUR SETUP 5 SETUP FE FILECZ MEASURE TRIGGER START DELAY ls DELAY ds FILTER IMTEGE PERIOD ifs IMTEGE PERIOD ifs E 1 OFF EP CYCLE Inf CYCLE Inf ER Gr LOGGER TEF 1s LOGGER HRME amp LOGI4 Displays with not active sub lists of INPUT list during measurement Notice In the case of settings for vibration measurements the parameters can be presented in LOGARITHMIC decibels or LINEAR m s units It depends on the DISPLAY SCALE position path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE LOG or LIN e g 10 m s can be presented as 140 dB 5 1 G7 USER MANUAL 5 1 Selection of measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP The MEASUREMENT SETUP is opened after the selection of the MEASUREMENT SETUP text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v or A v with lt SHIFT gt push buttons and pressing the lt ENTER gt one The MEASUREMENT SETUP consists of the parameters which can be set or switched on off namely the delay of the start of measurements START DELAY the integration period INTEGR PERIOD the repetition of the measurement cycles REP CYCLE and the logger ac
129. logger s file is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons a a a LOGGER 1254593kB 2 LOGGER 15459KB3 LOGGER i15459KB3 LOGGER 15459KEB3 PER 4 3 Lae FILE 510846 RECORDS 5 MAX RMS MAX RMS MIN RMS 2 gt MAS RMS 15459 gt 2 RMS FPC32 PERK MAS RURILHBLE 15459 KB 5 gt RhMe PCS32 PERK 7 Displays in the LOGGER VIEW sub list the selection of the file to be seen The size of the FREE memory for logger files is equal to the size of the AVAILABLE memory for logger file in the case when the logger files were not deleted from the memory If it has happened the FREE memory is always smaller than AVAILABLE In order to increase the free memory space and achieve the available one the user has to perform the defragmentation path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENT LOGGER 15405KEB LOGGER 15405KEB LOGGER 15405KEB 1122 dil dil Polo PEAK RMS Pe2o PEAK RMS FREE 15405 25 FREE AVAILABLE 15457 KB Displays in the LOGGER VIEW sub list the scrolling of the file to be seen The display of the instrument after entering the LOGGER VIEW looks as on the figure below in the case when the logger s file does not exist there was no measurement
130. lt gt deletes the character currently pointed by the cursor combination SHIFT24 inserts a new character in the position of the cursor No results text will be displayed if the instrument did not perform any measurement in prior to choosing the SAVE option gt SAVE OPTIONS sub list RAM FILE only in LEVEL METER mode gives the user a possibility to save data in RAM file Each time the data are saved the previous file is overwritten available values V or REPLACE it enables the user to replace the existing files in the instruments memory by the files having the same name available values N or SAVE STATISTICS it enables the user to save or not the calculated statistics along with the measurement results available values N or AUTO SAVE it enables the user to save the measurement results in the instrument s memory automatically without entering SAVE or SAVE NEXT position in order to perform this operation the INT PERIOD should be set to at least 10 S available values N or DIRECT SAVE this option enables saving the results with the automatically incremented name after pressing the ENTER and ALT push buttons together SAVE MAX SPECT it enables the user to save the maximal values of the spectrum occurred during the performed analysis available values N or SAVE MIN SPECT it enables the user to save the minimal values of the spectrum occurred during th
131. meeting the requirements for the Type 1 instrument The value of the LEQ function is calculated according to the formula LEQ 20 ZH 22 0 In the case the LEQ value saved as the main result T A Note For T T the LEQ values are saved in the files of the logger time history as the RMS results see below RMS result The RMS result saved in the logger s file is calculated according to the formula of the LEQ function The value of the RMS result is calculated according to the formula Te RMS 20 d tw ineft 0 SEL result The SEL result Sound Exposure Level is essentially the subset of the LEQ function Its value is equal to the LEQ result referred to the integration time equal to one second so for the INT 1 s SEL is always equal to LEQ The value of the SEL function is calculated according to the formula D 3 G7 USER MANUAL T SEL 20 rw ipse LEQ 10 log Us 0 115 In the case of the SEL value saved as the main result T Te The SEL value is not saved in the files of the logger time history Ltm3 and Ltm5 results The Ltm3 and Ltm5 results Takt Maximal Levels are calculated according to the German standard TA Larm LEPd result The LEPd result Exposure level related to 8 hours working day is calculated on the base of the LEQ from the formula LEPd LEQ 10 log 2 Tan OVL result The OVL result Overload presents the percentage of
132. name of the filter its type and the calibration coefficient 6 type chn pos This function recovers the predefined filter for the pos TOTAL value of channel chn and answers in the following format 6 type chn pos name avd cal 6 type chn pos name avd cal This function sets the description record of the user filter assigned to the pos TOTAL value of channel chn in the following format 6 type chn pos name avd cal The returned parameters name avd and cal are set in the description record after the execution of the function In the case of an error they can differ from the current parameters of the function A Notice In the case of an error all these functions return the following sequence of the characters 6 A 8 Function 7 Special control functions Function 7 enables the user to perform special control functions Some of them should be used with the extreme care 7 function formats are defined as follows 7 CB This function clears the logger memory all logger files will be deleted The function returns 7 CB This function is not accepted while the instrument is in the RUN state 7 BF This function returns logger memory free space in the format 7 BF ddddd ddddd number of bytes in decimal format 7 BN This function returns the number of logger files created to the current time in the format 7 BN ddddd ddddd number of logger files in decimal format 7 RT This function retu
133. of the AUTO SAVE in DOSE METER eee 7 12 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME skipping and return to the SAVE OPTION su b list e RR enean 7 12 Display after attempt of switching on AUTO SAVE option with too short INT PERIOD ess 7 13 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME confirmation and return to the FILE Stiho hens eI re ste ere inspecto esent a P Hee apte 7 13 Displays after the incorrect file name edition et 7 13 Measurement results SM presented after pressing the lt A gt or lt gt pUSh bUttONS eee 7 14 Measurement results VM presented after pressing the lt A gt or lt gt push buttons RN 7 14 Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons 7 14 Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons 7 14 Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons 7 14 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the DIRECT 5 2 2 22000000 0 1000000000000 nre eth 7 15 SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the DIRECT 7 15 Display after the attempt t
134. of the instrument in the SOUND or VIBRATION LEVEL METER as well as for other functions The name of the file is set in the LOGGER NAME position The registration in the logger s memory is stopped after the period which is equal to INTEGR PERIOD multiplied by REP CYCLE after pressing the lt START STOP gt push button or after stopping the measurements remotely REP CYCLE REP CYCLE REP CYCLE REP CYCLE n 1 n 1 n N 1 n N signal amplitude T time measurements INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD end T T T T gt E pa gt CD 2 sig1 svn sig2 svn sigN 1 svn sigN svn uU main results main results main results main results integration period integration period integration period integration period from 0 to T from T to 2T from N 2 T from N 1 T to N 1 T to NT E amp loggeri svn alts time history PEAK MAX MIN or RMS LOGGER STEP Relations between INTEGR PERIOD and LOGGER STEP 5 2 Measurement range setting MEASUREMENT RANGE The MEASUREMENT RANGE is used to set one of the available measurement ranges in the instrument In order to open this window the user has to select the MEASUREMENT RANGE text in the INPUT list by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER L IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP INPUT list with the
135. of the other text variables using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the selection of the character s position the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons the Insert function the lt SHIFT gt and push buttons the Delete function and the A v push buttons the codes of characters The verification is made after pressing the ENTER push button If the entered code was wrong the message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user After pressing the ENTER or the lt 5 gt push button the information that the function is not available is displayed and the instrument once more waits for the reaction of the user INVALID CODE PRESS ANY KEY Display after the unsuccessful verification of the access code After pressing the ENTER or the lt ESC gt push button the instrument returns to the FUNCTION list displaying the list of the functions implemented in the unit cf the first Figure in this chapter After successful verification of the access code the windows described above are no more displayed Once activated function is always available A Notice The number of the attempts for the access code entering is limited After three unsuccessful essays the possibility is blocked 3 6 Memory organisation All available measurement results can be stored in the internal FLASH type memory of the instrument 32 MB or in the external USB Memory Stick when the
136. optional USB HOST controller is installed in the instrument 3 28 G7 USER MANUAL The internal memory of the instrument is divided into two separate parts One part is dedicated for saving the result and setup files and its size is equal to 16 252 428 bytes The second part is used for saving the logger files and its size is equal to 15 859 224 bytes To save a result file the user has to choose one of the available options SAVE NEXT path MENU FILE SAVE or pressing lt ENTER gt and lt ALT gt together SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE or pressing ENTER and lt ALT gt together AUTO SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS or DIRECT SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS To save a setup file the user has to choose SAVE SETUP option from the FILE list The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required The scheme of the instrument s memory organisation without the USB HOST controller is presented below MEMORY ORGANIZATION OF THE SVAN 95x instrument series without USB HOST integration time results gt lt i avaliable only for particular models like SVAN 959 etc only with external 5 USB flash memory tc LLI m gt 23MAR svn amp log1 svn t DVII oo gt E car1 svn amp log2 svn Or JO 46 LL lt gt set svn car2 svn amp log3 svn E LU HV save1 svn am
137. or the measurements were performed but with the settings LOGGER Off path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP 6 22 G7 USER MANUAL LOGGER i5456KB FILE H Display in the LOGGER VIEW sub list in the case when the files do not exist The contents of the selected logger s file is displayed after pressing the ENTER push button The cursor position is changed after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The left end of the graphical presentation is reached immediately after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and while the right end after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The type of the registered result the number of the profile the result is coming from the related time from the beginning of the registration the value with the units and the indicator of the filter are presented in the NORMAL and EXTENDED logger s view mode on the right side of the display Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the cursor position The scrolling of the display to the right is made when the cursor is at the left end of the graphical presentation space and the lt lt gt push button is still pressed and in the file there are still the results Displays with the selected logger s file the scrolling to the right The scrolling of the display to the left is made when the cursor is at the right end of the graphical presentation space and the lt gt gt push button is still pr
138. profile 6 Oxmm0A 0A id mm sub block s length 7 NofClasses 2 number of classes in the 2 profile 120 8 BottomClass 2 bottom class boundary 10 dB in the 2 profile 9 ClassWidth 2 class width 10 dB in the 2 profile 10 Oxmm0A 0 id mm sub block s length 11 NofClasses 3 number of classes in the 3 profile 120 12 BottomClass 3 bottom class boundary 10 dB in the 3 profile 13 ClassWidth 3 class width 10 dB in the 3 profile Table B 1 17 Results of the statistical analysis in profiles Word h mber Name Comment 0 0x010B OB id prof maskit 1 Sub blockLength 2 number of classes in the 1s profile 2 Ras Histogram 1 1 the first counter in the 15 profile 4 5 Histogram 1 2 the second counter in the 1s profile 0 0x020B id prof_mask 2 1 Sub blockLength 2 number of classes in the 2 profile 2 2 9 Histogram 2 1 the first counter in the 2 profile 4 5 Histogram 2 2 the second counter in the 274 profile 0 0x040B OB id prof_mask 3 1 Sub blockLength 2 number of classes in the 3 profile 2 Histogram 3 1 the first counter in the 3 profile 4 5 Histogram 3 2 the second counter in the 3 profile B 17 G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 18 Header of the statistical analysis made in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode ret Name Comment 0 Oxnn13 13 id nn block s leng
139. push button then selecting by means of the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the INPUT text and finely pressing the ENTER Main list with the INPUT text selected The INPUT list in the LEVEL METER contains the elements which enable one the independent programming of the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP the input range MEASUREMENT RANGE parameters of three profiles PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 and the trigger function TRIGGER SETUP In the case of 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE on the display appears SPECTRUM position In the case of the DOSE METER instead of the trigger function there is a DOSIMETER SETUP In the case of FFT analyser on the display appears FFT position In the cases of RT60 there is not any new position in the INPUT list RT60 position appears in the SETUP list INPUT ___INPUT ___ AHPUT INPUT ee MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE i PROFILE i PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 OS IMETER SETUP PROFILE 2 PROFILE 5 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 5 ROFILE 3 p CRISSER SETUP LPROFILE 5 d LIRISGER_SETUP INPUT list in the LEVEL METER in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser b in DOSE METER c and in FFT analyser d Notice Any parameter in the INPUT list can be changed only when the instrument does not execute a measurement The possibility of a change
140. push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message is displayed after the successful execution of all stages 7 26 G7 USER MANUAL of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list pm Defragmentation Clearing Era or Please wait Please wait Deleted 0 PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of RESULT FILES selection 7 5 2 Deleting all logger files LOGGER FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the LOGGER FILES text using the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window one has to press the ENTER push button oa L1 DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the att
141. s2 160 mm s2 RMS 151 mm s2 100 mm s2 58 9 mm s2 VDV 653 mm s1 75 442 mm s1 75 292 mm s1 75 1 3 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE Hz m s2 Hz m s2 Hz m s2 0 80 4 90e 02 25 00 7 50e 03 800 00 3 16e 03 1 00 5 82e 02 31 50 1 72e 02 1000 00 3 02e 03 1 25 6 17 02 40 00 1 15 02 1250 00 2 79 03 1 60 8 32 02 50 00 9 02 03 1600 00 2 66 03 2 00 5 89e 02 63 00 6 46 03 2000 00 1 93 03 2 50 5 07 02 80 00 4 27 03 2500 00 1 30 03 3 15 3 98 02 100 00 5 19 03 3150 00 1 01e 03 4 00 3 35 02 125 00 5 82 03 4000 00 8 32 04 5 00 3 72 02 160 00 3 76 03 5000 00 7 50e 04 6 30 2 63 02 200 00 7 24 03 6300 00 5 69 04 8 00 2 37 02 250 00 5 96 03 8000 00 4 62 04 10 00 3 13 02 315 00 4 95 03 10000 00 3 98e 04 12 50 2 79e 02 400 00 4 62 03 12500 00 3 55 04 16 00 1 05 02 500 00 5 82 03 16000 00 3 16 04 20 00 6 84 03 630 00 3 39 03 20000 00 3 59 04 Filter CF dB Total R3 Acc 0 0 1 78e 01 m s2 HP3 Acc 0 0 1 00e 01 m s2 HP10 Acc 0 0 5 89e 02 m s2 Example of the printed results from the VIBRATION METER mode 1 3 OCTAVE A4 format The following confirmation question is displayed after the printing if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P path MENU REPORT OPTIONS EJECT P The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pre
142. stick The activation is made by placing a special character in the LOGGER position The activation is possible when the LOGGER functionality is switched on in the MEASUREMENT SETUP window path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER If the LOGGER functionality is switched off the position is not accessible The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button oa oa SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM window the LOGGER selection 5 28 G7 USER MANUAL 6 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE DISPLAY DISPLAY In order to open the DISPLAY list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the DISPLAY text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and A or lt SHIFT gt and results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list Display in the main list the DISPLAY text highlighted displayed inversely The DISPLAY list is used for setting the various parameters which are mainly dedicated for the control of the display The following item
143. the eee D 24 Characteristics of the Wj digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM sse D 25 xvii G7 USER MANUAL Characteristics of the Wm digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM sees D 25 Characteristics of the Wh digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM seen D 26 Characteristics of the Wg digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM esee D 26 Characteristics of the Wb digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VJMLE sse D 27 PROFILE 1 window the selection of the KB filter 0 0 enne enne enne nennen D 27 Characteristics of the KB digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM sse D 27 Characteristics of the HP digital filter implemented in the instrument in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and EET analysis teeth He ePi eiadendi ts D 28 Characteristics of the exemplary digital 1 1 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument D 28 Characteristics of the exemplary lower digital 1 3 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument D 29 Characteristics of the exemplary middle digital 1 3 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument D 29 Characteristics of the exemplary upper digital 1 3 OCTAVE filter implemented in the instrument
144. the lt ENTER gt PRIHT RESULTS IHT PRIHT STRTISTICS PRINT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE PRINT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE a zb REPORT windows with the OPTION selected in SM a and in VM b 8 9 Selection of the format of the print out FORMAT The FORMAT enables the user to select the format of the listing A4 and A5 options are available In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the OPTIONS sub list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the OPTIONS sub list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button oa oa OPTIONS OPTIONS FORMAT FORMAT EIEEEENNN EJECT F Hone EJECT F Hone OPTIONS windows the selection of the format 8 21 G7 USER MANUAL 8 10 Controlling the paper ejection after print out EJECT P The EJECT P enables the user to control the ejection of the paper after the listing is done The following options are available Prompt the instrument asks whether to eject the page after printing report statistics or catalogue Auto after printing the paper is ejected and None the paper is not ejected after printing In particular it is possible to have one result after another using the None or Prompt options In the EJECT P position any change is performed by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confi
145. the TIME OUT with 1 second step L L R5232 R5232 R5232 BAUD RATE 115288 BRUD RATE BAUD RATE TIME DUT TIME QUT TIME OUT RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 10 seconds step 9 13 Programming the instrument s internal Real Time Clock RTC The RTC enables one to programme the internal Real Time Clock This clock is displayed in the different places depending on the selected presentation mode In order to enter the position the user has to select the RTC text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one SETUP IEPE CURREHT REFEREHC E LEWELS REMOTE RMS IHTEGRHTIUH RS232 SETUP list the RTC text highlighted displayed inversely The selection of the setting parameter hour minute second day month and year is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and the change of its value using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt 9 16 RTC RTC RTC 15 88 11 3 13 11 16 ga OCT 2886 ga OCT 2886 ga OCT PEGE modify press To modify press To modify press r SHE change or 5H amp change or 5H amp change 11 16 30 116 11 16 58 2006 2006 B9 OCT 58 modify press modify press modify press G7 USER MANUAL RTC 16 24 OCT 2885 modify press r SHE change
146. the backlight 128X64 pixels and icons Memory 16 MB flash memory and 128 kB of the RAM memory Flash memory divided between e buffer for the registration of the time history and spectra ca 49 of the installed memory e FLASH disk for storing the measurement data files ca 46 of the installed memory e internal program ca 5 of installed memory Real Time Clock Built in real time with the accuracy better than 1 minute month If there is not any power supply in the instrument for longer than one hour the real time clock is reset Weight 600 grams with the batteries microphone and preamplifier Dimensions 42X82X333 mm Environmental parameters e Working temperature range 10 C 50 C e Storing temperature range 20 C 50 C Signal input The measured signal coming from the microphone preamplifier is connected to a TNC socket presented below TNC connector external view Table C 20 Pin out of the TNC connector Power supply amp Ext Pow Four replaceable AA batteries are the main source of instrument s powering The power consumption from the 6 V source is lt 120 mA at 20 C C 32 G7 USER MANUAL Therefore typical operating time from four AA alkaline batteries should be about 15 hours For the temperatures below 0 C the operating time can be shorter depending on the batteries The instrument can be also powered from the external source e g SA 17A or car battery with the DC
147. the instrument s memory organisation without the USB HOST esee 3 29 Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation with the USB HOST and memory stick connected 3 30 vii G7 USER MANUAL Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a and the FUNCTION list opened the MODE selected b the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected and the CALIBRATION selected d 4 1 FUNCTION list opened MODE selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with vibration meter mode selected b and sound meter mode selected Ce 4 1 MEASUREMENT FUNCTION windows opened in SM a in VM b and the activation of the optional inei ED 4 2 Displays with the main list FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list opened the CALIBRATION text selected b ed rati SRI dad Mica CH Bede ae ts 4 2 Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode sss 4 3 Displays with the SENSITIVITY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible wiskotti i enum 4 3 Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 50 0 mV Pa a and after pressing the ENTER push button with the calibration factor calculated 5 2 12 1 141 42 44010044400600000000000000000000000000000000 nennen 4 3 Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 50 0 mV Pa with the calculated calibration factor
148. the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window 5 23 G7 USER MANUAL The DOSIMETER SETUP is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button DOSIMETER SETUP DOSIMETER SETUP DOSIMETER SETUP DOSIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEVEL ETSI THRESHOLD LEVEL n EXCHRHGE RATE 3 EXCHRHGE RATE 5 EXCHRHGE RATE 5 EXCHRHGE RRTE DOSIMETER SETUP windows the CRITERION LEVEL selection 5 5 2 Setting criterion sound level THRESHOLD LEVEL The threshold level influences the calculations of the dose meter results namely DOSE D 8h and LAV The THRESHOLD LEVEL line is accessible after pressing the A v push buttons in the DOSIMETER SETUP window The available values are as follows None 75 dB 80 dB 85 dB or 90 dB They can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The DOSIMETER SETUP is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button DOSIMETER SETUP DOSIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEVEL 88dB THRESHOLD LEVEL EXCHRHGE RATE 3 aol DOSIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEUEL EXCHANGE RATE 3 EXCHRHGE RATE DOSIMETER SETUP windows the THRESHOLD LEVEL selection 5 5 3 Setting criterion sound level EXCHANGE RATE The exchange rate influenc
149. the overloaded input signal which occurred during the selected measurement time set in the INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGH PERIOD Statistical Levels Ln The noise level L t is the continuous random variable The probability that the temporary noise level L t belongs to the interval Lys Lk AL is called the class density and it can be expressed by the equation n P L lt L t lt L AL Yat i 1 where At time intervals in which the noise level L t e Ly Lk AL occurs AL so called class interval or distribution class of the series P total observation period In the case when the class interval approaches infinity the probability of L t tends to the probability of L practice AL value is strictly determined and it depends mainly on the dynamics of the measurements performed in the instrument In G7 instrument there are 120 classes and the width of each class is equal to 1 dB The histogram is the set of the class density values calculated for all classes In the G7 instrument the histogram is saved in the result files if the SAVE STATISTICS path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS SAVE STATISTICS is activated cf the detailed description of the relevant table in App B The statistical distribution function which determines the probability expressed in 96 of the noise occurrence on the level equal or less than AL is given by the formulae P La L Y 5
150. the triggering parameters It is not present for the DOSE METER function This sub list is opened after the selection of the TRIGGER SETUP text from the INPUT list by means of the v lt gt gt or v lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The TRIGGER SETUP consists of the MEASURE TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER and RECORDER TRIGGER sub lists The return to the INPUT list is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button oa oa INPUT TRIGGER SETUP INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE lt ESC gt MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 TRIGGER PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 RECORDER TRIGGER PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP selected in the INPUT list and the TRIGGER SETUP window 5 4 1 Trigger parameters setting MEASURE TRIGGER The MEASURE TRIGGER is a contexts sub list in which the triggering can be switched off or on TRIGGER in the case when on the source of the triggering signal can be determined SOURCE its level LEVEL and sometimes also the speed of changes GRADIENT In order to enter this sub list the user has to select by means of the A push buttons the MEASURE TRIGGER text in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list and press the ENTER one oa oa MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER iz SLOPE TRIGGER LEVEL RHSCID SOURCE 1 LEVEL TRIGGER GRAD SOURCE 5412 LEVEL SUB GRADIENT
151. 0 block s length in the second word length of the block saved setup values B 20 G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 25 Header of the file from the logger RAUS Name Comment 0 OxnnOF OF id nn header s length 1 BuffTSec logger time step full seconds part 2 BuffTMilisec logger time step milliseconds part 3 LowestFreq the lowest 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE frequency 100 Hz 4 NOctTer number of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE results 5 NOctTerTot number of TOTAL values 6 7 BuffLength logger length bytes 8 9 RecsInBuff number of records in the logger 10 11 RecslnObserv number of records in the observation period equal to number of records in the logger number of records not saved A Note The current logger time step in seconds can be obtained from the formulae T BuffTSec BuffTMilisec 1000 Table B 1 26 Contents of the file from the logger Word number Name Comment 0 BuffLength 2 1 result 1 result 2 result BuffLength 2 1 Table B 1 27 File end marker Word Name Comment number 0 OxFFFF file end marker B 2 Structure of the file containing results from logger s file File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings c
152. 0 06 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 00 0 17 0 00 0 07 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 00 0 12 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 11 0 00 C 23 G7 USER MANUAL 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 42 0 50 0 51 0 00 0 45 0 00 0 33 0 00 0 27 0 00 0 69 0 00 0 54 0 55 0 57 0 58 0 00 0 51 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 08 0 24 0 39 0 49 0 53 0 00 0 00 0 30 0 00 0 02 0 25 0 51 0 66 0 00 0 55 0 00 0 68 0 92 1 14 1 19 0 00 0 97 0 00 0 90 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 06 0 00 0 01 0 05 0 26 0 50 0 91 0 92 1 05 0 00 0 74 0 00 0 26 0 30 0 46 0 87 0 92 0 00 0 13 0 00 0 32 0 44 0 00 0 26 0 00 0 43 0 00 0 12 0 16 0 00 0 16 0 00 0 02 1 12 0 90 1 01 1 17 0 00 0 80 0 00 0 35 0 54 1 56 1 81 0 00 1 13 0 00 0 77 0 90 0 00 0 68 1 52 0 00 0 98 0 00 0 71 0 98 0 00 0 40 0 00 2 64 1 27 1 67 1 85 0 00 1 36 0 00 0 84 0 00 0 00 2 14 0 00 1 64 0 00 1 35 0 00 1 10 0 00 3 07 2 57 0 00 2 33 0 00 1 87 0 00 1 49 0 00 0 00 2 94 0 00 2 49 0 00 2 09 0 00 1 22 1 26 2 93 0 00 2 03 0 00 1 75 0 00 1 08 0 00 0 60 0 00 3 18 0 00 2 49 0 00 1 84 0 00 1 25 0 00 4 22 0 00 3 46 0 00 2 91 0 00 2 41 1 77 0 00 4 03 0 00 3 58 0 00 2 57 0 00 1 90 0 00 1 35 0 00 4 06 0 00 3 21 0 00 2 46 0 00 1 97 0 00 0 00 4 51 0 00 3 56 0 00 2 81 0 00 1 96 0 00 6 44 0 00 5 60 0 00 4 28 0 00 3 45 0 00 2 65 6 09 0 00 5 30 0 00 4 33 0 00 3 12 0 00 2 39 Angle 315 320 320 325
153. 0 20 0 500 00 30 0 16000 00 INF 20 00 30 0 630 00 20 0 20000 00 INF Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S1 format A4 C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 18 05 35 Sound meter mode filter 52 Hz dB Hz dB 0 80 INF 160 00 L 0 1 00 INF 200 00 1 0 1 25 250 00 1 0 1 60 315 00 3 0 2 00 0 0 400 00 MU 2 50 0 0 500 00 3 0 3 15 0 0 630 00 1 0 4 00 0 0 800 00 lx 5 00 0 0 1000 00 0 6 30 0 0 1250 00 lt O 8 00 0 0 1600 00 1 0 10 00 0 0 2000 00 0 0 12 50 0 0 2500 00 0 0 16 00 0 0 3150 00 0 0 20 00 0 0 4000 00 0 0 25 00 0 0 5000 00 0 0 31 50 0 0 6300 00 0 0 40 00 0 0 8000 00 0 0 50 00 0 0 10000 00 63 00 0 0 12500 00 80 00 0 0 16000 00 100 00 1 0 20000 00 125 00 0 0 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S2 format 5 8 7 Printing of the file s catalogue PRINT CATALOGUE The PRINT CATALOGUE enables the user to print the catalogue of the files stored in the instrument on the attached printer In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT CATALOGUE text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER L REPORT REPORT RESULTS E STATISTICS RESULTS ILE FILE LOGGER LOGGER USER FILTERS USER FILTERS CATALOGUE RIHT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the PRINT CATA
154. 0 averaging and returns the following sequence of characters 7 AC 7 RR This function returns the real time results mode in the format 7 RR xxx 7 RR Xxxx This function sets the real time results mode samples xxx 0 or logger results xxx 1 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RR 7 WF This function returns the state of the USB DISK FREE SPACE warning If the USB disk connected to the instrument has less free space than required to save measurement data the function returns the following sequence of characters 7 WF x 7 WF x This function enables x 1 or disables x 0 the USB DISK FREE SPACE warning and returns the following sequence of characters 7 WF 7 WM This function returns the state of the MIN FREE SPACE warning If the USB disk connected to the instrument has less free space than set in this position the function returns the following sequence of characters 7 WM xxx 7 WM xxx This function sets the value in the MIN FREE SPACE position of the WARNINGS sub list path MENU SETUP WARNINGS MIN FREE SPACE xxx e 1 1024 MB and returns the following sequence of characters 7 WM 7 LB This function returns the name of last logger in format 7 LB logger_name This function returns the CURRENT setting in format 7 IE x A 15 G7 USER MANUAL 7 1E x This function sets IEPE CURRENT amperage to 1 5 mA x 0 or 4 5 mA 1 and retu
155. 0 dB step down 5 15 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the LEVEL mode 1 dB step up 5 16 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the LEVEL mode 1 dB step up 5 16 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the GRAD mode 1 dB step down 5 16 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB ms and 10 dB ms step up 5 16 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB ms up and 1 dB ms down 5 16 LOGGER SETUP windows in sound mode pp 5 17 LOGGER SETUP windows in vibration modes nesne ai a E en nnne nter enne 5 17 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the not active SOURCE signal line in sound mode 5 17 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the not active SOURCE signal line in vibration mode 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step up in sound mode 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step up in vibration mode 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in vibration mode 1 dB step up cont 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 10 dB step up in sound mode 5 19 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the
156. 1 3 OCTAVE analysis should be edited the available options are as follows S1 S2 S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface After pressing the ENTER push button the Sx S1 S2 S3 sub list is opened containing the values of the filters the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters 2 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB 9 W n 9 20 0 kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB G7 USER MANUAL e CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are as follows ALL S1 S2 S3 or any other gt VIBRATION UNITS sub list which is available only in vibration mode METRIC e g m s m s m position available values NON METRIC e g g ips mil position available values WARNINGS RESULTS NOT SAVE it enables the user to switch on or off the warning that the results of the measurement were not saved in the memory available values V or USB DISK FREE SP it enables to generate a warning after checking free space on the USB disk MIN FREE SPACE specifies the limit of available memory for warning if the available memory is not greater than that limit the warning will be displayed available values 1 MB 1024 MB Control diagram of the SETUP list in the RT60 mode
157. 1 59 0 00 0 00 0 90 1 08 1 28 1 43 1 85 1 21 1 98 2 69 0 90 1 07 1 25 1 36 1 38 1 71 2 16 2 17 0 00 1 37 1 53 1 65 1 89 2 16 2 43 2 65 2 98 3 10 0 00 1 53 2 05 0 00 2 14 2 71 3 04 0 00 3 64 1 24 1 28 1 81 2 08 2 10 2 71 3 12 0 00 3 86 1 54 1 95 2 43 2 85 2 94 3 40 3 58 4 05 0 00 1 91 2 48 2 79 3 02 3 42 0 00 3 94 4 02 4 16 1 84 1 99 2 50 2 81 3 05 3 49 3 80 4 03 4 72 1 22 1 84 1 97 2 32 2 67 3 18 3 87 4 08 4 37 2 61 2 94 3 42 3 67 4 22 4 31 4 92 5 17 5 95 2 95 3 31 4 21 4 57 4 89 5 53 5 65 6 34 6 43 3 05 3 54 3 93 4 28 4 96 5 19 6 24 6 40 6 96 20 G7 USER MANUAL Angle 90 95 95 100 100 105 105 110 110 115 115 120 120 125 125 130 130 135 0 11 0 15 0 20 0 21 0 00 0 24 0 25 0 00 0 25 0 10 0 12 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 25 0 28 0 31 0 34 0 06 0 11 0 17 0 22 0 27 0 38 0 42 0 46 0 50 0 20 0 21 0 23 0 24 0 00 0 24 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 04 0 07 0 10 0 17 0 20 0 23 0 24 0 21 0 00 0 17 0 00 0 03 0 17 0 27 0 35 0 40 0 00 0 18 0 00 0 16 0 18 0 28 0 36 0 45 0 55 0 00 0 54 0 00 0 45 0 00 0 36 0 40 0 50 0 65 0 14 0 27 0 40 0 43 0 00 0 15 0 00 0 10 0 00 0 89 0 00 0 63 0 67 0 81 0 89 0 00 0 34 0 00 1 05 1 22 0 00 1 01 0 00 1 18 0 00 0 85 0 00 0 00 0 24 0 48 0 00 0 17 0 24 0 00 0 06 0 16 0 51 0 58 0 95 1 27 1 30 1 07 1 13 0 00 0 70 0 00 0 39 0 00 0 66 1 02 0 63 0 00 0 72 0 00
158. 10 34 8 20 22 6 160 sped 315 6 6 630 1 3 1 25k 0 6 2 5k 1 3 0 7 10k 2 4 70 2 Hz 9 3 dB G7 USER MANUAL type 1 according to the IEC 651 standard dB o 0 bere s tcn AME d re s 10 o 20 30 e 40 E 50 PE 60 S z0 10 20 40 80 160 315 690 1 25k 25k Sk 10k 20k Hz 17 4 gt 2 23 O6 01 0 amp 0 O00 00 03 L 4 3 tt2dB Frequency characteristics of the C filter implemented in the instrument G7 USER MANUAL The FREE FIELD filter is set in MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FREE FIELD position COMPENS FILTER OFF FREE FIELD gt lt ENTER gt gt DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR AIRPORT 1 OUTDOOR ENUIRDHN L 1 EXTENSION CABLE EXTERHRL 170 SETUP SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the FREE FIELD filter dB dB 2 0 2 0 UE RR RR DEA ERR RR 1 0 1 0 1 0 400 500 630 800 ik 1 25kl 6k 2k 2 5k3 15k 4k Sk 63k 10 12 5 16 20k Hz 0 09 Of 0 1 0 0 0 4 0 4 Of 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5 0 3 0 3 1 0 0 6 0 2 0 1 0 2 dB Frequency characteristics of the FREE FIELD filter implemented in the instrument The DIFFUSE FIELD filter is set in MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER FREE FIELD position a MPENS FILTER gt lt ENTER gt gt T EXPOSURE
159. 10 filter is used for the velocity measurements in the frequency range from 1 Hz to 20 kHz dB dB 20 20 30 30 4 0 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 8 50 30 asl 100 100 110 11 0 25 0 50 1 0 117 1 36 8 78 1 60 0 43 3 10124 2048 4096 Hz 36 1 40 1 46 0 52 1 58 1 64 1 7 1 76 2 82 2 58 1 dB Characteristics of the Vel10 digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM The VelMF filter is used for the evaluation of the state of the machines This filter is used for the measurements in the frequency range from 10 Hz to 1000 Hz and conforms to the ISO 10816 standard dB dB 2 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 8 50 30 40 100 100 110 11 0 25 0 50 1 0 108 0 33 6 80 7 67 7 53 3 1024 2048 4096 Hz 39 1 35 6 45 9 52 1 585 1 64 2 70 2 77 9 100 1 126 3 dB Characteristics of the VeIMF digital filter implemented for the velocity measurements in the VM D 18 G7 USER MANUAL D 2 2 3 Digital filters implemented in the vibration mode for the displacement measurements The following three filters Dil1 Dil3 and Dil10 are dedicated for the displacement measurements of the vibration signal in the different frequency ranges PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt FILTER a TER DETECTOR 1 65 rl DETECTOR 1 65 LOG
160. 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 18 04 18 CATALOGUE CONTENTS Number of files 5 Name Mf Length Date Time Name Mf Length Date Time 03AUGO S1 466 07 08 03 12 42 03AUGOCT Vt 486 07 08 03 12 50 03AUGST S1 1946 07 08 03 13 11 03AUGDOS Sd 1946 07 08 03 14 05 06AUGO Vt 486 07 08 06 17 53 Example of the printed catalogue format A4 8 20 G7 USER MANUAL The same catalogue printed in A5 format looks as follows C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 18 05 38 CATALOGUE CONTENTS Number of files 5 Name Mf Length Date Time 03AUGO S1 466 07 08 03 12 42 03AUGOCT Vt 486 07 08 03 12 50 03AUGST S1 1946 07 08 03 13 11 03AUGDOS Sd 1946 07 08 03 14 05 06AUGO vt 486 07 08 06 17 53 Example of the printed catalogue format A5 When the catalogue of the files is empty the measurement results were not saved the instrument returns to the REPORT list without any reaction PRINT CATALOGUE TIME OUT PRESS ANY Display during the catalogue printing when there is no data transfer 8 8 Selection of the printing options OPTIONS Using the OPTIONS the user can select the format of the listing FORMAT can control the way the paper is ejected in the printer EJECT P In order to enter the position the user has to select the OPTIONS text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press
161. 133 dB C 29 G7 USER MANUAL A Notice In the measurement conditions with the strong electromagnetic disturbances e g near the high voltage transmission lines the lower measurement limit can be drastically shifted as the result of the external field influence on the measurement cables In such cases the careful shielding of the measurement cables is strongly recommended It is worth to underline that the estimation of the external influence can be performed in site by the observations of the measurement signal spectrum Frequency range for the acceleration measurement 10 0 5 Hz 5 kHz in the linear measurements with the HP filter Notice With the application of another vibration transducer the frequency range given above for the HP filter can be different i e wider Basic error for the acceleration measurement lt 0 5dB Pre heating time 1 minute Calibration Direct by the measurement of the standard signal generated by the external vibration calibrator Indirect by the declaration of the transducer s sensitivity Calibration procedure is given in Chapter 4 of the Manual Accelerometer input Connector TNC Impedance 40 KQ 100 pF typical Vibration transducers powering 28 V 1 5 mA current source Range of the measured voltage Lower level filter depended see below Upper level 7 5 Vrms 137 dB related to 1 UVams or 177 dB related to 1 um s gus Internal noise lev
162. 2 0 59554601 0 12 0 35 0 050889768 0 30 0 80 0 681313089 0 12 0 19 0 171463618 0 02 0 10 0 179992382 0 08 0 18 0 086878998 0 09 0 12 0 203881982 0 32 Directional characteristics Directional response for SLM Type G7 with microphone type ACO 7052H and preamplifier type SV 12L for specified frequencies are presented below The round charts show the directional characteristic and the charts below shows the errors and tolerance limits for particular angle 250 Hz 315 Hz C 12 400 Hz 630 Hz 500 Hz 800 Hz G7 USER MANUAL 315Hz 180 180 13 G7 USER MANUAL N N 33 1600Hz o 180 10 0 so 100 150 180 Stopnie N d N N 407 4 1 150 2240 2 C 14 1250 Hz 2000 Hz 2500 Hz co M 180 150 100 50 o 50 100 150 180 2000Hz a 180 150 gu Ea 33 2000Hz 55 n D D 1 D a 1 180 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 180 2800 Hz 3550 Hz 255 I 45 8 15 a Pi a a ee 45 2240Hz 5 7 D D a 4 180 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 180 Stopnie M
163. 2 Ie 15 dh Int Inf Off Off Displays during setting the predefined INTEGR PERIOD sequence 5 3 G7 USER MANUAL Notice In the case of switching on the AUTO SAVE function the minimum value of the integration period should be equal to 10 seconds Notice In the DOSE METER the integration period cannot be set for the value greater than 8 hours If the user wants to switch on AUTO SAVE option path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS AUTO SAVE the integration period value has to be greater or equal than 10 seconds When AUTO SAVE option was switched on and new entered integration period value is less than 10 seconds AUTO SAVE option switches off and INT PERIOD TOO SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED message appears on the display INT PERIDD TOO SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED PRESS AHY KEV Dsplay when the INT PERIOD is too short for AUTO SAVE option 5 1 3 Setting the number of repetition of measurement cycles REP CYCLE The REP CYCLE defines the number of cycles with the measurement period defined in the INTEGR PERIOD which should be performed by the instrument The required parameter can be set by means of the lt gt gt push buttons with the step equal to 1 or by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one with the step equal to 20 The selected value is accepted by pressing the ENTER push button which closes the M
164. 3 TOTAL 2 available values S1 S2 S3 3 9 G7 USER MANUAL e TOTAL 3 available values Z S1 S2 S3 LOGGER VIEW e VIEW available logger views NORMAL FULL EXTENDED TIME available time settings for logger REAL TIME AVAILABLE TIME gt LOGGER VIEW sub list FILE NO number of the files in the instruments logger containing the results of the measurements LOG FILE name of the viewed logger s file RECORDS number of records in the viewed logger s file 1 settings for logger in PROFILE 1 INPUT list available values PEAK MAX MIN RMS in the case of sound measurements or PEAK MAX RMS in the case of vibration measurements P 2 settings for logger in PROFILE 2 INPUT list available values PEAK MAX MIN RMS or MAX RMS P 3 settings for logger in PROFILE INPUT list available values PEAK MAX MIN RMS or PEAK P P MAX RMS FREE it informs the user about the size of remaining free memory for logger files AVAILABLE it informs the user about the size of the available memory for logger files gt SCREEN SETUP sub list CONTRAST it enables the user to select one from twenty one possibilities of the contrast level of the instrument s display BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT available values V or 1 if V is chosen it will cause the self made backlight switching off in the case when the keyboard is not used during the last 30 seconds If it happened the
165. 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended settings cf Tab 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 RT60 parameters block cf Tab B 1 20 RT60 results cf Tab B 1 21 or RT60 averaged results cf Tab B 1 22 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 10 Structure of the SETUP file File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 SETUP data cf Tab B 1 24 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 11 DATE and TIME Following function written in C explains how the date and time are coded void ExtractDateTime int date int time int dt int sec year sec Oxffff amp time 1 time 1 dt 0 sec 60 sec dt 1 sec 60 60 min dt 2 sec 3600 hour dt 3 date amp Ox1F day dt 4 date gt gt 5 amp 0x0F month year date gt gt 9 amp 0 0 dt 5 year 2000 year B 26 G7 USER MANUAL C DATA SPECIFICATIONS C 1 Specification of G7 as sound level meter The G7 instrument working as the SLM meets requirements of the IEC 61672 1 for Type 1 instruments System configuration e G7 sound analyser SV 12L microphone preamp
166. 3 19 G7 USER MANUAL L MENU LRNGURGE FUNCTION DEUTSCH IHPUT DISPLAY COMPENSATION FILTER ESPANOL FILE DRY TIME LIMITS ITALIANO PORT EXPOSURE TIME FLEMISH EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP FRANCAIS mo LANGUAGE FLEMISH FRAN AIS MAGYAR POLSKI P2CCKHA mo CLEAR SETUP Are you NSATION FIL DRY TIME LIMITS sure NINE EXPOSURE TIME EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP n CLERR SETUP Are you SETUP CLEARED sure EE PRESS ANY KEY LD DAY TI LIMIT DOOR EXPOSURE TIME OUTDOOR AIRPORT EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP EXTENSION CABLE MPENS FILTER LIMITS a DAY TIME LIMITS CH Si mo EXPOSURE TIME SETUP E COMPENSATION FILTER AY TIME ITS IR SETUP COMPENSRTION FILTER DAY TIME LIMITS EXT 140 SETUP MODE DIGITRL DUT FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION SETUP IEPE CURRENT CLEAR SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME mo IEPE CURRENT 11 5 mH mo REFERENCE LEVELS COMPENSATION FILTER DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME 2B UF EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP wa I URRENT 3 20 SETUP TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME REFERENCE LEUELS REMOTE COMMUNICRTIO DA EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP IEPE CURRENT REFERENCE LEVELS FONTE CAREAT TTL IEPE CURRENT REFERENCE LEUELS REMOTE COMMUNICRTION RMS INTEGRATION SETUP REFERENCE LEUELS REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS INTEGRATION RS232 RTC ETUP REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS_INTEGRATION RS232 RTC SHIFT MO
167. 3 54 3 TS 44 2 54 2 Vos 44 1 54 1 Tos 44 0 54 0 74 43 9 93 58 74 43 9 53 7 74 43 8 53 6 74 43 8 99359 74 43 7 53 4 74 43 6 9953 T3 43 6 53 2 3345 43 5 Iwl T3 43 5 5350 43 4 52 9 22 43 3 52 8 d 2s 43 3 52527 43 2 52 6 2s 43 2 52 6 72 43 1 52 2 71 0 4 43 52 TLs PION 4 40 PS C0 O1 C0 O1 O0 I2 O1 OO I2 C TUENA P2 1 OH W dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB 922 89 72 76 93 76 76 82 82 87 79 76 74 71 69 63 60 58 Profile 10000 l Qo UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ w w 02 1 O HP L51 L52 L53 L54 L55 L56 L57 L58 L59 L60 L61 L62 L63 L64 L65 L66 L67 L68 L69 L70 L71 L72 L73 L74 L75 L76 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 STATISTICS 1 dB A dB 42 5 51 42 4 51 42 4 51 42 3 51 42 3 51 42 2 51 42 2 51 42 1 51 42 0 50 42 0 50 41 9 50 41 9 50 41 8 50 41 8 50 41 7 50 41 6 50 41 6 50 41 5 50 41 5 50 41 4 50 41 3 50 41 3 50 41 2 50 41 2 50 41 1 49 41 1 49 41 0 49 40 9 49 40 9 49 40 8 49 40 7 49 40 6 49 40 5 49 40 4 49 40 3 49 40 3 49 40 2 48 40 1 48 40 0 48 39 8 48 39 6 48 hO CO O1 QO P2 P P2 C 4S UI Oy C O P IN IN UI Oy OO XO XO QO rm P hN
168. 354 ms the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 03 ms to 500 ms PEAK Table C 17 Linear operating ranges with the HP filter RANGE RMS Linear operating ranges LOW from 3 16 mms 70 0 dB to 56 2 ms 155 0 dB HIGH from 33 mms 90 4 dB to 354 ms 171 0 dB Values of the measured acceleration using the accelerometer with the nominal sensitivity equal to 1 mV ms e g 3023M2 e Linear measurement with the Wh filter from 0 01 ms to 3540 the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 03 ms to 5000 ms PEAK Table C 18 Linear operating ranges with the Wh filter RANGE RMS Linear operating ranges LOW od 10 mms 80 0 dB do 562 ms 175 0 dB HIGH od 100 mms 100 0 dB do 3540 ms 191 0 dB e Linear measurement with the HP filter from 0 03 ms to 3540 ms the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 3 ms to 5000 ms PEAK Table C 19 Linear operating ranges with the HP filter RANGE RMS Linear operating ranges LOW from 31 6 mms 90 0 dB to 562 ms 175 0 dB HIGH from 330 mms 110 4 dB to 3540 ms 191 0 dB Notice In the measurement of the signal with the crest factor gt 1 41 the upper linear operating range for the RMS value is reduced lis value can be calculated from the equation An A 10 20log 19 m where A is the given range for the sinusoidal signal E g for n z 10 and A 140 the value of Aj is equal to
169. 36 38 ME 28 58 16 Exemplary contents of the LOAD SETUP window The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing the ENTER push button The message with the name of the selected file is displayed during the execution of the loading operation The next message is displayed after successful end of loading operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list Loan SETUP FILE MAE SETS SETZ SETZ SETUF Loading Loaded DATE HOU 2886 TIME 21 84 48 SAUE SETUP PRESS ANY KEW Displays after the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation 7 11 Connecting the external USB memory stick DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY text appears in the FILE list when the USB memory stick is connected to the device It is necessary to select in the USB HOST PORT window the USB DISK position path MENU SETUP USB HOST PORT USB DISK In order to enter the window the user has to select the DIRECTORY text in the FILE list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button D ao DIRECTORY FREE SPACE 82977 KB DIR l z FILE DEFRRGMENTRTIDH CATALOGUE FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIR ELIRH Edit directory name
170. 38000 bits s 57600 bits s or 115200 bits s The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The transmission speed should correspond to the one selected in a printer The other RS 232 transmission parameters are fixed to 8 bits for data No parity amp 1 Stop bit The default value of the TIME OUT parameter is equal to one but it can be too short period for the printers which are not too fast In such case this parameter has to be increased The description of the SV 55 pin outs is given in App C The printers with the different connections on the RS 232 socket require the special individual RS 232 RS 232 cable that should fulfil the suitable wire crossing The printers in which the Centronics interface is available instead of the RS 232 one can be connected to the instrument by means of the SV 52 RS 232 Centronics interface The printers which have only USB interface are currently not driven by the instrument Notice Switch the power off before connecting the instrument to any external device e g a printer or a Personal Computer The REPORT list contains the following elements TITLE that enables the user to give the header to the printed report PRINT RESULTS that enables the user to print out the measurement results on the default printer or to send the measurement results to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT STATISTICS that enables the user t
171. 4 64 69 69 CO W CO oo o UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ w w 72 68 66 65 63 62 61 60 58 ON asa n UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ w w FAST FAST Example of the printed results from the SOUND METER mode LEVEL METER A4 format C SVANTEK G7 TITLE ic EE EE SETTINGS Device mode VIBR METE Input Accelerometer Device function 1 3 OCTAVE Meas start date 2007 08 03 RANG Cis sees ie eee teat SHOW Ref level for Vel 1 nm s Measure trigger Off Repeat cycle 1 Integration time 1 m Calibration by Measurement Calibration hour 12 39 58 Spectrum filter Z Profile 1 2 3 Filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Logger Non Non Non RESULTS Measurement tim 00 01 00 No 12800 2007 08 03 SETTINGS Meas start hour Ref level for Acc Ref level for Dil Logger trigger Start Calibr factor vx Calibration date RMS integration Spectrum in logger Profile 1 Detector 1 0s v6 06 6 06 2 12 50 42 2007 08 03 Linear one 2 3 1 05 1 05 8 6 G7 USER MANUAL Prof 1 2 3 PEAK 813 mm s2 767 mm s2 653 mm s2 P P 1 57 m s2 1 38 m s2 1 14 m s2 MAX 412 mm s2 266 mm
172. 5H Inzert Exemplary settings made for the desired execution of the TIMER function The instrument will be switched on the 1 of February at 13 25 and will be warmed up for the period of 60 seconds decrementing by one after each second the counter visible on the display HARM UP TIME HARM UP TIME HARM UP TIME HARM UP TIME Please wait 35s Please wait 40s5 Please wait i14s5 Please wait 4s ESC Lo skip ESC Lo skip ESC Lo skip ESC Lo skip Counting down during the warming up of the instrument after switching it on After warming up the instrument and the preset DELAY time the measurements are performed for a period of ten seconds Then the results are saved in the file which name was given or accepted the proper information is displayed and finely the instrument is switched off SPL Fast R SPL PARE R 55 4 47 0 Profile 1 gt E Profiletci b 00 02 0 00 03 Displays during the executing of the TIMER function Notice The instrument s TIMER function can be used for multiply measurements at the programmed day and time with the selected repetition The first switch on of the instrument must be within one month ahead 9 19 Selection the USB HOST port functionality USB HOST PORT The USB HOST PORT enables one to programme the functionality of the instrument s socket named USB Host In order to enter the position the user has to select the USB HOST PORT text in the SETUP
173. 62 3 Switch on the calibrator and wait ca 30 seconds before starting the calibration measurement 4 Start the calibration measurement by pressing the START STOP push button The measurement time is set to 5 seconds with 5 seconds delay During the calibration measurement the ESC and lt PAUSE gt push buttons do not operate but it is possible to stop the measurement using the START STOP one It is not recommended to stop the calibration measurement before programmed 5 seconds period ow ow BY HERSUREHEHT BY HERSUREHEHT BY HERSUREHEHT CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL 8 5 113 98dB CAL MEASURE LEG 187 32dB C Displays during the calibration measurement Waiting for the start of the measurements the DELAY is counted down on the display After the end of the measurement its result is displayed on the display in the bottom line It is recommended to repeat the calibration measurement few times The obtained results should be almost the same with 0 1 dB difference The reasons for the unstable results are as follows e the calibrator is not properly attached to the instrument e there are external disturbances e the calibrator or the measurement channel the microphone the preamplifier or the instrument itself are damaged A Notice During the calibration measurement the external disturbances acoustic noise or vibrations should not exceed the value of 100 5 Pre
174. 8 0 46 7 0 3 16 0 6 2 64 12 1 18 8 8 128 23 8 256 46 6 64 7 1024 Hz 83 2 dB Characteristics of the W Bz digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM D 21 G7 USER MANUAL The filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the local vibration signal on the human body It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 rev dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB dB 10 20 3 40 50 60 70 80 30 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4036 Hz COAT Lal o224 2 0230 3 0 9956 9o 0Bl124 o 23 8 dB Characteristics of the H A digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM The W Bc filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body during the seat back measurements It conforms to the ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 rev dated as 1990 07 15 standards dB 10 20 3 40 50 60 70 80 530 D 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 1024 Hz SIRNA cll 0 5 du 040 Gb 515 21 2 77 3208 48 5 62 6 286 2B Characteristics of the W Bc digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM D 22 G7 USER MANUAL In the G7 instrument there are also various filters conforming to new ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 re
175. 9 118 52 26 57 4 651 L68 47 5 53 5 59 8 L19 52 4 51 9 65 0 L69 47 4 53 4 59 L20 52 9 5112 64 8 L70 41 3 5359 59 L21 52 2 5112 64 7 L71 41 2 5339 59 6 L22 52 1 bs 64 5 L72 47 1 53 52 HOD L23 52 0 57 0 64 4 L73 47 1 59 4 124 51 8 569 64 2 174 47 0 53 0 59 53 L25 51 6 56 8 64 1 L75 46 9 52 9 5953 L26 51 5 56 21 63 9 L76 46 8 52 8 5922 L27 51 3 56 7 63 8 L77 46 8 52 28 59 1 128 51 2 56 6 63 7 178 46 7 59 0 129 51 0 56 5 63 6 L79 46 6 52 6 59 0 G7 USER MANUAL L30 50 9 56 4 63 5 180 46 5 52 6 58 8 131 50 8 56 3 63 4 181 46 5 22 5 58 7 L32 50 7 56 3 63 3 L82 46 4 52 4 58 5 L33 50 6 56 2 63 2 L83 46 3 52 4 58 4 L34 50 5 56 1 63 1 L84 46 3 5273 58 2 135 50 4 56 0 63 0 185 46 2 22 2 58 1 L36 50 3 56 0 62 8 L86 46 1 9212 58 0 L37 50 2 55 9 62 7 187 46 0 9S2 57 8 L38 50 1 55 8 62 6 L88 46 0 52 0 51 56 L39 50 0 55 7 62 5 L89 45 9 22 0 57 4 L40 49 8 55 6 62 3 L90 45 7 9148 515 2 141 49 7 55 6 62 2 191 45 6 51 7 57 20 142 49 6 5549 62 1 L92 45 5 51 6 56 7 L43 49 5 55 4 62 0 L93 45 3 91545 56 5 L44 49 3 55 3 61 9 L94 45 2 2153 56 2 L45 49 2 55 2 61 8 L95 45 1 21 2 56 0 146 49 1 55 2 61 7 196 45 0 oll 55 6 L47 49 0 55 1 61 6 L97 44 6 51 0 5542 148 48 9 55 0 61 6 198 44 2 50 6 54 8 149 48 8 54 9 61 5 199 43 6 50 2 54 4 150 48 7 54 9 61 4 Example of the printed statistics from the SOUND METER mode DOSE METER format 4 The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer is not connecte
176. A Notice For all electrical tests the microphone compensation filter must be set to OFF path MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER OFF C 1 G7 USER MANUAL A Notice For all free field tests the FREE FIELD filter must be set to ON path MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER FREE FIELD Measuring ranges LOW and HIGH Linear operating ranges for the LEQ values The starting point at which user shall begin tests of level linearity is 94 0 dB for the frequencies specifies below Table C 1 Linear operating ranges for LEQ value 1 kHz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters RANGE Linear operating range with the error 0 7 dB LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and microphone sensitivity 22 mV Pa LOW from 25 dB A weighting to 120 dB weighting LOW from 25 dB C weighting to 120 dB weighting LOW from 33 dB Z weighting to 120 dB Z weighting HIGH from 36 dB A weighting to 137 dB A weighting HIGH from 36 dB C weighting to 137 dB weighting HIGH from 46 dB Z weighting to 137 dB Z weighting Table C 2 Linear operating ranges for LEQ value 31 5 Hz sinusoidal signal different weighting filters Linear operating range for frequency 31 5 Hz RANGE LEQ for the sinusoidal signal and nominal microphone sensitivity 22 mV Pa LOW from 25 dB weighting to 75 6 dB A weighting HIGH from 36 dB
177. ACO 7052H and SV 12L for given frequencies C 18 G7 USER MANUAL 150 180 180 22 150 LEGEND Fmin 250Hz 12 5kHz Total directional characteristics of G7 with ACO 7052H microphone and SV 12L preamplifier Table C 15 Directional response for G7 including microphone type ACO 7052H Angle 0 5 5 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 30 30 35 35 40 40 45 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 03 0 04 0 06 0 07 0 09 0 11 0 14 0 15 50 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 00 0 04 0 00 0 04 0 05 0 00 0 01 0 00 0 02 0 04 0 05 0 07 0 08 0 11 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 05 0 06 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 03 0 04 0 06 0 11 0 15 0 01 0 00 0 03 0 07 0 13 0 20 0 28 0 47 0 55 60 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 08 0 13 0 20 0 36 0 42 0 02 0 00 0 08 0 17 0 24 0 32 0 39 0 48 0 56 0 01 0 00 0 03 0 10 0 18 0 29 0 42 0 69 0 79 0 02 0 07 0 16 0 28 0 43 0 56 0 66 0 70 0 00 0 01 0 04 0 11 0 26 0 45 0 64 0 78 0 79 0 00 0 01 0 07 0 13 0 14 0 00 0 10 0 00 0 21 0 34 0 01 0 04 0 13 0 28 0 46 0 56 0 00 0 31 0 00 4000 0 03 0 10 0 15 0 00 0 04 0 24 0 46 0 69 0 00 0 09 0 21 0 34 0 44 0 54 0 68 0 71 0 00 1 05 19 G7 USER MANUAL 0 19 0 31 0 34 0 00 0 14 0 00 0 10 0 30 0 41 0 02 0 00 0 08 0 14 0 00 0 11 0 43 0 82 0 85 0 02 0 00 0 07 0 00 0 08 0 25 0 44 0 59 0 60 0 02 0 08
178. ADIENT GRADIENT RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB step up 5 5 Selection of dose meter parameters DOSIMETER SETUP The DOSIMETER SETUP is accessible in the INPUT list in the SOUND METER mode when the DOSE METER function is selected path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION It is not available in the VIBRATION METER This sub list is opened after the selection of the DOSIMETER SETUP text from the INPUT list by means of the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The DOSIMETER SETUP consists of the parameters which influence the calculation of the dose meter results the CRITERION LEVEL THRESHOLD LEVEL and EXCHANGE RATE the definitions of the dose meter results are given in App D mo INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE ENTER CRITERION LEVEL mo D SIMETER SETUP 205 IMETER SETUP PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 EXCHRHGE RATE DOSIMETER SETUP selected in the INPUT list and the DOSIMETER SETUP window 5 5 1 Setting criterion sound level CRITERION LEVEL The criterion sound level influences the calculations of the DOSE and D 8h results The CRITERION LEVEL line is accessible after pressing the lt A gt push button in the DOSIMETER SETUP window The available values are as follows 80 dB 84 dB 85 dB or 90 dB They can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of any change made in
179. AN VIB FILT text highlighted displayed inversely VALID CODE ENTER CODE 411 ENTER CODE a PRESS ANY KEY S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete SH Insert Displays during the entering of the access code to a function 9 8 Selection of the current IEPE supply IEPE CURRENT The IEPE CURRENT enables the user to choose current IEPE supply In order to enter the window the user has to select the IEPE CURRENT text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one EXTERHRL I 0 SETUP SETUP list the IEPE CURRENT text highlighted displayed inversely Two options are available 1 5 mA and 4 5 mA The selection is made by placing a special character in the required position by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt or lt A gt v push buttons The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring a change made in the position G7 USER MANUAL L oa IEPE CURRENT IEPE CURRENT IEPE CURRENT windows the IEPE supply selection 9 9 Reference signal in vibration measurements REFERENCE LEVELS The REFERENCE LEVELS sub list enables the user to set the reference level of the vibration signal or to inform the user about the reference level in the case of sound measurements The valu
180. AST LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER L 1 LOGGER RMS 1 a PROFILE 3 gt FILTER Z DETECTOR FAST LOGGER G7 USER MANUAL oa PROFILECZ FILTER DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX 1 LOGGER L 1 LOGGER RMS 1 PROFILE x windows vibration the PEAK result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 5 3 4 MAX result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER MAX In order to save the MAX result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button oa PROFILE i gt FILTER A DETECTOR FAST LOGGER LOGGER RMS LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS oa PROFILE i gt ao PROFILE 3 FILTER HPiH DETECTOR 1 65 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS 1 a PROFILE 3 gt FILTER Z DETECTOR FAST LOGGER LOGGER RMS LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS oa PROFILE 3 gt FILTER Z DETECTOR FAST LOGGER LOGGER RMS LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS G7 USER MANUAL 5 3 5 result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER
181. AVAILABLE The displays below illustrates the erasing from the logger memory another big file 29 named amp LOG113 just after the erasing of the file amp LOG107 the FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE and LOGGER FREE SPACE remain unchanged while the LOGGER AVAILABLE is increased 7 23 G7 USER MANUAL a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE ei TOTAL AVAILABLE 106113 Deleted PRESS ANY 15883732 bytes Execution of the amp LOG113 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 4 3 Deleting files with setup settings SETUP FILES In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed SETUP FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the lt A gt v push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved setup files in the memory one has to press the ENTER push button In the case when the setup files were not saved in the memory the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt DELETE RESULT FILES gt ENTER gt SETUP FILES selected to be deleted and the instrument s memory does not contain any file After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current stat
182. AVE OPTIONS FILE HAME LEU META RAM FILE 2 LEU id Saved Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEW SAVE MAS SPECT Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIF 7 38 G7 USER MANUAL L1 L SAVE SETUP FILE FILE HAME LEU DELETE ALL M LEU DEFRAGMENTATION Saved D K Press ENTER ta SAUE ave FREE SPACE Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY LOAD SETUP Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is active 7 10 Loading the files with the setup settings LOAD SETUP The LOAD SETUP is used for loading setup setting file from the FLASH DISC e g for performing different type of measurements with different instrument s settings The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the LOAD SETUP text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected using the v or lt gt gt or v or lt gt gt with the lt SHIFT gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SAVE SETUP FILE list with the LOAD SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 3 seconds After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed
183. AVE mode SLM only the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 18 Results of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE mode SLM only the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 19 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 7 Structure of the file with 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended I O settings cf Tab B 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM or Tab B 1 9 VLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM or Tab B 1 10 VLM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 RPM results cf Tab B 1 23 VLM only the presence depends on the RPM On flag 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results cf Tab 1 11 1 1 OCTAVE analysis MIN results the presence depends on the MIN SPECT position cf Tab B 1 11 1 1 OCTAVE analysis MAX results the presence depends on the MAXSPECT position cf Tab B 1 11 Header of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 16 Results of the statistical analysis the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 17 Header of the statistical analysis performed 1 3 OCTAVE mode
184. Bl Start delay qs Integration time 1 m 6 6 dB Calibration by Measurement Calibration date 2007 08 03 Calibration hour 12 39 58 Leq integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Profile 1 2 3 Filter A 2 Detector FAST FAST FAST Logger Non Non Non B m RESULTS 8 15 G7 USER MANUAL Measurement tim Pro PEA AX I P z 5 SEL Ld LTM LTM 101 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 f K d 3 5 Measurement tim Profile 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 00 01 00 1 2 76 1 dB 35 9 60 0 dB 64 6 34 8 dB 44 7 47 5 dB 60 0 44 3 dB 5379 62 1 dB 1138 44 3 dB 539 44 3 dB 5229 50 5 dB 24 49 52 2 59 6 52 6 dB 62 3 45 8 dB 56 1 44 5 dB 54 5 43 7 dB 53 4 43 1 dB 52 5 42 5 dB 51 6 42 0 dB 50 9 41 4 dB 50 2 40 8 dB 49 5 39 8 dB 48 3 STATISTICS 00 01 00 1 2 dB A dB C dB 52 6 62 53 87 50 6 60 2 85 49 4 59 21 84 48 0 58 6 83 47 3 58 3 82 46 8 57 8 82 46 5 57 0 81 46 3 56 7 80 46 0 56 4 80 45 8 56 1 79 45 7 55 9 79 45 5 55 7 78 45 4 55 5 78 45 2 99x3 78 45 1 Doel 77 44 9 54 9 Tos 44 8 54 8 77 44 7 54 7 77 44 6 54 6 76 44 5 54 5 44 4 54 4 1525 44
185. C to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF SHirDelete 5H z Inzert S5Hz Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIF Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H Inzert 5H Delete SH Insert Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons oa SAVE SETUP FILE SAVE oa SAVE SETUP FILE HAME LEM E SAVE a oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE HRME LEN FILE E SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF SHirDelete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete 5H z Insert S5Ht Delete SH Insert Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons The edited name is accepted and the setup file is saved after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory if the REPLACE position is not activated path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt SETUP SAVE OPTIONS FILE FILE DELETE RLL SAVE LACE LEU_MDO used CATALOGUE Press ENTER to SAVE AUTO SAVE FREE SPACE Press ESC to
186. CTION text selected a the FUNCTION list opened the CALIBRATION text selected b 4 2 G7 USER MANUAL Note The calibration level and the calibration result is expressed in different units depending on the settings of the instrument The metric or non metric vibration units are set in the VIBRATION UNITS path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS Additionally the linear or logarithmic units are set in the DISPLAY SCALE path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE 4 3 1 The calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of acoustic signal The calibration by the microphone s sensitivity introduction can be conducted in the following way 1 Select this type of the calibration highlight the BY SENSITIVITY text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the ENTER push button oa a CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT 25 damd PS LAST CALIBRATION 5 TEDS Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode A Notice It is not possible to calibrate the instrument during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not displayed inversely and so not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the sensitivity the measurement must be finished BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY Saml CAL FA
187. CTO Saved 0 DELETE ALL PRESS ANY KEY S5H belete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY CEFRAGMENTATION Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is not active A Notice The direct access to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function is possible after pressing simultaneously the ENTER and ALT push buttons if the DIRECT SAVE option is switched off path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS DIRECT SAVE In another case DIRECT SAVE option is switched on the results are saved after pressing these push buttons in the file with the automatically incremented name Notice After the usage of the ENTER and ALT push buttons if the DIRECT SAVE option is switched on the measurement results are saved only once The following pressing will not cause any instrument s reaction unless next measurement is performed The same result can be saved in the multiply number of files only using the SAVE SAVE NEXT function Finely let us present some examples showing the occupation of the result files memory and the logger files memory after the execution of the saving operation 7 6 G7 USER MANUAL Example 1 Let us assume the settings presented below where one measurement is performed with the integration period equal to 10 seconds nothing is saved in the logger and the statistics are not stored The measurement results are saved in the file named EXAMP1 oa FI
188. CTOR C 6 6206 Displays with the SENSITIVITY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible 2 Set the sensitivity of the microphone taken from its calibration certificate using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and then press the ENTER one The calibration factor is calculated after pressing the ENTER push button in the relation to 50 0 mV Pa In order to avoid the calculation the user has to leave the CALIBRATION without pressing ENTER For the sensitivity of the microphone higher than 50 0 mV Pa the calibration factor is negative oa oa BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SEMSITIVITY SENSITIVITY a Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 50 0 mV Pa a and after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the calibration factor calculated b For the sensitivity of the microphone lower than 50 0 mV Pa the calibration factor is positive 4 3 G7 USER MANUAL BY SENSITIVITY a Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 50 0 mV Pa with the calculated calibration factor The lowest applicable value of the sensitivity to be introduced is equal to 50 0 uV Pa it conforms to the calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB and the highest one 50 0 V Pa calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB In order to return to the CALIBRATION sub list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button a Ll BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SEMSITIVI
189. Computer Antenna Tree Loudspeaker Headphone Envelope Bell Timer and Arrows The meanings of the icons are as follows 17 1 LEG Lin Frofiletl Display with all available icons Paper sheet icon is displayed when the USB disk or IrDA is connected to the instrument Battery is displayed when the instrument is powered from the batteries icon corresponds to the batteries state three two one or none vertical bars in side of the icon When voltage of batteries is too low the icon is flashing 3 25 G7 USER MANUAL Frafileci Display with Paper sheet and Battery icons Computer is displayed when there is the USB connection with the PC the icon is flashing during RT Real Time transmission Frafilecl Display with Computer icon Antenna Tree icon is displayed in a flashing mode together with the Loudspeaker when the measurement is started the trigger is switched on and the level of the signal is too low to start the registration 1 19 Display with Antenna icon Loudspeaker icon is displayed when the measurement is started and executed The crossed out loudspeaker means measurement is paused Pause Frafileri n1 34 Display with Loudspeaker icon Headphone is displayed when RS 232 SV 55 interface is connected to the instrument Envelope icon is pr
190. DE TATIST mo RMS INTEGRATION C LINEAR C 1 E POHEHTIRL IMTEGEHTIOM LINEAR JE EMT IAL mo RS232 BAUD RATE TIME OUT a RS232 BAUD RATE 115266 pos TIME OUT 52 51 28 MAR 28087 To modifu press SHIFT lt SHIFT gt SHIFT MODE SHIFT 3 Normal a SHIFT MODE SHIFT gad Fun LEUELS G7 USER MANUAL 3 21 G7 USER MANUAL SPECTRUM BASED TE EDIT po HARNINGS SHIFT MODE RESULTS SAVED Gl STATISTICAL LEVELS USB DISK FREE SP vl TIMER FREE SPACE 32MBE USB HOST PORT USER FILTERS HARNINGS RESULTS HOT SAVED w USB DISK FREE SP L4 MIN FREE SPACE Control diagram of the SETUP list in sound mode 3 2 Powering of the instrument The G7 can be powered by one of the following sources SA 15 external DC power source adapter 110 V 230 V mains 6 V DC 15 V DC 1 5 W SA 17A external battery pack operation time gt 24 h with USB 1 1 Host function not active and backlight off Four AA standard batteries In the case of alkaline type fully charged set can operate more than 12h 6 0V 1 6 Ah with USB 1 1 Host function not active and backlight off Instead of the ordinary four AA rechargeable batteries can be used for charging them the separate charger is required In this case using the best NiMH type the operation time can be increased up to 16 h 4 8 V
191. DT Early Decay Time is marked 2 RT 20 the RT 20 reverberation time is marked 3 RT 30 the RT 30 reverberation time is marked By pressing the A v and lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the user can highlight the one of three options E 2 3 in each 1 3 octave band For faster scroll between the rows press the lt SHIFT gt push button and while holding it press the lt A gt Y push buttons mark or unmark the desired option first highlight it and then press lt lt gt or lt gt gt push button with lt SHIFT gt one The confirmation of the changes is made by pressing ENTER push button The RT60 RESULTS window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing the lt ESC gt push button L RESULTS RESULTS 31 5Hz 2 51 5 gt Hz 112115 GHz 98 2 8 Hz E CZ 65 BHz 65 GHz 38 8Hz E 38 8Hz E 166Hz E1021 03 RT60 RESULTS window unmarking option in 1 3 octave band 9 17 Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE The SHIFT MODE enables the user to programme the operation mode of the lt SHIFT gt ALT and START STOP push buttons In order to enter the position the user has to select the SHIFT MODE text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The selection of a parameter in both positions is done by
192. E to replace the existing in the memory file by the new with the same name REPLACE to add to the results the statistics of the measurements SAVE STAT to save automatically the results of the measurements AUTO SAVE The position of the sub list is changed after pressing the lt A gt v push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes also the opened sub list 7 2 1 Saving data starting from the same address RAM FILE The measurement data usually are saved in the different files in the flash memory of the instrument There is also possibility to save data in RAM file starting from the same address It means that each time the data are saved the previous file is overwritten This option is useful for the permanent monitoring and remote reading data from the instrument by means of any available interface with the proper period In order to read data saved in a RAM file one has to use 4 3 function described in details in App A The RAM FILE is switched on after placing the special character in the inversely displayed position in the line with the RAM FILE text The activation or deactivation of the RAM FILE is done by pressing the lt gt gt push buttons SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS RAM FILE RAM FILE REPLACE SE REFLACE AUTO SAVE AUTO SRUE DIRECT SRUE DIRECT SRUE SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE SPECT SAVE SPECT
193. E PRINT CAT n Q PTIONS _ FORMRT EJECT P a REPORT PRINT STATISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE Control diagram of the REPORT list 3 16 G7 USER MANUAL SETUP one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button LANGUAGE it allow the user to choose the instrument s interface language available values GERMAN ENGLISH SPANISH ITALIAN FLEMISH FRENCH HUNGARIAN POLISH RUSSIAN TURKISH CLEAR SETUP it enables the user to return to the factory settings of the instrument the confirmation has to be done before the execution of this function Are you sure COMPENSATION FILTER sublist available in sound mode available values it enables the user to switch off the internal noise compensation which should be used in a case of the electrical investigation of the measurement channel available values or FREE FIELD it enables the user to switch on the compensation filter which should be used in a case of the measurements performed in the free field using SA 22 windscreen available values or DIFFUSE FIELD it enables the user to switch on the compensation filter which should be used in a case of the measurements performed in the diffuse field available values or OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL it enables the user to switch on the compensation filter which should be used in a case of the measurements of the c
194. E E ILES ERIS RMS PC23 PERK MAR RHS 5 gt RMS Execution of the LOGGER FILES deletion After the execution of the logger files deletion from the memory usually the logger free space rests the same as before the deletion but the total logger available memory is increased It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENT in which all files are moved to the continuous space It can be illustrated on the figures below by erasing from the memory 2 kB long logger file named amp LOG107 The presented there FREE SPACE window comes from the FILE list E Log FILE Exc E z amp LoGio7 LOG SIZE 2 KB 152 MIN RMS Deleted 2 RMS PRESS ANY KEY a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE RURILRBLE FILES FREE SPACE RURILRBLE 15875538 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE 15876333 bytes 1987563328 bytes 198837932 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE 15505792 bytes 15884576 bytes 15885792 bytes 15886948 bytes Execution of the amp LOG107 file deletion from the logger memory and its influence on the memory space LOGGER
195. EASUREMENT SETUP window The Inf value denotes the infinite repetition of the measurements until the pressing the START STOP gt push button or after receiving the remote control code The REP CYCLE number values are within the limits 1 1000 oa oa L1 Ll HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP ls START DELAY START DELAY s START DELAY 15 IMTEGE PERIOD is IMTEGE PERIOD IMTEGE PERIOD Inf orf LOGGER OFF LOGGER LOGGER REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to 20 5 4 G7 USER MANUAL 5 1 4 Logger functionality switching On Off LOGGER The LOGGER switches on and off the functionality which enables the user to save in a file the selected results from three profiles with the defined period The LOGGER can be activated and deactivated by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and accepted by the ENTER one The acceptation closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window Any changes are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY l IHTEGR PERIOD IHTEGR PERIOD REP CYCLE DI REF CYCLE z Inf L GGER LOGGER L GGER STEP is LOGGER 10512 Displays with the LOGGER deactivated and activated The LOGGER functionality is not included in the standard set of the instrument It can be bought together with the instrument ordering the proper option or c
196. EMENT FUNCT IO x SOUND METER CALIBRAT IOH MENU FUNCTION and MODE windows sound mode selection The weighting filters which are available in sound mode Z A and C are selected in the MENU INPUT PROFILE x windows iAHPUT INPUT IHMPUT _ 1 MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 RO 2 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 5 TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP f a PROFILE i gt PROFILE 33 gt INPUT and PROFILE x windows weighting filter selection Z cut off frequency 10 0 Hz 3 0 dB dE dB 0 o 10 10 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 amp D 60 _z0 70 10 20 40 80 160 315 690 125k 25k 5k 10k 20k Hz 9 03 UID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dB Full band frequency characteristics of the Z filter implemented in instrument D 9 G7 USER MANUAL 70 70 0 16 65 1 0 315 458 0 0 63 z9445 1 25 29 1 2 5 5 zs Ses al 40 3 8 0 1 160 Hz 0 0 dB Low band frequency characteristics of the Z filter implemented in the instrument A type 1 according to the IEC 651 standard dB dB 10 1 SAN 20 30 3 40 Frequency characteristics of the A filter implemented in the instrument D
197. ENT 16dB ms MEASURE TRIGGER window with the GRAD mode selected 5 4 1 2 Selection of the triggering signal SOURCE It is assumed that only one measured result can be used as a source of the triggering signal in the LEVEL METER mode namely the output signal from the RMS detector coming from the first profile which is denoted here as RMS 1 This position does not become active it is not displayed inversely and the text stated here remains unchanged in the case of LEVEL LEVEL or GRAD triggering mode After pressing there the v push button the SOURCE line is skipped 5 14 G7 USER MANUAL L1 Ll MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL 5412 SOURCE ORMSCID 168dB LEUEL MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL GRAD GRAD TSOURCE 5412 SOURCE ORMSCIA SOURCE ORMSCID 1686 LEUEL EEE LEVEL GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms MEASURE TRIGGER windows with not active SOURCE signal line In the case of SLOPE and SLOPE as a source of the triggering signal can be used the signal connected to the external input output socked named I O The selection of the source of the triggering signal is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons L1 oa L1 oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE
198. ENTER push button oa oa ao REMOTE COM REMOTE COM REMOTE COM TYFE PRCKET 1824 REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows the TYPE selection 9 10 2 Setting the packet size of the remote communication PACKET In the case of the PACKET type it is possible to select the packet size The available options are 1024 512 256 128 and 64 The selection is made by the lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made by pressing the ENTER push button oa a oa RENOTE COM REMOTE COM RENOTE COM TYPE PACKET TYPE PACKET PRCKET PACKET M f REMOTE COM REMOTE COM TYPE PACKET PACKET 64 REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows packet size selection 9 11 Detector s type selection in the LEQ calculations RMS INTEGRATION The RMS INTEGRATION enables the user to select the detector type for the calculations of the LEQ Lden LEPd Lxx and SEL functions in case of sound measurements and RMS function in case of vibration measurements In order to enter the position the user has to select the RMS INTEGRATION text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER EXPOSURE TIME EXTERMAL 1 0 SETUP TEPE CURRENT REFERENCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUN TCATIOH SETUP list with the RMS INTEGRATION text highlighted displayed inversely Two options are available LINEAR
199. ENU SETUP USB HOST POHT SRT RECORDING or WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING n order to enter RECORDER TRIGGER window the user has to select the RECORDER TRIGGER text in the TRIGGER SETUP window using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press ENTER ao TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER SETUP window the RECORDER TRIGGER text highlighted 5 4 3 1 Selecting trigger mode TRIGGER In the TRIGGER position following options are available Off SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD The selection is made by pressing lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and ENTER one The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button L1 oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER 1S TRIGGER GEE RHECID RHSCIO 10006 oa oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER ENZEEENNENNNN TRIGGER RMSCID 19006 RECORDER TRIGGER GERD RMSID RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER aa SOURCE LEVEL RHSCIA EUEL lQundB LEUEL 10006 GRADIENT 18dBe ms RECORDER TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection 5 21 G7 USER MANUAL 5 4 3 2 Selecting the triggering signal SOURCE In the case when in the TRIGGER position SLOPE or SLOPE is selected it is possible to choose the SOURCE Available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O The selection is made using
200. ER MANUAL In order to select the level the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the ACTIVE LEVEL text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes EXT I SETUP EXT I 0 SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION ALARM PULSE FUNCTION ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL SE ALARM LEVEL 186 dB ACTIVE LEVEL SOURCE SOURCE ALARM LEVEL 166 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ACTIVE LEVEL selection 9 6 5 Source signal selection for the alarm pulse generation SOURCE In the SOURCE it is possible to select the measurement result which level should be checked If the measured result level is greater than selected alarm level the instrument will generate alarm signal on the I O socket The measurement results from the first profile PEAK 1 SPL 1 or LEQ 1 can be used for the purpose described above In order to select the function of the digital output the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the SOURCE text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes oa L EXT
201. ES HO Hd Displays with the question about switching on the compesation filter 4 3 4 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of vibration signal The calibration by measurements can be conducted in the following way 1 Select the calibration by measurement highlight the BY MEASUREMENT text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the ENTER push button L L oa CALIBRATION EY MEASUREMENT EY MEASUREMENT Y SEHEZITIUITw HL LEVEL CAL LEVEL BY MEASUREMENT LAST CRLIBRHTIUH TEDS Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode 2 Attach the vibration calibrator to the instrument s accelerometer 3 Switch on the calibrator and wait approximately 30 seconds before starting the calibration measurement 4 Start the calibration measurement by pressing the lt START STOP gt push button The measurement starts after 5 seconds delay The measurement time is also predefined to 5 seconds During the calibration period the ESC and lt PAUSE gt push buttons do not operate but it is possible to stop the measurement using the START STOP push button Waiting for the calibration measurement to begin a DELAY is counted down ao a BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEWEL CAL LEWEL 146 6 m z CALIBRAT IOH DELAY 35s DELAY 35s Displays while the instrument is waiting for the calibration measurement to commence At the end of the measuremen
202. ETTINGS 8 4 Device mode TOW a Field correctio Outdoor filter Device function LEVEL METER ver eas start dat 2 1 SOUND METER Ky lees Microphone Dia gt PRE DEN Off e LEVEL METER sion 6 06 e 2007 08 03 eas start hour 12 42 04 vs ve e HIGH easure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle 2 Start delay 1 s Integration time 10 s Calibr 6 6 dB Calibration by Measurement Calibration date 2007 08 03 Calibration hour 12 39 58 Leq integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Filter A C Z Detector FAST FAST FAST Logger Non Non Non RESULTS Measurement tim 00 00 10 Prof 1 2 3 PEAK 63 7 68 9dB 76 3dB MAX 48 5dB 56 1dB 70 7dB MI 41 8dB 50 2dB 58 1dB SPL 48 5dB 55 9dB 67 9dB E 44 0dB 53 0dB 64 8dB SEL 54 0dB 63 0dB 74 8dB Ld 44 0dB 53 0dB 64 8dB EPd 44 0dB 53 0dB 64 8dB Ltm3 46 2dB 55 4dB 69 3dB Ltm5 47 5dB 55 6dB 69 5dB 101 49 5dB 56 5dB 72 5dB L10 45 3dB 54 7 68 1 120 44 6dB 54 0dB 66 7 130 44 2dB 53 5dB 65 4dB 140 43 8dB 53 1dB 64 4dB L50 43 5dB 52 7 63 4dB L60 43 2dB 52 3dB 62 4dB L70 43 0dB 51 9dB 61 4dB L80 42 6dB 51 4dB 60 2dB L90 42 2dB 51 0dB 58 0dB Example of the printed results A5 format The same result s report printed in A4 format is p
203. FFT This sub list is opened after the selection of the FFT text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The FFT consists of the parameters which influence the calculation and logging the results of the FFT analysis AVERAGING FILTER BAND WINDOW LINES and LOGGER The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button AWERAGING LINEAR LINEAR TER H INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MERSUREMEMT RANGE gt ENTER gt PRDFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 3 22 4kHz HRHHIHG 1920 Cc FFT selected in the INPUT list and the FFT window opened in sound mode a and in vibration mode b 5 6 1 The averaging of spectra in the FFT analysis AVERAGING The AVERAGING influences the way in which the spectra in the FFT analysis are averaged Up to the internal software version named as 6 04 only LINEAR is available this position can not be accessed and changed 5 6 2 Selecting the weighting filter during the FFT analysis FILTER The FILTER influences the calculations of the FFT In the case of sound measurements there are Z A and C filters available In the case of vibration measurements only Z filter is available and the position is not accessible after entering the FFT window The frequency characteristics of those filters are given in Appendix D The select
204. FILE HRHE eee IM 03 13 IH 16 68 ELAPSED TIME 8 0 01 ELAFSED TIME 66 08 61 Exemplary contents of the FILE INFO window 6 13 G7 USER MANUAL 6 2 Setting the parameters of the graphical modes DISPLAY SETUP The DISPLAY SETUP sub list enables the user to change several parameters of the graphical results presentations Using the DISPLAY SCALE sub list for example one can select the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results time history in the LOGGER and spectra in the SPECTRUM Using the TOTAL VALUES sub list it is possible to select the weighting filters used in the calculation of the Total values This sub list appears on the display only in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyser Using the SPECTRUM TYPE sub list which appears on the display only in VM it is possible to select the spectrum type which has to be presented during the vibration measurements In order to enter the DISPLAY SETUP list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed DISPLAY SETUP text of the DISPLAY list The DISPLAY SETUP sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY after pressing the lt ESC gt push button which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or the ENTER push button which confirms the changes oa DISPLAY DISPLA 5 P UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list with the DISPLAY SETUP selected 6 2 1 Setting the scale of the presentation a
205. GER C 1 LOGGER C 1 LOGGER C LOGGER C LOGGER MAX 1 LOGGER MAX 1 LOGGER RMS 1 i LOGGER RMS 1 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measurements The 0111 filter is used for the displacement measurements in the frequency range 1 Hz to 20 kHz dE 3 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 Hz 61 8 43 4 31 2 32 43 8 55 83 e8 0 80 1 32 1 104 2 116 2 128 3dB Characteristics of the Dill digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM The Dil3 filter is used for the displacement measurements in the frequency range 1 Hz to 20 kHz dE 50 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 14 0 32 64 128 256 Hz 83 4 3 1 5 6 43 3 5 amp 1l 658 0 80 1 92 1 i04 2 116 2 128 3 140 3dB D 19 G7 USER MANUAL Characteristics of the Dil3 digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM The Dil10 filter is used for the displacement measurements in the frequency range 1 Hz to 20 kHz dE 70 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 256 1024 2048 Hz 36 5 854 3 73 1 70 3 80 1 82 1 104 2 1186 2 1285 3 140 3 152 4 164 5dB Characteristics of the Dil10 digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM D 2 2 4 Digital filters used in the HUMAN VIBRAT
206. GER TRIGGER LEWEL RMSt13 187dB LOGGER 2 5 LOGGER STEP LOGGER STEP LOGGER amp LOG23 L HERSUR SETUP START DELAY IHTEGR PERIOD REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER amp LOG23 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection for different LOGGER STEPS The value set in the PRE is confirmed and the window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the window is closed ignoring the settings made in the PRE 5 4 2 5 Selection of the number of the results to be saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition POST In the POST line the number of the results registered in the logger s file after the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be set This number is within the limits 0 200 and can be set with the step equal to one using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or the step equal to 10 using the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt HERSUR SETUP TRIGGER TRIGGER START DELAY lef LEVEL LEWEL LEWEL IMTEGE PERIOD RMSt13 RMSt13 RMSt13 REP CYCLE 187dB 187dB a 187dB LOGGER 20 3im28s 20 3im28s 5 2 L GGER STEP nios BE 22 AEE 133m28s LOGGER 0625 m TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection Time period of the measurements which are saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condi
207. HP HP 00e 02 24e 03 76e 03 16e 02 95e 02 89e 03 76e 03 42e 03 07e 02 71e 03 69e 03 16e 02 12e 02 76e 03 76e 03 76e 03 56e 03 32e 03 42e 03 27e 03 47e 03 29e 03 91e 03 29e 03 20e 03 68e 03 16e 03 26e 03 70 03 57e 03 91e 03 02e 03 NNER 99 nan gt OO GO CO OO CO OO OOO O CO OO COO CO COO OO CO AN TOTALS FOR FILTERS Total 1 32e 01 m s2 9 33e 02 m s2 6 24e 02 m s2 lter Type 1 3 Acc 10 Acc CF dB 0 0 0 0 0 0 G7 USER MANUAL Example of the printed file from the VIBRATION METER mode 1 3 OCTAVE format A5 C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 Ig 559 File name 03AUGST TITLE SETTINGS CS Device mode SOUND METER Dpto ener E Microphone Field correction FREE Outdoor filter Off Device function LEVEL METER LEVEL METER version 6 06 Meas start date 2007 08 03 Meas start hour 13 09 54 Sakis aed LOW Measure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle
208. ILTER DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PEAK w LOGGER MAK 4 LOGGER LOGGER RMS PROFILE x windows the MIN result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 5 3 7 RMS result selection for saving in a loggers file LOGGER RMS In order to save the RMS result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a a a PROFILE i gt FROFILECI gt FROFILEC3 gt FROFILEC3 gt FILTER FILTER t FILTER t DETECTOR FAST DETECTOR FAST DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PEAK x LOGGER MAX x LOGGER 1 LOGGER L GGER LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS L1 PROFILE 3 FILTER meds DETECTOR 1 4s 4 vw LOGGER PEAK x LOGGER P P 4 Tv LOGGER P P LOGGER MAK x x LOGGER MAK L7 LOGGER RNS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE x windows VM the RMS result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 5 12 G7 USER MANUAL 5 4 Triggering mode and parameters selection TRIGGER SETUP The TRIGGER SETUP sub list enables the user to set
209. IMPULSE FAST or SLOW in the case of sound mode and equal to 100 ms 125 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 25 5s or 10 s in the case of vibration mode path MENU INPUT PROFILE x DETECTOR The available values are equal to IMPULSE FAST or SLOW the temporary value of the measured sound with the weighting filter W equal to A C or Z in the case of sound mode and equal to HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb in the case of vibration mode path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER on the input of the RMS detector the temporary value of the measured sound with the weighting filter W equal to A C or Z in the case of sound mode and equal to HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb in the case of vibration mode path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER on the output of the RMS detector calculated from the equation t put f sitem where t time variable of the integration aw t path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR pw t path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION EXPONENTIAL the reference value equal to 20 uPa the exchange rate in decibels equal to 2 3 4 or 5 and is set in the EXCHANGE RATE path MENU INPUT DOSIMETER SETUP EXCHANGE RATE The value of Q influences the calculations of dose meter results namely DOSE D 8h and LAV The exposure rate equal to 3 complies with ISO R 1999 Assessment of Occupational Noise Exposure for Hearing Conservation Purposes while Q equal to 5 complies wit
210. ION investigations The HUMAN VIBRATION FILTERS are the optional feature of the G7 instrument They should be activated by the introduction of a special code unique for the serial number of the meter The mentioned code has to be input in the ENTER CODE window opened after pressing the ENTER push button in the SETUP list with the HUMAN VIB FILT text selected URLID CODE a ENTER CODE HYL34119 SETUP CLEAR SETUP EXTERMAL 1 0 SETUP IEPE CURREHT REFEREHCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUNICAT IOMS SETUP and ENTER CODE windows the activation of human vibration option a ENTER CODE a SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete SH gt Imsert PRESS ANY KEY After the successful introduction of the activation code the HUMAN VIB FILT text is removed from the SETUP list and will not be visible any more even after the upgrade of the internal software LANGUAGE pages SETUP Y TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHAL SETUP SETUP windows after the successful activation of human vibration option In the G7 instrument there are various filters conforming to old ISO 2631 and ISO 8041 version dated as 1990 07 15 standards W Bxy W Bz and W Bc still used in certain countries for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body The mentioned above filters can be set in the same manner as other filters in the PROFILE x windows D 20 oa PROFILE PROFILE i gt FILTER
211. L PEAK MTVV in the case of vibration measurements the detector time constant IMP FAST SLOW 100 ms 125 ms 10 0 s when the detector is exponential or Lin when the detector is linear the weighted filter A C Z or HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF 0111 Dil3 01110 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb The real time clock time of the measurement are presented on the right side of the bottom Sei Fast 12 6 69 Profileci Prorie Displays in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the SLM measurement results 10 RMS 1 05 GEM 3 89 ms FD h RNS 2 82 mls mis RMS 942 mmis Prafileci Prefilecl B o aj 12 25 Displays in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the VLM measurement results The results of the measurements can be presented in one profile 3 PROFILES in STATISTICS and in LOGGER these are the available display modes set by the producer cf path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES It is also possible to activate FILE INFO display mode path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES FILE INFO It is possible to change the display mode pressing the lt A gt or v push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one In so called 3 PROFILES display mode the results of the measurement from all profiles are displayed simultaneously The units weighted filter and detector time constant are
212. L IBRATIOH 4 1 Selecting the mode of the instrument MODE In order to select the required mode the user has to enter the MODE position in the FUNCTION sub list using lt A gt v push buttons and press the ENTER one A mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with the mode s name The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v push buttons After placing the character in the line with the option s name the user has to press the ENTER push button oa FUNCTION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CRLIBFRTION WIBRATION METER 1 VIBRATION 1 SOUND METER SOUND METER b FUNCTION list opened MODE selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with vibration meter mode selected b and sound meter mode selected c 4 2 Measurement functions of the instrument MEASUREMENT FUNCTION In order to select the required function the user has to enter the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list to select the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION text using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one when this text is displayed inversely After entering the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list the set of the available functions appears on the display LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT and RT60 in the case SOUND METER MODE and LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT in the case of VIBRATION METER MODE The special character marks
213. L operation in the case of LOGGER FILES selected 2 2 2 2 222222 7 28 SETUP FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation essent 7 28 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 28 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL 7 28 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of SETUP FILES selection eee 7 29 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation for all type files simultaneously pp 7 29 DEFRAGMENTATION text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE 16 7 29 FILES DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 30 Confirmation windows during the execution of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION 7 30 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 2 7 30 Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is 7 31 Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation eene enne nennen trennen trennen eren enne 7 31 Result of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation Ne 7 31 LOGGER DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION 7 31 Confirmation windows during th
214. LD OUTDOOR ENUIRDH T EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHRL 170 SETUP dB dB 8 0 7 0 7 0 6 0 6 0 5 0 5 4 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 5 630 800 ik 1 25ki 6k k 2 5k 315k 4k Sk 6 3k Gk 10k 12 5k 16k 20k Hz 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 Of 0 2 04 0 9 20 3 7 55 65 66 6 5 6 5 dB Frequency characteristics of AIRPORT filter implemented in the instrument D 2 2 Digital weighting filters implemented in vibration mode The vibration mode of the G7 instrument is selected in the MENU FUNCTION MODE window VIBRATION METER oa FUNCTION WIBRATION METER MEASUREMENT SOUND METER CAL IBRAT IOH MENU FUNCTION and MODE windows vibration mode selection D 2 2 1 Digital filters implemented in the vibration mode for the acceleration measurements G7 USER MANUAL The weighting filters which are available in vibration mode are selected in the MENU INPUT PROFILE x windows The first three of them HP1 HP3 and HP10 are dedicated for the acceleration measurements of the vibration signal in the different frequency ranges INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MAI RAHGE TRIGGER SETUP oa PROFILEC1 FILTER Er NN MEASUREMENT SETUP MERSUREMEHT RANGE Ll PRO FILECZ INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MERSUREMEHT RANGE PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP oa PROFILE 3 FILTER EU NN DETECTOR 1 4s LOGGER 1 LOGGER
215. LE 2 read only P3 PROFILE 3 read only Filter type in profile n in SLM mode Filter type in 17 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis G7 USER MANUAL 1 Z filter for profile n F2 n A filter for profile n C filter for profile n Filter type in profile n in VLM mode f1 Z filter f2 Afilter f3 C filter Detector type in profile n in SLM mode I n HP1 filter for profile n I2 n HP3 filter for profile n I3 n 10 filter for profile n Vel11 filter for profile n I5 n Vel filter for profile n l6 n Vel10 filter for profile n I7 n VelMF filter for profile n l8 n Dil filter for profile n I9 n filter for profile n 110 n 01110 filter for profile n 115 n KB filter for profile n 116 n Wk filter for profile n 117 n Wd filter for profile n 118 n Wc filter for profile n 119 n Wj filter for profile n 120 Wm filter for profile n 121 Wh filter for profile n 122 Wg filter for profile n 123 Wb filter for profile n Detector type in profile n in VLM mode IMPULSE detector in profile n 1 FAST detector in profile n C2 n SLOW detector in profile n Logger type in profile n in SLM mode EO n 100ms detector in profile n Et n 125ms detector in profile n E2 n 200ms detector in profile n E3 n 500ms detector in profile n E4 n 1 0s detector in profile n E5 n 2 0s detector in profile n E6 n 5 0s detector in profile n E7 n 10
216. LE INFO FILE GEXAMP1 id oa HERSUR SETUP SAVE OPTIO FILE NAME HERSUR SETUP SAVE OPTIONS START DELAY 1s RAM FILE TE A EXRMF cd IMTEGE PERIOD ifs REPLACE CYCLE SRUE STRTISTICS L GGER AUTO SAVE E DIRECT SAVE ME 16 25 jn 1 ELAPSED TIME 8 0 10 SAVE J S5H Delete 5H Inzert gt Settings and the FILE INFO after the performed measurements The size of the file is equal to 466 bytes and it is visible in the FILE INFO window The detailed description of the level meter file structure is given in App The 1 file saved in the result files memory decreases the amount of the FREESPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE memory by the value of the file size 466 bytes plus 4 bytes containing the addresses of the previous file and 4 bytes containing the address of the next file all together 474 bytes The size of the logger files memory the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE is not changed as the LOGGER path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP was not activated a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15862028 bytes 2286280238 1 5867624 bytes TOTAL AVAILABLE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15868898 bytes 2243346 b 15867624 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE 2243345 bytes 2243346 bytes FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP1 file Example 2 Let us as
217. LIBRATION 2007 25 97 AUG 2887 25 16 gt lt gt gt y MEASUREMENT LEWEL 113 9008 FACTOR El6zdB LAST CALIBRATION 2007 Gr 20 2007 13 16 ENTER 38 JUL 2887 84 89 26 2007 z007 2007 BY SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR 6 62dB Displays with the LAST CALIBRATION records In the case when the calibration measurements were not performed the LAST CALIBRATION window does not contain any record The contents of this window is cleared after the CLEAR SETUP operation LAST CALIBRATION Ho calibration records Display with the empty LAST CALIBRATION window 4 3 6 Automatic reading of a vibration transducer parameters TEDS The TEDS Transducer Electronic Data Sheet function enables automatic reading by the instrument the sensitivity and other electronic parameters of vibration transducer This function is under development In order to enter the TEDS window the user has to select the TEDS text in the CALIBRATION list using lt A gt v push buttons and press the ENTER one oa CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT LE CALIBRAT LOW CALIBRATION window TEDS text highlighted 4 9 G7 USER MANUAL 4 10 HO DATA AVAILABLE TEDS window opened NO DATA AVAILABLE message G7 USER MANUAL 5 MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS SETTING INPUT The profile parameters can be set in the INPUT list which can be entered after pressing the lt MENU gt
218. LOGGER TRIGGER is set to 100 Xq100 Note All bytes of that transmission are ASCII characters A 3 G7 USER MANUAL Function 2 Measurement results read out in the level meter or dose meter modes 2 function enables one to read out the current measurement result from the selected profile in the sound or vibration LEVEL METER or DOSE METER modes Notice This function can also be programmed while measurements are taking place In this case the RMS values measured after entering 2 function are sent out 2 function has the format defined as follows 2 where X the code of the result the number of the profile 1 2 or 3 Notice After finishing the measurement 2 function is no longer active and has to be reprogrammed in order to read out successive measurements The instrument sends the values of results in the format defined as follows 2 p Xccc Xccc Xccc XCCC where p the number of the profile 1 2 or 3 or 2 when the results are not available The codes of the results in the case of SLM mode are defined as follows V the under range flag ccc equals to 0 when the overload did not occur 2 when the under range took place during the last measurement period but did not occur in the last second of the measurement and 3 when the under range took place during the last measurement period and it lasted in the last second of t
219. LOGUE selected in SM a and VM b 8 19 G7 USER MANUAL After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress After pressing the ENTER push button the following message is displayed PRINT CATALOGUE Printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT CATALOGUE When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data but if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P path MENU REPORT OPTIONS EJECT P the confirmation question is displayed after the printing The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page L1 Ll PRINTING PRINTING an Er Rum Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection The exemplary printed catalogue is presented below C SVANTEK G7 No
220. MEASUREMENT RANGE selected There are two ranges available HIGH and LOW The detailed description of the measurement ranges parameters is given in App C The change of the input range is made by means of the lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the change is confirmed and the window closes 5 7 G7 USER MANUAL The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button MEASUR RANGE MEASUR RANGE RANGE RANGE Lou RMS RMS cA 36 84 143 696 25 998 126 696 PEAK PEAK T2 8dB 146 608 59 8dB 129 608 MEASUREMENT RANGE windows in sound mode the RANGE selection 5 RANGE MEASUR RANGE RANGE RANGE RMS RMS lH hHmm za8 l 41mm za PE KE Sl amp 6mm s8 1 B8Bkm s 51 8 141 MEASUREMENT RANGE windows in vibration mode the RANGE selection The range value changes due to the calibration factor in case of SM changes only upper limit m BY SENSITIVITY HERSUR FANGE HERSUR FANGE RANGE RANGE Lou SENSITIVITY Ss zB RMS CAR RMS 36 GdE 157 46 25 858 129 GdB FERK r2 BdB 146 606 39 806 123 6806 L BY SENSITIVITY HERHSUR RANGE HERHSUR RANGE RANGE RANGE ou SENSITIVITY meor cm laa aa EE RMS
221. MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP is equal to one the AUTO SAVE function is executed disregarding the value of the integration period SAVE UPTE SAVE DPTID SRUE MAX SPECT SRUE MAX SPECT SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the AUTO SAVE in DOSE METER The FILE NAME window is opened after switching on the AUTO SAVE function and pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the ESC push button the FILE NAME window is closed and the instrument returns to the SAVE OPTION but with the AUTO SAVE function switched off FILE NAME SAUE OPTIONS RAM FILE iL 147 REPLACE 3 1 SAUE OPTIO SAUE STATISTICS AUTO SAVE E DIRECT SAVE SAVE STATISTICS UTD SAVE 1 DIRECT SRUE E S5H Delete 5H z Insert S5HUE MAR SPECT L 1 5 RAM FILE REPLACE 1 PE 1 SAVE MAX SPECT C 15 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME skipping and return to the SAVE OPTION sub list 7 12 G7 USER MANUAL When the integration period is too short for switching on the AUTO SAVE option the following message appears on the display IMT FERIUD TOO SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED PRESS ANY KEV Display after attempt of switching on AUTO SAVE option with too short INT PERIOD The FILE NAME window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button with the confirmation of the AUTO SAVE function switched on and the user interface returns to the FILE lis
222. MS detector DETECTOR 1 06 the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS The user can change all mentioned above settings using PROFILE x sub list of the INPUT list The instrument remembers all changes The return to the default settings set up by the producer is possible after the execution of the CLEAR SETUP position available in the SETUP list The instrument can be used not only as the sound or vibration level meter SLM or VLM but also as 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser DOSE METER and for FFT RT60 measurements In order to distinguish the LEVEL METER function from the others which are available in 3 PROFILES display mode two continuous horizontal lines are used to separate the measurement results from different profiles In other modes than SLM or VLM the mentioned above lines are dotted w m RMS 83 amis Pein GSTs 248 mmfs 2 RMS 74 immis es Em Profilecz 2 EE Frorilecm 18 24 1226 odi a b Displays in 3 PROFILES display mode with the measurements results which are from LEVEL METER mode continuous lines b and with the results which are not from the LEVEL METER dotted lines Notice See next chapters for more details concerning different settings More data about the instrument s state are given by means of the icon s row visible in the top of the display Paper sheet Battery
223. NGE RANGE available values of the exchange range the amount by which the permitted noise level may increase if the exposure time is halved 2 dB 5 dB PROFILE 1 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used in the first profile during the measurements 2 HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb available filters in vibration measurements Z A C available filters in sound measurements DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the first profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s available detector time constant in vibration measurements o IMP FAST SLOW available detector time constant in sound measurements LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the first profile setting possible only when LOGGER is switched on path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER On o PEAK P P MAX RMS in the case of vibration measurements o PEAK MAX MIN RMS in the case of sound measurements PROFILE 2 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used the second profile during the measurements 2 HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 01110 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb available filters in vibration measurements Z A C available filters in sound measurements DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the
224. NITS The VIBRATION UNITS position enables the user to select the units for the vibration measurements this position is available only in VM In order to enter the position the user has to select the VIBRATION UNITS text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER 5 SETUP list the VIBRATION UNITS text highlighted displayed inversely It is possible to select the NON METRIC units e g g ips mil etc or METRIC units e g m s m s m etc The selection is done by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored oa VIBRATION UNITS VIBRATION UNITS C HOH METRIC 1 1 METRIC METRIC VIBRATION UNITS windows with the available positions 9 31 G7 USER MANUAL 9 22 Warnings selection WARNINGS The WARNINGS enables the user to select the messages which could be displayed during the operation of the instrument In order to enter the window the user has to select the WARNINGS text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER This window contains only one position ao SETUP SHIFT MODE STATISTICAL LEWELS TIMER USB HOS
225. O SETUP EXT SETUP EXT SETUP ANALOG OUT EST ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT x DA x DA v ti L L L I 0 SETUP I SETUP 1 0 SETUP ANALOG OUT MODE OUT MODE PROLES OUT EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the source selection for D A option 9 8 G7 USER MANUAL In the case of DIGITAL IN selection the signal appearing on the socket will be treated as the external trigger if the EXT is chosen path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER SOURCE EXT 1 0 and it can be set only if SLOPE or SLOPE was set as a TRIGGER path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER Ll TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER ORMECIS SOURCE RMECI 100046 LEUEL iBBdB MEASURE TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection 9 6 2 Digital output function selection of the socket FUNCTION In the FUNCTION it is possible to set the function of the digital output of the VO instrument s Socket The socket can be used as the source of the trigger pulse TRIG PULSE which starts the measurement in another slave instrument linked to the master one or the alarm signal which appears there after fulfilling certain measurement conditions ALARM PULSE In order to select the function of the digital output the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the FUNCTION text The window is closed and the instrument returns t
226. OCTAVE analysis was selected as the measurement function and the LOGGER position of the SPECTRUM sub list was activated path MENU INPUT SPECTRUM LOGGER the sequence of words is written flags Octave 1 Octave 2 lt Octave NOct NOctTot gt where flags 1 the overload detected 0 the overload not detected Octave i the result of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis 10 dB i 1 NOct NOctTot 1 16 b results of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis if 1 3 OCTAVE analysis was selected as the measurement function and the LOGGER position of the SPECTRUM sub list was activated path MENU INPUT SPECTRUM LOGGER NJ the sequence of words is written flags Terave 1 Terave 2 lt Terave NT gt B 22 G7 USER MANUAL where flags 1 the overload detected 0 the overload not detected Terave i the result of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis 10 dB i 1 NT 1 46 or 1 31 The value of NT parameter depends on the LOGGER STEP selection path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP For the logger steps greater than 2 ms the value of NT is equal to NTer NTerTot the outputs from all 1 3 OCTAVE filters from 0 8 Hz up to 20 kHz the TOTAL value are written 45 1 46 For the logger step equal to 2 ms the value of NT is equal to 31 the outputs from 1 3 OCTAVE filters from 25 Hz up to 20 kHz and the TOTAL values are written 30 1 31 6 RPM result if the corresponding LOGGER position was active path
227. OFF OFF OFF MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 seconds step From 1 m min to 59 m with 1 minute or 10 minutes step oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY PERIOD METH REP CYCLE Inf LOGGER DFF iz FE Int OFF MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 1 and 10 minutes step From 1 h to 24 h with 1 hour or 10 hours step It is also possible to set Inf value HERHSUR SETUP START DELAY el Int Int DPF oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY L MEASUR SETUP START DELAY HERSUR SETUP START DELAY ds PERIOD CLE Inf Off 1s IMTEGR REP CYC Inf LOGGER Off Inf MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 hours step Additionally the predefined periods 1 5 15 m 1h 8 h and 24h which are enumerated in the standards are also available by pressing the push button or with SHIFT these values are placed in the mentioned above sequence on the left in relation to 1 s Ll oa HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY Ds START DELAY START DELAY 21s n OFF E E DPF ao L1 HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY DL START DELAY 4
228. OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE STATISTICS G7 USER MANUAL Ll SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the SAVE STATISTICS After pressing the ENTER push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the SAVE STAT are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active V after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt 5 gt push button 7 2 4 Controlling the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE Using the AUTO SAVE one can set the self saving of the measurement results V or to switch off this possibility The activation or deactivation of the AUTO SAVE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons This position was also established in order not to waist too much memory of the instruments when the self saving is not necessary SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the AUTO SAVE Notice The AUTO SAVE function can be performed only in the case when the INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP is not less than 10 seconds If it is less than 10 seconds the measurement results are not saved without any indication of that fact There is only one exception when the REP CYCLE path
229. P P In order to save the P P result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the A v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button The LOGGER P P position is available only in VM oa a a a PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE 3 gt PROFILE 3 gt FILTER HFI FILTER FILTER HPiH FILTER HPiH DETECTOR LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE x windows the P P result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 5 3 6 MIN result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER MIN In order to save the MIN result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button The LOGGER MIN position is available only in SM oa a oa oa FROFILECIO PROFILE i gt PROFILE 3 gt PROFILE 3 gt F
230. PE mode 10 dB step down 5 15 G7 USER MANUAL MEASURE TRIGGER L1 oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL lt gt gt TRIGGER LEVEL lt gt gt TRIGGER LEVEL nn SOURCE SOURCE MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the LEVEL mode 1 dB step up Ll Ll ao MEASURE TRIGGER HEASURE TRIGGER HERHSURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL LEUEL TRIGGER LEVEL SOURCE ORMSCID SOURCE ORMSCI ORMSCID SOURCE 1 LEUEL EECA LELEL ERES LEUEL ECHE ao L1 MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD ORMSCID SOURCE z EMSLI SOURCE ORMSCID SOURCE EVEL EET LEVEL MEE LEUEL GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the GRAD mode 1 dB step down 5 4 1 4 Setting the speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT The speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT can be set in 1 dB millisecond step or 10 dB millisecond steps from 1 dB ms to 100 dB ms range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt lt gt lt gt gt with SHIFT2 Ll oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD lt gt gt SOURCE RM5CDO l
231. PUT one of the main lists available after pressing the lt MENU gt push button gt MEASUREMENT SETUP sub list START DELAY available values of the delay before starting the execution of the measurements 1s 60s NTEGR PERIOD available values of the integration time Inf 1s 24h CYCLE available values for the measurement cycles which has to be repeated Inf 1 1000 LOGGER off on saving measurement results in instrument s logger memory e LOGGER STEP available values of the step with which the measurement results are saved in an instrument s logger 2 ms 1h e LOGGER NAME editing the name of the logger s MEASUREMENT RANGE range of the sound or vibration level measurements LOW e RMS HP 1 41 mm s 100 m s 31 6 mm s gt 141 m s in the case of vibration measurements e RMS 25 0 dB 126 6 dB PEAK 59 0 dB 129 6 dB sound measurements HIGH 3 4 G7 USER MANUAL e RMS HP 10 mm s 708 m s 316 mm s 1 km s in the case of vibration measurements e RMS 36 0 dB 143 6 dB PEAK 72 0 dB 146 6 dB sound measurements gt DOSIMETER SETUP sub list in DOSE METER mode path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION DOSE METER CRITERION LEVEL available values of the permitted steady state noise level 80 dB 84 dB 85 dB 90 dB THRESHOLD LEVEL available values of the noise threshold None 75 dB 80 dB 85 dB 90 dB EXCHA
232. R gt SETUP FILES LOGGER FILES selected to be deleted and the memory does not contain any file After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the LOGGER FILES entering is impossible In such case the message is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The similar data about the existing in the instrument logger files as in the DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW window are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES one pressing the ENTER push button In the first line the available still loggers memory is displayed followed by e The selected number of the logger s file and the number of all saved files FILE NO The name of the logger s file LOG FILE e The size of the logger file which name is displayed in the previous line LOG SIZE e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the first profile P 1 e The results saved if are present in the logger from the second profile P 2 e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the third profile P 3 The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the l
233. R FILTERS The PRINT USER FILTERS enables the user to print out the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument S1 S2 S3 L REPORT TITLE PRINT RESULTS PRIHT STATISTICS PRIHT FILE PRINT LOGGER a zib PRINT CATALOGUE TITLE PRINT RESULTS PRIHT FILE PRIHT LOGGER FRIHT USER FILTERS REPORT windows with the PRINT USER FILTERS selected in SM and in VM In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT USER FILTERS text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER After pressing the lt gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed 8 17 G7 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The selection of the USER FILTER is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons oa oa oa PRINT U FILTEES PRIHT U FILTERS PRINT U FILTERS PRINT USER FILTERS windows the user filter selection The contents of the selected file is sent out to the attached printer or to a PC after pressing the ENTER push button The following message is displayed on the display during the printing U FILTERS Printing Display in the REPORT list the e
234. RE TIME EXPOSURE TIME EXPOSURE TIME windows 9 6 Setting parameters of the Ext I O port EXTERNAL I O SETUP The EXTERNAL I O SETUP enables the user to select the available functionality of the Ext I O port In order to enter the window the user has to select the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt gt one SETUP list the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text highlighted In order to select a value in a position of the sub list the lt lt gt lt gt gt should be pressed The position of the sub list is changed after pressing the lt A gt v push buttons In order to confirm 9 7 G7 USER MANUAL the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored 9 6 1 Mode selection of the Ext I O port MODE In the MODE it is possible to select the function of the instrument s socket named as Ext I O This socket can be used as e the output of the analogue signal ANALOG OUT transmitted from the input of the instrument to its output without any digital processing i e filtering e the input of the digital signal used as an external trigger to start the measurements DIGITAL IN in the slave instrument the digital output DIGITAL OUT used for triggering other slave instrume
235. RIGGER LEUEL oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEVEL RMS lt L gt oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL TRIGGER LEWEL RHEC 12 Finis Iz TRIGGER LEUEL RHEC 12 dB LEVEL RMSe 12 B First B LOGGER TRIGGER windows with LEVEL selection in vibration mode 1 dB step up cont Notice The LEVEL value of the triggering signal in logger refers to the instantaneous value of the RMS result from the first profile calculated during the period depending on selected DETECTOR path MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 DETECTOR LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL Ll LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL L1 LOGGER TRIGGER Shean oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL RHEX 12 Bihl Shean TRIGGER LEWEL RES 1 lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt 5 18 GF USER MANUAL oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEUEL RMS 13 B Fire B farai LEUEL RHECI B MEES B ao LOGGER TRIGGER LEUEL LEUEL RMS I Pirate B LOGGER TRIGGER LEVEL RMSCID ET amp 8 first LEUEL RHEC I B Fire B TRIGGER oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL LEWEL LEVEL LEWEL LEWEL RHE CI ae 12 EFC AMES B Anges Anges B gt LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 10 dB step up in vibration mode 5 4 2 4 Selection of the number of the results to be saved in the logger bef
236. Result 1 6 RMS value in the 1 profile 11 Result 1 7 VDV value in the 15 profile 12 Result 1 8 reserved 13 Result 1 9 reserved 14 Result 1 10 reserved 15 Result 1 11 reserved 16 UnderRes 1 underrange value in the 1s profile 17 Oxmm08 08 id mm sub block s length 18 19 OVL overload time 20 Result 2 1 PEAK value in the 27 profile 21 Result 2 2 value in the 27 profile 22 Result 2 3 maximal value MAX in the p profile 23 Result 2 4 minimal value MIN in the profile 24 Result 2 5 SPL value in the 2 profile 25 Result 2 6 RMS value in the 2 profile 26 Result 2 7 VDV value in the 274 profile 27 Result 2 8 reserved 28 Result 2 9 reserved 29 Result 2 10 reserved 30 Result 2 11 reserved 31 UnderRes 2 underrange value in the 2 profile 32 Oxmm08 08 id mm sub block s length 33 34 Reserved reserved 35 Result 3 1 PEAK value in the 3 profile 36 Result 3 2 value in the 3 profile 37 Result 3 3 maximal value MAX in the ee profile 38 Result 3 4 minimal value MIN in the 3 profile 39 Result 3 5 SPL value in the 3 profile 40 Result 3 6 RMS value in the 3 profile 41 Result 3 7 VDV value in the 3 profile 42 Result 3 8 reserved G7 USER MANUAL 43 Result 3 9 reserved 44 Result 3 10 reserved 45 Result 3 11 reserved 46 UnderRes 3 underrange value in the 3 profile Table B 1 11 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results
237. S C 1 C 1 Specification of G7 as sound level meter C 1 C 2 Specification of G7 as 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT sound analyser C 26 Specification of G7 as vibration level meter C 28 G7 USER MANUAL vi C4 Miscellaneous specification of G7 DEFINITIONS AND FILTER CHARACTERISTICS D 1 Definitions and formulae D 1 1 Basic symbols and notation D 1 2 Definitions of the quantities measured in sound modes D 1 3 Definitions of the results measured in dosimeter mode D 1 4 Definitions of the quantities measured in vibration modes D 2 Frequency characteristics of the implemented digital filters D 2 1 Digital weighting filters implemented in sound modes D 2 2 Digital weighting filters implemented in vibration modes D 2 3 Digital HP filter implemented in 1 1 amp 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT analysis D 2 4 Digital 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters implemented in the G7 32 D 1 D 1 D 1 D 2 D 6 D 8 D 9 D 9 D 14 D 28 D 28 G7 USER MANUAL LIST OF FIGURES Control push buttons of the G7 instrument sss nennen eene tnnt 2 1 Display with the MARKERS after pressing ALT and lt SHIFT gt togetheT serene 2 5 Displays with the activated markets epit here rt iere eee t eats eei ETRE ARKONES e 2 5 Time history plot with the indication of the active Markers 4 2 5 Top cover of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale 4 2 6 Bottom cover of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale sss eren eene
238. S1 START A 19 G7 USER MANUAL Extended IO Mode Extended IO Function Xx0 ANALOG OUT Xx1 DIGITAL IN Xx2 DIGITAL OUT Extended IO Active Level Xz0 TRIGGER PULSE Xz1 ALARM PULSE Extended IO Source Xc0 LOW Xc1 HIGH Extended IO Alarm Level Xs3 PEAK 1 Xs4 SPL 1 Xs5 LEQ 1 Reference Level ACC Xnxxxx xxxx alarm level in dB multiple by 10 300 1400 Reference Level VEL Reference Level DIL Xannn nnn reference level e 1 100 in um s Xvnnn nnn reference level e 1 100 in nm s Xdnnn nnn reference level 1 100 in pm Auto Save switched off XA1 switched on N RAM File XRO switched off XR1 switched V Save Statistics XSO0 switched off XS1 switched on N Save Max Spectrum XMO switched off XM1 switched V Save Min Spectrum V Xm1 switched on INT 1 INT J INT J INT 0 switched off INT 1 INT INT Number of records taken into account before the fulfilment of the triggering condition TriggerPre A 20 Replace File switched off P XP1 switched on XDO switched off XD1 switched on V switched off Ben Xr switched RPM Pulse Xpnnn nnn pulse rot e
239. SB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT RESULT text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt v lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one TITLE PRINT STATISTICS PRIHT FILE PRIHT LOGGER a PRINT USER FILTERS TITLE PRINT FILE PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS b PRINT CATALOGUE 7 REPORT windows with the PRINT RESULTS selected in SM a and VM b After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when a measurement was already performed and a result is available the message presented below is displayed n FRIHT RESULTS printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT RESULTS When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data The exemplary report printed in 5 format path MENU REPORT OPTION FORMAT A5 with the TITLE 13MAR path MENU REPORT TITLE 13MAR looks as follows C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 03 v6 06 6 06 2 1244 53 TITLE Suina S
240. SKIP PRESS ANY KEY Display after the execution of MOVE FILES TO USB operation a and when the file already exists in the USB memory b A Notice After the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation files which have been moved do not exist in the internal instrument s memory any 7 43 G7 USER MANUAL 8 REPORTS PRINTING REPORT The printed reports of the sound or vibration measurement results in the predefined format can be obtained by means of the REPORT list In order to open the REPORT list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons the REPORT text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Display in the main list the REPORT text highlighted displayed inversely In order to obtain the report the user has to connect the instrument to the printers RS 232 port using the SV 55 RS 232 interface This hardware interface is hidden in the Cannon type 9 pin RS 232 plug in On the other end of the SV 55 interface which itself looks like a cable there is the USB Host plug in This plug in should be placed in the USB Host socket of the instrument It is also possible to connect the instrument to the USB port of a PC using the proper cable Measurement results can be easy downloaded to any PC using USB interface and SvanPC software and printed out on the printer attached to a PC
241. SKIP DIRECT SRUE A SH 3 Delete Insert PRESS ANY KEY 7 LOAD SETUP SAVE SETUP AVE SETUP FILE FILE HRHE LEL MG FILE HRHMEsLEU MH DELETE RLL HU NI SRUE LEU H1 DEFRAGMENTATION Saved CATALOGUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE FREE SPACE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY SETUP Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data All changes introduced to the setup file name during the edition are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE option was entered The return after the edition to the line with the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text is possible after pressing the v push button The simplified edition consists in the addition at the end of the file name the natural number The increase by one of the number is made automatically After the saving operation execution the new setup file name is displayed and the instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT In the next attempt of saving data the new name is displayed in the FILE NAME line and that name is increased by one during the saving operation LEU HZ Saved Ll SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE LEN FILE 1 LEU H1 SAWE HEAT S
242. T PORT USER FILTERS SETUP list the WARNINGS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 22 1 Saving the measurement results in a file RESULTS NOT SAVED In order to switch on the displaying of the message the user has to place by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the special character in the warning s position The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or ESC push button ignoring a change made the position oa oa HARNINGS HARNINGS RESULTS HOT SAVED WE RESULTS HOT SAVED RA USB DISK FREE SF 4 DISK FREE SFP w FREE SPACE 32MB MIM FREE SPACE 32MB WARNINGS windows RESULTS NOT SAVED selected When the position is set to be active the special warning can be displayed after pressing the START STOP push button It will be happened in a case when the result of the previous measurement was not saved in a file of the instrument LAST RESULTS LAST RESULTS NOT SAVED NOT SAVED Continue Continue Displays with LAST RESULTS NOT SAVE warning The question Continue appears with the warning message The default value of the CONTINUE position is SAVE NEXT After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument saves last results with the name number increased by one Using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons one can change the value of
243. TER A DETECTOR FAST LOGGER PEAK v LOGGER MAX v LOGGER MIN v LOGGER RMS 421 n PROFILEC2 FILTER C DETECTOR FRST LOGGER PERK LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN 1 INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP TRIGGER LEVEL SOURCE RMSCDD 19048 n 2n TRIGGER SETUP RECORDER TRIGGER MERSURE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRI OGGER ies Control diagram of the INPUT list in the LEVEL METER mode 2 G7 USER MANUAL DISPLAY one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button gt DISPLAY MODES sub list it enables the user to activate N or switch off 1 the available modes of result s presentation SPECTRUM available values V or this position is active only for 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT mode 3 PROFILES available values N or 1 STATISTICS available values N or LOGGER available values V or FILE INFO available values V or gt DISPLAY SETUP sub list DISPLAY SCALE e SCALE available values o LIN LOG in the case of vibration measurements o LOG in the case of sound measurements e DYNAMIC available values of the dynamics of graphical modes of the result s presentation 80dB 40dB 20dB 10dB e 7 it informs the user about the multiplier for the horizontal axis of the graphical modes of the result s presentation available values 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x e GRID available values or V e AUTOSCALE available v
244. TERNAL USB FLASH DISK Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation with the USB HOST and memory stick connected Notice The connection to the USB Host socket the USB disk switches off the instrument s internal flash memory Only copying and moving the files to the USB stick is possible All file functions and remote commands are redirected to the USB disk The internal flash memory is activated after disconnecting the USB disk from the instrument Notice The disconnection of the USB disk during the data transmission can cause the lost of data saved in the USB disk as well as in the instrument s internal flash memory 3 30 GF USER MANUAL 4 FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT FUNCTION In order to select the FUNCTION list one has to press the MENU push button select by means of the A v or lt lt lt gt gt push buttons the FUNCTION text and press the ENTER The FUNCTION list contains three elements MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION and CALIBRATION The list is closed and the instrument returns to the presentation mode after pressing the lt ESC gt push button HEHU a FUNCTION a a FUNCTION FUNCTION MODE MEASUREMENT FUHCTIOH CALIERATIOH CRL IBERTIDOH b c d Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a and the FUNCTION list opened the MODE selected b the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected c and the CALIBRATION selected d MODE PETENTE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CA
245. TIME EXTERHRL 170 SETUP UTDOOR RIRPO EXTENSION CABLE SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the DIFFUSE FIELD filter G7 USER MANUAL dB dB 4 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 eer aa 0 0 0 9 500 630 800 1k 1 25k1 k 2k 25k 3 15k 4k Sk 6 Sk 10k 12 5k 16k 20k Hz 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 Of 0 6 0 9 1 3 1 8 24 29 3 1 3 1 2 7 dB Frequency characteristics of the DIFFUSE FIELD filter implemented the instrument The ENVIRONMENTAL filter is set in MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER OUTDOOR ENVIRON position OMPENS FILTER orf gt lt ENTER gt gt FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR ENUIRDHN OUTDOOR AIRPORT ERTEHSIUH CABLE COMPEHSHTIOM FILTER DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL filter dB 8 0 8 0 2 8 RE 7 0 6 0 6 0 5 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 3 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 500 630 800 0 9 0 1 0 1 lk 1 256 1 6k 2k 2 5k 3 15k 4k 3 9 4 0065 LU 1 5 2 3 32 3 4 6 amp U 70 3 6 3 6 4 dB 5k 6 3k 8k 10k 12 5k i6k 20k Hz D 13 G7 USER MANUAL Frequency characteristics of the ENVIRONMENTAL filter implemented in the instrument The AIRPORT filter set in MENU SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER OUTDOOR AIRPORT position off FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIE
246. TRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO D 8h Fast A 0 Profileci3 Fast 0 D 1 19 Ltn3 Fast 55 3 dB Profileci3 PERK 13 5 ap 1 10 SPL Fast 99 3 Frafileri Switching on off spectrum view SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM position is accesible only in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT function path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION The possibility of the measurement results presentation in SPECTRUM can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the SPECTRUM text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored DISPLAY MODES ECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER FILE INFO SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO DISPLAY MODES windows in VM Lav Fast A 50 Profileci3 E 8h Fast 0 00 P h 1 19 ES Lins Fast 55 3 dB Frafileci MAX Fast 55 3 dB Frafilecl ES 16127 G7 05 MANUAL Displays in SPECTRUM mode for 1 1 OCTAVE a 1 3 OCTAVE b and FFT c 6 1 2 Switching on off three profiles view 3 PROFILES The possibility of the measurem
247. TS 9 17 Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE 9 17 1 SHIFT ALT push button working mode selection SHIFT 9 17 2 lt START STOP push button working mode selection ST SP 9 17 3Setting ten statistical levels STATISTICAL LEVELS 9 18 Programming the instrument s internal timer TIMER 9 18 1 Selecting the mode of the timer function MODE 9 18 2Setting day of the instrument s switch on START DAY 9 18 3Setting hour of the instrument s switch on START HOUR 9 1 9 2 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 11 9 11 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 13 9 13 9 14 9 14 9 14 9 15 9 15 9 16 9 16 9 17 9 17 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 18 9 19 9 19 9 20 9 20 9 21 9 21 9 22 9 22 9 23 9 23 G7 USER MANUAL 9 18 4Selecting the start hours for four irregular automatic measurements TIMEx 9 24 9 18 5Selecting the period between two consecutive measurements REPETITION 9 24 9 18 6Description of the exemplary timer function execution 9 24 9 19 Selection the USB HOST port functionality USB HOST PORT 9 25 9 20 Setting the coefficients of the user filters USER FILTERS 9 28 9 20 1Setting filter coefficients for octave analysis SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS 9 28 9 21 Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION UNITS 9 31 9 22 Warnings selection WARNINGS 9 32 9 22 1Saving the measurement results in a file RESULTS NOT SAVED 9 32 9 22 2Checking free space on the USB disk USB DISK FREE SP 9 32 9 22 3Minimum USB
248. TY CAL FACTOR CAL FACTOR C 68 806 C 68 a Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor b A Notice The calibration factor is always added to the results of measurements and analysis 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT etc 4 3 2 Calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of vibration signal The calibration by the accelerometer s sensitivity introduction can be conducted in the following Way 1 Select this type of the calibration highlight the BY SENSITIVITY text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the ENTER push button oa oa CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY 1a gml ms E BY SUREM LAST CALIBRATION TEDS Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode A Notice It is not possible to calibrate the instrument during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists and sub lists but the positions in these lists are not displayed inversely and so not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the sensitivity the measurement must be finished BY SEHSITIUITY SENSITIVITY 4 4 G7 USER MANUAL Displays with the SENSITIVITY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible 2 Set th
249. The CLEAR position enables the user to clear the values of the user coefficients of octave or third octave filters It is possible to clear all sets of coefficients ALL to clear the first set S1 to clear the second set S2 to clear the third one S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface a SPECTRUM BASED VIEW EDIT 9 30 G7 USER MANUAL SPECTRUM BASED FILTER window the CLEAR position selected In order to enter the sub list the user has to select in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list the CLEAR text using the A v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER The selection of the position in this sub list is performed by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The coefficients of a set or sets are cleared after the selection of the proper text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and after pressing the ENTER one n n CLERE CLERE E CLEAR windows the selection of the filters to be cleared n CLEAR After this the WAIT text appears on the display and the instrument returns to the SPECTRUM BASED window The CLEAR sub list is also closed and the instrument returns to the SPECTRUM BASED window after pressing the lt ESC gt push button without taking any action L SPECTRUM BASED EDIT Displays during and after the execution of CLEAR operation 9 21 Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION U
250. This push button enables one to break the measurement process temporarily The subsequent pressing of the lt PAUSE gt push button deletes the measurement results from the last one second The indicator of the measurement time is counted down after each pressing and the measurement result from the previous second appears on the display Up to fifteen last seconds of the measurement can be cancelled in this way lt lt gt lt gt gt These push buttons enable one in particular to e select the options in an active position in the horizontal direction e g filter Z A or C Integration period 1s 2s 3s etc e select the measurement result to be displayed e g PEAK MAX MIN etc in one profile and 3 PROFILES modes of result s presentation e control the cursor in LOGGER and STATISTICS modes of result s presentation select the position of the character in the text edition i e in the FILE NAME menu e switch on off the BACKLIGHT of the display lt gt lt gt gt pressed together e activate markers 2 and 3 lt lt gt lt gt gt The lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed in conjunction or in sequence with the lt SHIFT gt enable one in particular to e speed up the changing of the numerical values of the parameters i e the step is increased from 1 to 10 in the setting of START DELAY path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP STAHT DELAY e insert or delete a character in the text edit
251. ULT FILES LOGGER FILES a DELETE ALL RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES 1 Press ENTER to DELETE n DELETE ALL RESULT FILES 1 LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES 1 Press ENTER to DELETE G7 USER MANUAL a FILES DEFRAGMENTATION unnecessar PRESS RNY KEV DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION F RC FILES FREE SPRCE LABLE 16247414 bytes SPACE 15366450 bytes Pres R to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP ress UP to EDIT n LORD SETUP NO FILES Control diagram of the FILE list 2 REPORT of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button to use option from this list the instrument has to be connected to RS232 or to a PC connected to a printer gt TITLE it enables the user to give the header to the printed report PRINT RESULTS it enables the user to print measurement results on the attached printer the No results text is displayed in the case when there is no results to be printed PRINT STATISTICS it enables the user to print the results of the statistical analysis the No results text is displayed in the case when there is no results to be printed gt PRINT FILE it enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the selected file with the measurement results the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the file memory is empty PRINT LOGGER it enables the user to print out on
252. URCE RMSrCIS SOURCE RMSCIS EVEL Sis mise VEL EEA LELEL z LEVEL b RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in vibration mode level expressed in linear units 1 dB step up a and 10 dB step up b a oa a a RECORDER TRIGGER RECOREDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE RMSCIO Ea ER 1 SLOPE RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in sound and vibration mode 10 dB step up 5 4 3 4 Setting the speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT GRADIENT appears on the display when in the TRIGGER position the GRAD option is selected In the GRADIENT position it is possible to select the GRADIENT value The available values are from 1 dB ms to 100 dB ms The selection is made by pressing lt gt gt push buttons and ENTER one 5 22 G7 USER MANUAL The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button a L1 Ll oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER GRAD SOURCE LEUEL BRRDIEHT TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER SOURCE 1 RHSCIA SOURCE 1 RHSCIA SOURCE LEVEL 1 1274 LEUEL OlordB LEUEL BRRDIEHT BRRDIEHT BRRDIEHT oa oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER GRAD GRAD GRAD GRAD RHECIA RHECIA 5412 RHECIA ol2TdB 127dB 27 127dB GRADIENT GRADIENT GR
253. VEL In the VEL position the user can set the reference level of the velocity signal It is possible to set this level from 1 nms to 100 nms with 1 nms step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be increased to 10 nms pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored 9 12 G7 USER MANUAL L a a REFERENCE LEUELS RFEFEREHCE LEUELS REFEREHCE LEVELS ACC 1 umis ACC 1 umis UEL BECKER UEL BIL 1 pm ACC 1 meg UEL BIL 1 pm BIL 1 pm REFERENCE LEVEL windows setting the reference level of velocity signal 9 9 3 Setting the reference level of the displacement signal DIL In the DIL position the user can set the reference level of the displacement signal It is possible to set this level from 1 pm to 100 pm with 1 pm step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be increased to 10 pm pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the ESC push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored
254. W SOURCE LEGQ 13 ALARM LEVEL ERS oa EXT I SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT FuHCTIOH ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL LOW SOURCE 12 RLRRM LEUEL FUMCTION ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL LOW SOURCE LEGCI IS ALARM LEVEL a EXT SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT FUHCTIQH ALARM PULSE EXT SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT FUHCTIQH ALARM PULSE G7 USER MANUAL L I 0 SETUP I SETUP DIGITAL OUT IM DIGITAL OUT OURC ALARM LEVEL EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ALARM LEVEL setting 9 7 Activation of human vibration filters HUMAN VIB FILT In the HUMAN VIBR FILT it is possible to activate the human vibration filters Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb which are not included in the standard set of the instrument This option can be bought together with the instrument or can be purchased by the user in the future In the latter case after selecting the HUMAN FILT text in the SETUP list in vibration mode using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing lt ENTER gt the user has to introduce special code for activation of the function After successful activation the HUMAN VIBRATION filters this text does not appear on the SETUP list any more and the instrument never more asks for the code SETUP CLEAR SETUP EXTERMAL 1 0 SETUP IEPE CURREHT REFEREHCE LEWELS REMOTE SETUP list the HUM
255. Y SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LOGGER WIEW LOGGER UTER DISPLAY SETUP windows the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted 6 20 G7 USER MANUAL 6 2 5 1 Selecting the shape of the graphical presentation VIEW oa oa oa LOGGER VIEW LOGGER VIEH LOGGER VIEW UIEM TIME RERL TIME REAL TIME TIME REAL TIME LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the VIEW parameter The VIEW enables the user to select the shape of the graphical mode presentation Three different views are available which are called as NORMAL FULL and EXTENDED The selection is made by means of lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation The user achieve the same effect after pressing the ALT and lt A gt or the ALT and v push buttons Displays with the possible values of the VIEW parameter 6 2 5 2 Setting the time to be presented TIME oa oa LOGGER VIEW LOGGER VIEW EXTEHDED EXTEHDED TIME TIME ESS LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the TIME parameter The TIME enables the user to select the time to be presented with the logger s file results The REAL TIME selection means that on the display the real time is visible while AVAILABLE TIME means that time after which the loggers memory will be filled up by the current measurement result is given there The selection is made using the lt lt gt lt
256. a RANGE Max Peak value LOW 123 dB weighting LOW 123 dB C weighting LOW 123 dB 2 weighting HIGH 140 dB weighting HIGH 140 dB C weighting HIGH 140 dB Z weighting Notice For the signals with the crest factor n 1 41 upper measuring range of the RMS LEQ and SPL is reduced The valid upper limit can be calculated according to the below given formula 137 20 log n 42 where A is the upper limit for the sinusoidal signal Example For the crest factor n 10 the upper limitis 120 dB Measuring frequency range of the acoustic pressure 3 dB 10 Hz 20 000 Hz Basic measurement error of the acoustic pressure 0 7 dB measured for reference conditions see below Weighting filters see appendix D 7 meeting requirements of the IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 Z filter A meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 filter e C meeting requirements of the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standard for the Type 1 C filter Special filter Diffuse field compensation filter filter changing the complete instrument acoustic frequency response in the diffuse acoustic field Self generated noise measured with the microphone equivalent impedance 18 pF Z weighting lt 11 VRMS e A weighting lt 6 IVRMS C 3 G7 USER MANUAL e C weighting lt 6 IVRMS RMS detector e Digital True RMS with
257. a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger the NO LOGGERS text is displayed in the case when the instrument did not perform any measurement and the logger is empty this function is currently under development and FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the display gt PRINT USER FILTERS it enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument S1 S2 S3 PRINT CATALOGUE it enables the user to print the catalogue of the files stored in the instrument s memory OPTIONS FORMAT available values 4 A5 EJECT P available values None Prompt Auto 3 15 G7 USER MANUAL Hotell N PRINT STATISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS SH Delete SH Insert a m a PRINT RESULTS PRINT RESULTS tau PRESS ANY KEY N PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS a a 5 PRINT STATISTICS PRINT STRTISTICS No results 55 OGGER PRINT USER FILTERS TITLE PRINT RESULTS NT STRTIST n PRINT FILE printing PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS n LOG FILE L printing RECORDS 16 a PRINT U FILTERS printing a PRINT CATALOGUE PRINT CATALOGUE TIME OUT PRESS RNY KEV PRINT STRTISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT R FILT US
258. ab B 1 1 the unit and internal software specification cf Tab B 1 2 the user s text a header stored together with the measurement data cf Tab B 1 3 the parameters and global settings common for all profiles cf Tab B 1 4 SLM and Tab B 1 4 VLM the parameters for measurement trigger cf Tab B 1 5 the parameters for logger trigger cf Tab B 1 6 the parameters for recorder trigger cf Tab B 1 7 the Extended I O settings cf Tab B 1 8 the special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM and Tab B 1 9 VLM the marker for the end of the file cf Tab B 1 27 The other elements of the file structure are not obligatory for each file type stated above They depend on the file type or SLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT RT60 file from the logger These elements are as follows the main results cf Tab B 1 10 SLM Tab B 1 10 DM and Tab B 1 10 VLM the results coming from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis cf Tab B 1 11 the results coming from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis cf Tab B 1 12 the header of the FFT analysis cf Tab B 1 13 the results of the FFT analysis cf Tab B 1 14 statistical levels cf Tab B 1 15 the header of the statistical analysis cf Tab B 1 16 the results of the statistical analysis cf Tab B 1 17 the header of the statistical analysis performed in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis cf Tab B 1 18 the results of the statistical analysis made in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis cf Tab
259. able after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and while the L99 after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons lt lt gt lt SHIFT gt Results shown in the second presentation mode the selection of the statistical level The change of the presentation mode is done by pressing the lt ALT gt and lt A gt or the lt ALT gt and v push buttons The second presentation mode of statistical levels differ slightly from the first one the description on the left side is shorter but on the right side the value of the statistical levels are shown lt A gt lt ALT gt lt V gt lt ALT gt lt lt gt lt ALT gt Results shown in both presentation modes of statistical levels the change of the mode D 1 3 Definitions of the results measured in dosimeter mode DOSE result The DOSE result is the quantity of noise received by the worker expressed as the percentage of the whole day acceptable value This result is calculated from the formula Ly t L T pose 10 10 a dt 8h 0 T D 8h result The D 8h result is the quantity of noise received by the worker during 8 hours This result is calculated from the formula D 6 G7 USER MANUAL LAV result The LAV result is the average level of the acoustic pressure for the given time period of the measurement This result is calculated from the formula 1 La t m 4 LAV q log 19 dt In the case of Q the exchange rate equ
260. al to 3 the LAV result has the same value as LEQ if the EXPONENTIAL option is selected in the RMS INTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION TLAV result The TLAV result is the average level of the acoustic pressure of the measurement This result is calculated from the formula T Lat LAV q log 10 dt 0 SEL8 result The SEL8 result is the SEL result corresponding to the integration time equal to 8 hours 5 8 result is calculated on the base of the LEQ according to the formula SEL8 LEQ 10 log 18 is 15 PSEL result The PSEL result individual Sound Exposure Level to the noise is equal to the standing sound level in a measurement period The PSEL result is calculated on the base of the LEQ according to the formula PSEL LEQ 10 log Teh E result The E result Exposition represents the amount of the acoustical energy received by the worker and it is expressed in the linear units Pafh The E value is calculated according to the formula LEQ Ts 2 10 10 3600 P E 8h result The E_8h result Exposition in 8 hours represents the amount of the acoustical energy received by the worker during 8 hours The E_8h value is calculated according to the formula LEQ E 8h e8 h p2 10 1 The E 8h result is expressed in the linear units Pa h D 7 G7 USER MANUAL D 1 4 Definitions of the quantities measured in vibration mode PEAK value The PEAK value is calculated fo
261. alues or N SPECTRUM VIEW in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis e VIEW available spectrum views NORMAL FULL EXTENDED e TYPE available types of spectrum views AVERAGED INSTANTANEOUS MAX MIN e position is accessible if in TYPE position AVERAGED or INSTANTANEOUS were selected available values or N e MIN position is accessible if in TYPE position AVERAGED INSTANTANEOUS were selected available values or N SPECTRUM TYPE available spectrum types in the case of vibration only ACCELERATION VELOCITY DISPLACEMENT TOTAL VALUES in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE vibration analysis e TOTAL 1 available positions in the case of vibration measurements o FILTER available values Z S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than Z available values ACC VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB e TOTAL 2 available positions o FILTER available values PR 2 S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than PR 2 available values ACC VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB e TOTAL 3 available positions o FILTER available values PR 3 S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than PR 3 available values ACC VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB TOTAL VALUES in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE sound analysis TOTAL 1 available values A S1 S2 S
262. an be purchased by the user in the future In the latter case after selecting On value the user has to introduce special code activating the functionality After successful activation the logger remains available and the instrument never more asks for the code VALID CODE HEnSUR SETUP _ START DELAY 154 IHTEBR PERIOD is REP CYCLE Inf LOGGER L GBER STEF is LOGGER 0512 ENTER CODE 411 L ENTER CODE a SH Delete SH gt Insert SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during setting the LOGGER STEP available values a sequence 1 2 5 5 1 5 Setting time period between two writings to the logger s file LOGGER STEP The LOGGER STEP defines the period of the data logging in a file It can be set from 2ms to 1 s in 1 2 5 sequence the values from 1 second to 59 seconds the values from 1 minute to 59 minute and 1 hour The required parameter can be set by means of the lt gt gt push buttons with the single step and by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt with the incremented one The selection is accepted by the ENTER one which closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window Any changes are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button L L HEnSUR SETUP MERSUR SETUP SETUP MERSUR SETUP START DELAY 154 START pELRv DELAY 154 IHTEBR PERIOD
263. analysis on the attached printer This position is not accessible for the vibration measurements In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT STATISTICS text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt v2 lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER OGGER USER FILTERS REPORT window with the PRINT STATISTICS selected After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress After pressing the ENTER push button in the case when a measurement was already performed and a result is available the message is displayed n PRINT STATISTICS Printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT STATISTICS When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer or PC The instrument returns to the REPORT list when all data are transferred but if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P path MENU REPORT OPTIONS EJECT P the confirmation question is displayed after the printing The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the
264. and EXPONENTIAL The required parameter can be selected by means of the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the lt ENTER gt with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring a change made the position 9 14 G7 USER MANUAL oa oa RMS INTEGRATION RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR L 1 LINEAR 1 EXPONENTIAL EXP HEHTIHL Displays and with the available options of the RMS INTEGRATION The formulae used for the LEQ calculation are given in Appendix D Setting LINEAR is required for getting the true RMS value of the measured signal When this option is selected in sound mode the value of the LEQ Lden LEPd Lxx and SEL functions do not depend on the detector time constant Fast Slow or Impulse the results are displayed without the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles In this case the indicator Lin or L is displayed in the different modes of the result presentation When this option is selected in vibration mode the value of the RMS function do not depend on the detector time constant 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s Setting EXPONENTIAL enables the user to fulfil the requirements of another standard for the LEQ measurements When this option is selected in sound mode the value of the LEQ Lden LEPd Lxx and SEL function depends on the detector time cons
265. and the instrument returns to the SAVE SETUP window MEASUREMENT PROGRESS L SAVE SETUP FILE META NN Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation the return to the SAVE SETUP A Notice During the execution of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function an additional window is displayed informing about the operation performed This window can be unnoticed by the user as it appears for the short time oa SAVE SETUP ap ILE FILE SEES SETH DELETE SET1 SET1 DEFRAGMENTATION Saving Saved FREES SPREE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY SETUP View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation As it was already written it is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE is not active path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE The presented below sequence of displays illustrates the situation when during the name edition process the user selected the name that was used before but this time the REPLACE is active The setup file is overwritten the instrument displays a special message and waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list SAVE SETUP S
266. ange Range 1 LOW 2 HIGH UnitFlags calibration flags repetition cycle RepCycle 0 infinity nnnn number of repetitions 1 1000 NofProf number of profiles 3 StartDelay start bs specified in seconds IntTimeSec integration time specified in seconds Reserved reserved Leqint detector type in the RMS function 0 LINEAR 1 EXPONENTIAL SpectrumFilter 1 1 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis filter 0 Z SpectrumBuff 1 1 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT logger 0 off 1 on in other cases G7 USER MANUAL reserved reserved RefLev a reference level for acceleration given in ums e 1 100 RefLev v reference level for velocity given nms e 1 100 RefLev d reference level for displacement given in pm e 1 100 last calibration type Calibr Type 0 none 1 by measurement 2 by sensitivity CalibrDate last calibration date CalibrTime last calibration time RPM measure ee 0 off 1 on RPM pulse RPM Pulse 1 360 reserved reserved reserved voltage input Voltagelnput 0 off 1 on m 0 1 5mA HighCurrentlEPE 1 45mA reserved Table B 1 5 MEASURE TRIGGER parameters werd Name Comment number Oxnn2B 2B id nn block s length trigger mode 0 OFF 1 SLOPE TriggerMode 2 SLOPE 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 6 GRAD
267. are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt 5 gt push button In the case the timer function is active SINGLE REGULAR or IRREGULAR the clock icon starts blinking up to switching timer function off or up to finishing programmed measurements L TIMER TIMER TIMER MODE MODE BREEN MODE SEEN START DAY Hi START DAY Hi START HOUR START HOUR REPETITION 12 5 66 68 J bo oo 1 TIMER windows the mode selection 9 18 2 Setting day of the instrument s switch on START DAY The START DAY determines the date of the measurement start The timer can be programmed up to one month ahead and during the date setting the current state of the Real Time Clock is taken into account The required date can be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the START DAY text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the ESC push button TIMER TIMER 1i SINGLE 1i SINGLE REGULAR REGULAR START DAY FEB START DAY X FEB START DAY MAR START DAY MAR START HOUR START HOUR START HOUR START HOUR REPETITION 12 68 REPETITION
268. ation mode 5 4 2 2 Selection of the triggering signal in logger SOURCE It is assumed that only one measured result can be used as a source of the triggering signal in the logger namely the output signal from the RMS detector coming from the first profile which is denoted here as RMS 1 This position does not become active it is not displayed inversely and the text stated here remains unchanged After pressing the v push button the SOURCE line is skipped oa oa LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER 1 LEWEL LEUEL E POST 5 17 G7 USER MANUAL LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the not active SOURCE signal line in vibration mode 5 4 2 3 Setting the level of the triggering signal in the logger LEVEL The level of the triggering signal in logger LEVEL can be set in sound mode in 1 dB step or 10 dB steps from 24 dB to 136 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push bujtons or with lt SHIFT gt In vibration mode the step is equal to 1 dB or 10 dB from 1 00 mm s to 10 0 km s LEUEL RHECIS B Sheer B Sheer TRIGGER LEUEL RMS 12 B MES B LEUEL RMS B MES B LEUEL RHEC I MEES B oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL RHEC 12 B Bihl Shaan TRIGGER LEUEL RMS 12 Fire B LEUEL RMS i3 11 2 mis Pirate s Bir TRIGGER LEWEL RMS i3 et aise B B TRIGGER LEUEL RMSE 1 2608 T
269. available values of calibration level o 100 52 1 52 the case of vibration measurements or 100 dB 180 dB if the reference level was set to 1 hm s and the LOGARITHM scale was selected in the DISPLAY SCALE sub list 54dB 134 dB in the case of sound measurements e CAL FACTOR it displays calculated calibration factor after the measurement LAST CALIBRATION it enables the user to view the last calibration records TEDS automatical reading of the transducer parameters by the instrument this function will be available soon NO DATA AVAILABLE message appears on the display 3 3 G7 USER MANUAL FUNCTION TC MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CALIBRATION FUNCTION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CALIBRATION EHTER CODE SH Delete SH Insert a FUNCTION BY SENSITIVITY FUNCTION CALIBRATION MODE MODE SENSITIUITY BENED MR RR RD MEASUREMENT FUNCTION EV MEASUREMENT CAL TERA IO ALTERATION LAST CALIBRATION n CALIBRATION Bv HERSUREHENT BY SENSITIVITY CAL LEVEL CAL FACTOR LAST CALIBRATION CAL i oa CALIBRATION LAST CALIBRATIO a gen D 1 librati LAST CALIBRATION 07 2987 19 41 22 5 B3 DEC 2006 19 40 48 24 NOU 2886 8 32 58 n LAST CHLIBRRTIUN CALIBRATION TEDS BY SENSITIVITY HO DATA AVAILABLE BY MEASUREMENT ALIBRATION Control diagram of the FUNCTION list IN
270. aved Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY UP to EDIT PRESS ANY Press ENTER to SRUE Displays in the simplified edition of the setup file name and saving operation execution The number can be changed from 1 to N The only limitation of the N value is the length of the file name which cannot be longer than 8 characters In the case when such limitation is achieved 7 37 G7 USER MANUAL and the instrument can not change automatically the file s name the only possibility is to edit new base file name Notice The files can be overwritten the use of the same file name without any warning if the REPLACE option is switched on path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE oa oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE LEW_METS FILE LEW_METS SAVE MERT LEU HET9 SAVE MERT LEU HET9 Saved D K SE d Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation As it was already written the instrument attempts to save a file after pressing the ENTER push button The saving is not possible in the case when the instrument is measuring the signal The special message is displayed for about 3 seconds in this case
271. ay Loa Fast A Fast Fast L30 Fast 51 U 49 0 Profileci3 E Frofilecl E Frofilecl E 1 19 os 19 os 19 Lao Fast L50 Fast A Leo Fast A L70 Fast A 47 6 2 47 2 ap 46 8 2 46 9 a Profileci3 ES Profileci3 Profileci3 iE Profileci3 gizo os 20 nai os 20 Lao Fast A L90 Fast 46 2 iB 15 8 iB Frofiletl Frofiletl Displays with the statistics made with exponential integration presented in one profile mode There is also possible to present differently the measurement data in one profile after pressing the ALT and A or ALT and v push buttons In this case the result is displayed with the biggest possible fonts The name of the result together with the units is given in the bottom line The current result from a selected profile is changed after pressing the lt gt gt or the push buttons The profile the results are coming from is changed after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and v but the profile s number is not visible on the display The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons When the statistics level Lxx is presented the another levels from the set of ten values are available after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The presentation mode is changed to 3 PROFILES STATISTICS and LOGGER o
272. b SHirDelete Insert a FILE list with the DIRECTORY text selected a and the DIRECTORY window opened b The FREE SPACE denotes the available free memory on the connected disk The DIR NO shows the number of the selected directory the 1s number and the number of the existing directories the 27 number In the case the directories do not exist these numbers are equal to zero The DIR NAME enables one to edit the directory name the 1 number or displays its name The help lines are placed at the display s bottom There are two ways of the current directory selection e the name edition in the DIR NAME line The default name consists of the day number and the month abbreviation The not existing directory will be created e the selection of the existing directory by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed in the line with the DIR NO text The name of the selected directory is displayed in the DIR NAME line The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the FILE list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but 7 40 G7 USER MANUAL the selection is not confirmed The selection of the directory is obligatory during the initialisation process In this case also the lt ESC gt push button confirms the settings D D D a DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY P FREE SPACE 62977 FREE
273. bels available levels are from 1 m s to 100 um s e VEL it enables the user to set the reference level of the velocity for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 nm s to 100 nm s e DIL it enables the user to set the reference level of the displacement for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 pm to 100 pm jn the case of sound measurements 20 HPa REMOTE COMMUNICATION TYPE available values OFF CONTINUOUS PACKET PACKET available values 64 1024 RMS INTEGRATION G7 USER MANUAL 3 18 RMS INTEGRATION available values of detector s type LINEAR or EXPONENTIAL RS232 BAUD RATE it enables the user to set the baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 TIME OUT it enables the user to set the time out 1 s 60 s RTC it enables the user to set the internal real time clock and date of the instrument RT60 AVERAGING AVERAGING available values On or Off AVERAGING CLEAR available values NO or YES AVERAGING NO set during the execution of the option RT60 OPTIONS SMOOTHING available values 0 1 15 NOISE MAR 0 0 dB 20 0 dB RT60 RESULTS the results of the RT60 given in the table with EDT E 20 2 and or T30 3 31 5Hz EV 2VI 1 1 10 0kHz ET 21 1 1 31 1 SHIFT MODE SHIFT available modes of the lt SHIFT gt push but
274. beration time results EDT RT20 RT30 will be presented in the visualization levels to each 1 3 octave band SHIFT MODE it enables the user to set the operating mode of the lt SHIFT gt and the START STOP push buttons 9 1 G7 USER MANUAL STATISTICAL LEVELS it enables the user to select ten statistic levels to be displayed in one profile and 3 PROFILES modes and saved in the files with the main results This position is taken off from the menu in the vibration meter mode TIMER it enables the user to set the Timer function USB HOST PORT it enables the user to select the available functionality of the USB Host port USER FILTERS it enables the user to select and set the correcting values for all real time and 1 1 and 1 3 octave filters VIBRATION UNITS it enables the user to select the vibration units in which the results of the measurements are to be given This position is taken off from the menu in the sound meter mode WARNINGS it enables the user to switch on or off the warnings that can be displayed during the operation of the instrument Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list In each available position any change is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt g
275. both statistic presentation modes during the measurements see 6 12 Setting on and off the accessibility of LOGGER presentation 6 13 Exemplary displays with the measurement results saved in the logger et 6 13 Setting on and off the file description presentation 6 13 Exemplary contents of the FILE INFO window et 6 13 G7 USER MANUAL DISPLAY list with the DISPLAY SETUP 6 14 DISPLAY SETUP windows in SLM in VLM b in FFT SM c and in 1 1 and 1 3 OCTAVE VM d 6 14 Displays with the possible options of the vibration SCALE pe 6 14 Measurement results VM presented in linear a and logarithmic b Scale 6 15 Displays with the possible values of the DYNAMIC parameter pp 6 15 Displays with the results stored in the logger presented with different DYNAMIC 6 15 DISPLAY SCALE windows the X ZOOM Selectign enne 6 15 Displays in 1 1 OCTAVE SPECTRUM 3x 4x and 5x X ZOOM sese 6 15 Displays in 1 3 OCTAVE SPECTRUM 2x 4x and 5x 20 6 16 Displays in FFT SPECTRUM Ix 2x 4 and 5x X ZOOM esses ennemi 6 16 Displays with the grid switched on and 2 4444 00000000000000000 6 16 Displays with the grid switched on and 2 4 01 0000001000000000 00000000
276. brate the instrument via the Harvest SPE Modems 7 CS This function clears current setup 7 DF 7 DF file_name 7 DF file_name lt address This function deletes all result files or deletes file specified by file_name or internal flash address 7 DS 7 DS file_name 7 DS file_name lt address This function deletes all setup files or deletes file specified by file_name or internal flash address 7 US This function returns unit subversion A 11 G7 USER MANUAL 7 BS This function returns battery state in percentage If the instrument is powered from the external power this function return 1 or if it is powered from the USB interface the function returns 2 7 DL This function returns day time limits in format 7 DL x 7 DL x This function enables x 1 or disables x 0 day time limits and returns the following sequence of characters 7 DL 7 SL This function returns all statistical levels in the format 7 SL sI1 sI2 sI3 sl4 sI5 sI6 sI7 sI8 sI9 sI10 7 SL sl_index sl_level This function sets statistical levels where sl index is the statistical index sl level is the statistical level and it returns the following sequence of characters 7 SL 7 MC This function returns microphone compensation in the format 7 MC x 7 MC xxx This function sets the microphone compensation and returns the following sequence of characters 7 MC where xxx means x 0 Off x 1 FREE FIELD
277. bration signal on the human It conforms to the BS 6841 1987 standard dE dE o o in 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 g0 80 90 950 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 16 0 92 64 128 256 1024 Hz 26 5 15 3 9 1 8 3 7 6 1 0 0 2 1 8 6 3 12 6 23 5 40 3 58 4 Characteristics of the Wg digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM D 26 G7 USER MANUAL The filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body It conforms to the ISO FDIS 8041 2004 E standard dB dB 10 10 z0 i 20 sn sn 40 40 50 50 s0 s0 2n 70 80 80 50 50 0 16 0 32 eu 12 256 Siz 1024 gt 1 0 6 2 12 2 18 89 29 9 48 2 64 5 S3 3dB Characteristics of the Wb digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM D 2 2 4 Digital filter used for vibration measurements on ships oa PROFILE i gt FILTER DETECTOR LOGGER PEHK L GGER P P LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 window the selection of the KB filter The KB filter is used for the vibration measurements on ships Its characteristics presented below is taken from the formulae KB W Bc 28 9 dB dB dB 3 3 20 20 10 10 1 0 10 2 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 50 60 D 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5
278. c discharges The changes in instrument s operation state or its configuration and any corruption of stored data were not observed Effect of ambient pressure 0 01 dB kPa Effect of temperature 0 5 dB from 10 C to 50 C Operating range from 10 C to 50 Storage from 20 C to 60 C Effect of Vibration 72 dB from 20 Hz to 1000 Hz at 1 m s Microphone type ACO 7052H and the preamplifier type SV 12L on the SLM are mounted on the shaker Vibration is applied in a direction perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the microphone diaphragm C 5 G7 USER MANUAL Effect of mechanical vibration perpendicular to the plane of the microphone diaphragm 80 00 70 00 60 00 50 00 dB 40 00 30 00 20 00 10 00 0 00 15 6 31 25 62 5 125 250 500 1000 2000 Freq Hz Effect of mechanical vibration perpendicular to the plane of microphone diaphragm Table C 7 Typical effect of vibration perpendicular to the plane of microphone diaphragm f Hz 15 6 31 25 62 5 125 250 500 1000 2000 pes ED vibration 66 13 66 36 67 03 6455 6746 71 66 57 59 61 58 Effect of mechanical vibration parallel to the plane of the microphone diaphragm 70 00 60 00 50 00 m 40 00 30 00 20 00 10 00 0 00 15 6 31 25 62 5 125 250 500 1000 2000 Freq Hz Effect of mechanical vibration parallel to t
279. cal free field frequency response of G7 instrument C 9 G7 USER MANUAL Table C 13 Effect of reflections and diffraction from the case of the SLM Microphone 7052H G7 frequenc G7 with SA 22 frequenc f Hz ees G7 case effect response typical y 100 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 125 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 160 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 200 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 250 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 10 315 0 0 1 0 00 0 10 0 20 400 0 0 1 0 00 0 09 0 20 500 0 0 0 0 00 0 02 0 10 630 0 0 2 0 00 0 23 0 10 800 0 0 1 0 00 0 05 0 20 1000 0 0 4 0 05 0 48 0 70 1250 0 0 3 0 00 0 29 0 60 1600 0 0 9 0 00 0 88 0 50 2000 0 0 0 0 00 0 03 0 50 2240 0 0 4 0 03 0 35 0 80 2500 0 0 1 0 05 0 04 0 60 2820 0 0 2 0 08 0 12 0 60 3150 0 0 1 0 10 0 23 0 20 3550 0 0 1 0 10 0 17 0 20 4000 0 0 7 0 10 0 57 0 80 4470 0 0 5 0 13 0 35 0 60 5000 0 0 7 0 15 0 51 0 70 5600 0 0 4 0 25 0 17 0 50 6300 0 0 8 0 35 0 50 0 80 7100 0 0 9 0 18 0 70 0 80 8000 0 1 0 0 00 1 00 0 90 8400 0 0 6 0 25 0 38 0 70 8900 0 0 1 0 50 0 44 0 20 9400 0 0 2 0 75 0 57 0 40 10000 0 0 3 1 00 0 72 0 50 10600 0 0 5 0 83 0 35 0 70 11200 0 0 1 0 65 0 80 0 10 11900 0 0 1 0 30 0 19 0 40 12500 0 0 0 0 05 0 10 0 30 16000 0 0 3 0 15 0 18 0 40 20000 0 0 9 1 05 0 12 1 80 Algorithm 03 Case Effect Compensation Filter Compensated Case Effect
280. control of the instrument The user in order to programme the serial interface has to 1 send the function code 2 send an appropriate data file or 3 receive a data file A 1 Input Output transmission types The following basic input output transmission types called functions are available 1 input output of the control setting codes 2 read out of the measurement results in the sound level meter SLM mode or vibration level meter VLM mode 3 read out of the measurement results in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode 4 read out of the data file from the internal Flash disc 5 read out of the statistical analysis results 7 special control functions 9 writing the data file into the internal flash disk A 2 Function 1 Input Output of the control setting codes 1 function enables the user to send the control setting codes to the instrument and read out a file containing the current control state A list of the control setting codes is given in Tab A 1 The format of 1 function is defined as follows 1 Xccc Xccc XCCC or 1 Xccc X Xccc X XCcc where X the group code ccc the code value X the request to send the current X code setting A 1 G7 USER MANUAL The instrument outputs in this case a control settings file for all requests X in the following format 1 X ccc X ccc X ccc In order to read out all current control settings the user should send to the device the fo
281. ction of the character 4 7 36 Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt 5 gt and lt gt gt push buttons ess 7 37 Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons sss 7 37 Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data 7 37 Displays in the simplified edition of the setup name and saving operation execution 2 2222 7 37 Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation 7 38 Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation the return to the SAVE SETUP 7 38 View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE 7 38 xiii G7 USER MANUAL Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is active Ne 7 39 FILE list with the LOAD SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely see 7 39 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 39 Display during the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation pt 7 39 Exemplary contents of the LOAD SETUP WindgW eese nennen een een rennen tenete trennen 7 40 Displays after the execution of the LOAD SETUP 7 40 FILE
282. ctrum type This sub list contains three positions ACCELERATION VELOCITY and DISPLACEMENT and is available only in the case of the vibration measurements In order to enter this sub list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed SPECTRUM TYPE text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The user can selected the required type of the spectrum presented on the display by means of the lt lt lt gt gt push buttons The SPECTRUM TYPE window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or the ENTER push button which confirms the changes a DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM TYPE LOGGER MIEM DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM TYPE text highlighted oa oa SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM DISPLACEMENT SPECTRUM TYPE windows with the available values 6 2 3 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation SPECTRUM VIEW The SPECTRUM VIEW enables the user to change the shape of the graphical presentation VIEW and a TYPE parameter as well as to activate the presentation on the display the MAX and MIN spectrum In the VIEW position the EXTENDED FULL and NORMAL views are available by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In the TYPE position the AVERAGED INSTANTENOUS MAX and MIN texts are available by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons I
283. currently active function 4 1 G7 USER MANUAL L1 FUNCTION HERSUR FUNCTION LEWEL METER 141 OCTAVE LEWEL METER 175 OCTAVE L1 141 OCTAVE FFT D 11 2 OCTAVE RTEG FFT DOSE METER a ENTER CODE ENTER CODE WV Z4118 VALID CODE c SH Delete SH Insert SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY MEASUREMENT FUNCTION windows opened in SM a in VM b and the activation of the optional function c The main function of the instrument is the measurement of sound or vibration level The other functions are optional and they broaden the applications of the instrument They can be supported by the producer or purchased later The producer activates the optional function bought with the instrument The user should activate by himself the function purchased later The sound LEVEL METER SLM mode provides the user with the functions of the SLM meeting the IEC 61672 2002 standard for Type 1 accuracy and the functions of VLM meeting the ISO 8041 2005 standard The instrument can also be used for the long term acoustic monitoring using for this purpose the huge logger in which the measurement results are stored The required function is selected by placing the special character in the line with the proper text The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After placing the character in the line with the function s name the user has t
284. d file is displayed in the available result presentation modes after pressing the A v push buttons depending on the current settings of the instrument oa L iJHH2z1 Loaded PRESS ANY KEW a SPL Fast Z HO RESULTS Profiles File 81JRHz1 Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a DOSE METER file In the case when in the DISPLAY MODES sub list the STATISTICS are activated and in the loaded file the statistic analysis was not included the display with NO RESULT message is presented in the graphical presentation of the statistical levels as it is given above BRESZ BRESZI Loading Loaded PRESS ANY KEY TIME 28 43 26 gt lt ENTER gt gt a FILE INFO SPL Fast Z 83 FOIE FILE RESS FILE SIZE 15646 DATE 28 OCT 2666 dB TIME 28 43 26 ELAPSED 10 0 Prailecm PE LA Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a LEVEL METER 7 4 Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE The DELETE is used to remove a file from memory In order to enter the window the user has to select the DELETE text to display it inversely using the lt A gt v push buttons and then press the lt gt one DELETE RLL DEFRRGHEHTRT ION FILE list with the DELETE text highlighted displayed inversely In the DELETE window there are t
285. d in the INPUT list and the DOSIMETER SETUP window sess 5 23 DOSIMETER SETUP windows the CRITERION LEVEL selection 5 24 DOSIMETER SETUP windows the THRESHOLD LEVEL selection eene 5 24 DOSIMETER SETUP windows the EXCHANGE RATE selection eee 5 24 FFT selected in the INPUT list and the FFT window opened in sound mode a and in vibration mode b 5 25 FFT window the FILTER selection in sound mode 4 5 25 FEE window the BAND Sele Ct OM EYE OESTE 5 26 FFT sublist the WINDOW selection rtr nannte tette tease stessa ea teas asses eren an 5 26 FFT window the LINES selection et 5 26 FFT window the LOGGER activation ee at 5 27 SPECTRUM selected in the INPUT list and the SPECTRUM window opened in sound mode a and in vibration mode b esee RH RIDGE Ra re ERE 5 27 SPECTRUM window the FILTER selection in sound mode pt 5 28 SPECTRUM window the BAND selection in sound mode pt 5 28 SPECTRUM window the LOGGER selection 5 28 Display in the main list the DISPLAY text highlighted displayed inversely esses 6 1 Display with tbe DISPLAY list mee td D Oe E DP HER ES 6 1 DISPLAY MODES windows SM iter ote re cette bee o Ode ote eie biete eene s 6 2 DISPLAY MODES windows in VM pb 6 2 Display in the LOGGER mode when there is nothi
286. d or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list Another message is presented and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user in the case when there is no data to be printed PRINT STATISTICS TIME OUT PRESS ANY KEY b PRESS ANY KEW PRINT STATISTICS Ho results a Displays during the statistics printing when there is no transfer a and no data b 8 4 Printing of the measurement results from the selected file PRINT FILE The PRINT FILE enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the selected file with the measurement results or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and the USB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT FILE text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER TITLE TITLE PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT STATISTICS PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS a FRIHT USER FILTERS b PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the PRINT FILE selected in SM a and VM b After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing
287. disk memory free space setting MIN FREE SPACE 9 33 REMOTE CONTROL A 1 A 1 Input Output transmission types A 1 A 2 Function 1 Input Output of the control setting codes A 1 Function 2 Measurement results read out in the level meter or dose meter modes A 4 A 4 Function 3 Read out of the measurement results in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode A 6 Function 4 Read out of the data file from the internal Flash Disc A 7 A 6 Function 5 Statistical analysis results read out A 8 A 7 Function 46 Remote setting of the user filters A 9 A 8 Function 7 Special control functions A 10 A 9 Function 9 Write in of the data file into the internal Flash Disc 16 10 Control setting codes A 16 DATA FILE STRUCTURES B 1 B 1 Structure of the G7 file B 1 B 2 Structure of the file containing results from logger s file B 21 B 2 1 The contents of the files in the logger B 22 B 3 Structure of the file with the results from the SLM mode B 23 B 4 Structure of the file with the results from the VLM mode B 24 B 5 Structure of the file with the results from the DOSE METER mode B 24 B 6 Structure of the file with 1 1 OCTAVE analysis results B 24 B 7 Structure of the file with 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results B 25 B 8 Structure of the file with the FFT analysis results B 25 B 9 Structure of the file containing RT60 functions results B 26 B 10 Structure of the SETUP file B 26 B 11 DATE and TIME B 26 DATA SPECIFICATION
288. dix D Linear operating ranges for the acceleration Two ranges with the nominal values 17 8 ms LOW 316 ms HIGH 145 dB 170 dB related to 10 ms Notice With the accelerometer of the sensitivity equal to 1 mV ms the nominal ranges are equal to 178 ms and the 3160 ms Mounting for vibration tests The accelerometer can be connected with the VLM using proper cable provided by the manufacturer The accelerometer can be mounted on the plate in various ways e using threaded stud onto a flat smooth surface e using thin layer of bees wax for sticking the accelerometer into the plate e using mica washer and isolates stud where the body of accelerometer should be electrically isolated from the measuring object e using permanent magnet which also electrically isolates the accelerometer C 28 G7 USER MANUAL Values of the measured acceleration using the accelerometer with the nominal sensitivity equal to 10 mV ms e g the SV 39A seat accelerometer e Linear measurement with the W Bc W Bxy and W Bz filters from 0 001 ms to 354 ms the sinusoidal signal RMS from 0 003 ms to 500 ms PEAK Table C 16 Linear operating ranges with the W Bc W Bxy and W Bz filters RANGE RMS Linear operating ranges LOW from 1 00 mms 60 0 dB to 56 2 ms 155 0 dB HIGH from 10 mms 80 0 dB to 354 ms 171 0 dB e Linear measurement with the HP filter from 0 003 ms to
289. during the last measurement period but did not occur in the last second of the measurement and 3 when the under range took place during the last measurement period and it lasted in the last second of the measurement the overload flag ccc equals to 0 or 1 time of the measurement ccc value in seconds the PEAK value ccc the value in dB the MAX value ccc the value in dB the MIN value ccc the value in dB the SPL result ccc the value in dB the DOSE result ccc the value in 95 the D 8h result ccc the value in 96 the LAV result ccc the value in dB the LEQ result ccc the value in dB the SEL result ccc the value in dB the SEL8 result ccc the value in dB the E result ccc the value in the E 8h result ccc the value the LEPd result ccc the value in dB nn the value of Exposure Time in minutes the PSEL result ccc the value in dB the Ltm3 result ccc the value in dB the Ltm5 result ccc the value in dB L nn the value L of the nn statistics ccc the value in dB gt 2 20 4 lt mc cy 2 The codes of the results in the case of VLM mode are defined as follows V the under range flag ccc equals to 0 when the overload did not occur 2 when the under range took place during the last measurement period but did not occur in the last second of the measurement and 3 when the under range took p
290. e 0 IMP 1 FAST 2 SLOW FilterP 3 filter type in the 37 profile 0 Z 2 A GF USER MANUAL 3 C BufferP 3 logger contents in the 3 profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 MAX 4 MIN 8 RMS CalibrFactor 3 calibration factor 10 dB in the 3 profile ProfileFlags 3 flags in the 3 profile Table B 1 9 VLM Special settings for profiles in the case of VLM mode Word number Comment Oxnn05 05 id nn block s length 0x0307 used profile profile s mask Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 1 detector type in the 1 profile 0 100 ms 1 125 ms 2 200 ms 3 500 ms 4 16 5 25 6 56 7 10s FilterP 1 filter type in the 1s profile 0 Z 1 HP1 2 HP3 3 HP10 4 Vell 5 Vel3 6 Vel10 7 VelMF 8 DIN 9 Dil3 10 Dil10 15 KB 16 Wk 17 Wd 18 Wc 19 Wj 20 Wm 21 Wh 22 Wg 23 Wb BufferP 1 logger contents in the 1s profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 P P B 9 G7 USER MANUAL 4 MAX 8 RMS CalibrFactor 1 calibration factor 10 dB in the 1 profile ProfileFlags 1 flags in the 1s profile Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 2 detector type in the 2 profile 0 100 ms 1 125 ms 2 200 ms 3 500 ms 4 16 5 25 6 56 7 10s
291. e In the case when the measurements are performed the SETUP FILES entering is impossible In such case the message is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The data about the existing in the instrument setup files are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window pressing the ENTER push button The current number of the file and the total number of the saved setup files is displayed in the first line of the window The date and time of the SAVE SETUP operation is displayed in the last two lines respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt Selection of the SETUP FILES to be deleted 7 24 G7 USER MANUAL The selected file is deleted after pressing the ENTER push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it r
292. e N max total 1 Table B 1 22 RT60 averaged results block G7 USER MANUAL MEE Name Comment 0x001C 1C id 00 block s length in the second word BlockLength 7 N2 160 freg N1 rt60 1 max total 9 LowestFreq the lowest 1 3 OCTAVE frequency 100 Hz 80 NTer NTotal N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq izN1 freq N2 freq calculated i E 121 ER i N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60_freq i N_tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 rt 201i 1 rt60 freq N2 rt60_freq i N_tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 rt 30fi 1 rt60 freq N2 rt60_ freq m tercje tercje N max total 1 rt user i 1 rt60 freq N2 rt60_freq i N_tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 i N1 freq N2 rt60 freq Gor Ban 2 izN1 freq N2 rt60 freq cor_rt_20fi 2 Ros pecias izN1 freq N2 rt60 freq Ne mas midi cor rt user i 1 1160 freq N2 1160 freq tercje tercje N max total 1 Table B 1 23 RPM results the presence depends on the RPM On position Comment number OxnntF 1F id nn block s length t RpmRes rpm 0 RPM 0 f RpmRes rpm t RPM 1 ___ F_RpmRes rpmx 0 Max 0 ___ F_RpmRes rpmx 1 RPM Max 1 F RpmRes rpmn 0 RPM Min 0 EM RPM Min 1 F RpmRes rpmn t Comment 20 id 0
293. e analogue like form together with the scale is presented at the left side of the display The real time clock is visible in the bottom right corner of the display The selection of the result is made pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 6 3 G7 USER MANUAL Low Low RMS 2 45 unu 2 45 2 45 50 DU Profileci3 3 TB me iis Profileci3 Profileci3 Low BB PEAK 2 8 2 85 MAX 2295 1 14 3 815 8 1 1 19 1 19 1 19 SPL Fast A LEO Fast SEL Fast T 3 Profileci3 LEPa Fast A 43 JB Profileci3 U 0 Profileci3 13 J Profileci3 Lina Fast A 47 11 PERK T2 Profileci3 Ab JB Profileci3 Lins Fast A 1 3 1 19 MAX Fast A 41 3 Frafileci Loa Fast A 46 8 Profileci gt MIN Fast 12 Frafileci Rd oF 53 Measurement results made with integration in SM presented in one profile mode If the measurement results are saved in the internal memory in a file its name is presented under the profile s number LEPd Fast H Fast SEL Fast LEO Fast 50 3 ap 0 97 3 ikea Ende File MARI1 02 02 Measurement results made with exponential integration in SM saved in the file named MARII presented in one profile mode 50 3
294. e execution of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 32 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 2 7 32 Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is 7 32 Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation eene enne trennen trennen nenne 7 32 Result of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation eene eene ener 7 33 CATALOGUE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list eee 7 33 CATALOGUE window when the memory is empty 4 7 33 Contents of the CATALOGUE window esses enne 7 34 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 in the CATALOGUE window 7 34 FREE SPACE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list 4 7 34 FREE SPACE window after the execution of the DELETE ALL operatign 7 35 FREE SPACE window with the number depending on the measurements and operations performed 7 35 SAVE SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE 1iSt esee 7 35 SAVE SETUP window inthe FILE Ist eintreten reet cepe e eh i ert ete oreet 7 36 Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name es 7 36 Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited pp 7 36 Display during the sele
295. e gives the information about the current state of the instrument D7 D D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO where D7 0 means overload does not happen 1 means overload appeared D6 1 reserved D5 0 the instantaneous current result RUN State 1 the final result STOP State DO to D4 reserved bits Notice There is not any succeeding transmission in the case when the Status Byte is equal to zero The transmission counter is a two byte word denoting the number of the remaining bytes to be transmitted Its value is calculated from the formulae Transmission counter 6 n 4 the number of the classes in the statistics where n the number of the transmitted statistics For p 1 2 or 3 only one statistic is transmitted n 1 For p 0 the number of the transmitted statistics depends on the measurement function and e inthe case of 1 1 OCTAVE analysis n is equal to the number of the analysis results NOct cf App B plus the number of the TOTAL values for this type of analysis NOctTot e inthe case of 1 3 OCTAVE analysis n is equal to the number of the analysis results NTer cf App B plus the number of the TOTAL values for this type of analysis NTerTot NofClasses is a two byte word denoting the number of classes in the statistic BottomClass is a two byte word denoting the lower limit of the first class 10 dB ClassWidth is a two byte word denoting the width of the class 10 dB
296. e indicating that the statistics results are updated every 100 ms is placed at the end of the bottom line The profile s number the statistics are taken from the RMS detector Lin or Exp 6 11 G7 USER MANUAL Fast Slow or Imp the filters name A C or Z and real time are displayed on the right side of the view in the presentation modes The selection of the profile is made by pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or the lt SHIFT gt and v push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons a H RESULTS L38 48 2 dB PrlBBwe L38 48 4 dB PiisEme L38 57 2 dE P lBBws Results presented in the statistics presentation mode The selection of the Lxx to be displayed is done by pressing the lt lt lt gt gt push buttons The statistics L01 is immediately available after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt while the L99 after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons 58 5 dB Fri H H 03 42 0312 Loa 39 2 dE 1 lt 140 59 5 dE Fr Gems Lea 48 4 dE P lBBmz LiB 40 9 dB 18 41 8 dB P 1 Instrument s default Lxx levels presented in the graphical form The change of the mode is done by pressing the ALT and A or the ALT and v push buttons The second mode differs slightly from the first one described above the description on the left side is shorter but on the right side the valu
297. e of the statistic levels are shown hT wur L jn LS58 52 9 dB P lBBms Lia 62 9 dB P lBBmwe Results presented in both statistic presentation modes During the measurements which are indicated by the loudspeaker icon the current time from the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD is displayed on the right bottom clock in the first mode The envelope icon indicates that results selected in the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are logged Results presented in both statistic presentation modes during the measurements 6 12 G7 USER MANUAL 6 1 4 Setting on off logger view LOGGER The possibility of the presentation of the measurement results which are saved in the logger on the instrument s display can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the LOGGER text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored oa oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES amp ul 3 PROFILES 3 PROFILES 4 STATISTICS 1 STRTISTICS w LOGGER i LOGGER i FILE INFO 1 FILE INFD p Setting on and off the accessibility of LOGGER presentation mode The results saved in the logger can be presented in three
298. e performed analysis available values N or LOAD enables one to load to the working space of the instrument s memory the measurement results saved in a file the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty gt DELETE it enables the user to verify the list of files in the memory and to delete the selected one from RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES lists the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty DELETE ALL it enables the user to delete all files saved in the instrument s memory user can choose to delete either RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES the confirmation is required before the erasing of all files you sure gt DEFRAGMENTATION sub list FILES DEFRAGMENT it enables the user to recover the memory which was previously used by the deleted files the confirmation is required before the execution of this operation Are you sure LOGGER DEFRAGMENT it enables the user to recover the memory which was previously used by the deleted logger files the confirmation is required before the execution of this operation Are you sure 3 13 G7 USER MANUAL 3 14 The text DEFRAGMENTATION unnecessary PRESS ANY KEY is displayed when the instrument s memory was empty before trial of the defragmentation or when there were no deleted files CATALOGUE it enables the user to verify the list of files in the memor
299. e self made backlight switching off in the case when the keyboard is not used during the last 30 seconds If it happened the first pressing of any push button switches the backlight on a oa SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP COHTRAST COHTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT IY BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT SCREEN SETUP windows BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT activation 3 23 G7 USER MANUAL 3 3 Initial setup of the instrument The instrument passes the self test after switching on in this time the producer and the name of the instrument is displayed on the display and then it enters the sound mode The default display mode for result s presentation is one profile oa oa SPL Fast A HARM UP TIME Please wait 37s ESC to skip 10 Profilecl Profilecl ES rofile rofile EA a Displays after switching on the instrument in sound b or vibration mode c To start the measurements the user has to press the START STOP gt push button The result of the measurement is displayed with the unit of the measurement in so called one profile mode On the left side of the display the analogue like indicator is presented On the bottom of the display there is a profile from which comes the measurement Profile 1 Profile 2 or Profile 3 On the top of the display under the icons line there are the following data the function name SPL LEQ SEL Lden LEPd Ltm3 Ltm5 Lxx OVL PEAK MAX MIN in the case of sound measurements or RMS VDV OV
300. e sensitivity of the accelerometer taken from its calibration certificate using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and then press the ENTER one The calibration factor is calculated after pressing the ENTER push button in the relation to 10 0 mV ms In order to avoid the calculation the user has to leave the CALIBRATION without pressing ENTER For the sensitivity of the accelerometer higher than 10 0 mV ms the calibration factor is negative oa BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 28 046 SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 0 00946 a b Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the calibration factor calculated b For the sensitivity of the accelerometer lower than 10 0 mV ms the calibration factor is positive L BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 6 0246 SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 0 00946 a b Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the calibration factor calculated b The lowest applicable value of the sensitivity to be introduced is equal to 10 0 uV ms it conforms to the calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB and the highest one 10 0 V ms calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB In order to return to the CALIBRATION sub list the user has to press the lt ESC
301. easurements TIMEx The TIMEx 1 TIME2 TIME3 TIME4 is used to determine four irregular automatic starts of the measurements The required hour can be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the TIME x text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list mode IRREGULAR In order to set minutes one has to enter the proper line pressing the lt A gt v push buttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the lt ENTER gt push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button 9 18 5 Selecting the period between two consecutive measurements REPETITION The REPETITION of the timer function is selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the REPETITION text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list mode REGULAR This parameter can be programmed from 00 00 up to 99 59 In order to set the proper value one has to select hours or minutes pressing the lt A gt v push buttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the
302. ection is made by placing a special character by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the line with the selected language Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list The selection is confirmed and the list is closed after pressing the ENTER push button The list is closed without any confirmation after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 9 2 G7 USER MANUAL CLEAR SETUP C MPEHSRTIOM FILTER DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHAL 170 SETUP oa LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ESPRR L ITALIANO FLEMISH FRAHCAIS LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ISH ESPHRNDL FLEMISH FRAH AIS z IKCLRNGURGE2 _ FLEMISH FRANCAIS MAGYAR TURKISH Ll LANGUAGE ENGLISH ESPAAOL ITALIANO FLEMISH FRANCAIS oa LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPRR L ITALIANO FRAHCAIS L LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ISH ESPAAOL ITALIANO FLEMISH RTC SHIFT MODE STATISTICAL LEWELS TIMER USB HOST PORT Ustawienia Statystyki Budzik Host USE Filtry uzutkowun Jednostki oa BEHEHET MERESI BEALLiT MEASUREMENT RANGE 1 PROFIL 2 PROFIL 3 PROFIL EIOLD BEALLETAS SETUP INSTELLING THRLCLRNGUBGE ZERO SETUP DRGTIJD LIMIETEH EXP SITIETIJD 1 0 SETUP
303. ection is made by placing or replacing the special 6 1 G7 USER MANUAL character in the inversely displayed position of the DISPLAY MODES sub list by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button The mode of the results presentation is related with the selection of the instrument s function SLM or VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT analyser etc Only One Profile mode cannot be switched off independently from the current mode of the instrument Notice The abbreviation SM Sound Mode refers to the sound mode SOUND METER and the proper functions dedicated for the measurement and analysis of the acoustic signal LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT DOSIMETER RT60 VM Vibration Mode refers to the vibration mode VIBRATION METER and the proper functions dedicated for the measurement and analysis of the vibration signal LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT For the Sound Level Meter the following possibilities of the measurement results presentation are available One Profile 3 PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER time history FILE INFO oa oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES a FILE INFO b FILE INFO DISPLAY MODES windows in SM For the Vibration Level Meter the following possibilities of the measurement results presentation are available One Profile PROFILES LOGGER time history FILE INFO
304. ection requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The RT60 OPTION window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button L L L OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS SHODTHIMG SMOOTHING SMOOTHING HOISE MAR 18 HOISE MAR 18 HOISE MAR 18 RT60 OPTIONS window the SMOOTHING selection with the step equal to 1 a a a RT 60 OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS SMOOTHING NENNEN SMODTHIHG WEM SMOOTHING NENN HOISE MAR 1 HOISE MAR 1 5 BH AdE HOISE MAR 16 66 RT60 OPTIONS window the SMOOTHING selection with the step equal to 5 9 15 2 Setting the margin value of background noise level NOISE MAR In the NOISE MAR position the user can set the requesting additional margin value to the background noise level noise margin during the RT60 measurements In this position values from 0 0dB to 20 0dB are available The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with 0 1 dB step or by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one with the step equal to 1 dB The confirmation of the selection requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The RT60 OPTIONS window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push butto
305. ectromagnetic Compatibility EMC The product described above is compliant with the following EMC standards 1 For the EMC emissions specification according to IEC 61672 1 chapter 5 18 and IEC 61672 2 chapter 9 with test methods applied according to CISPR 22 1997 and CISPR 16 1999 2 For the EMC immunity specification according to IEC 61672 1 chapter 6 5 and 6 6 and IEC 61672 2 chapter 7 9 and 7 10 with test methods applied according to IEC 61000 4 2 and IEC 61000 4 3 2002 Notice EMC compatibility is guaranteed only with the original accessories supplied by SVANTEK Safety The product described above is compliant with following standards EN 61010 1 2001 and IEC 61010 1 2001 Compliance with EU Directives CE mark indicates compliance with EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC C 36 G7 USER MANUAL Normative references The following referenced documents are indispensable for application of this document For dated references only the edition cited applies For undated references the latest edition of the referenced document applies IEC 61672 1 2005 Electroacoustics Sound level meters Part 1 Specifications IEC 61672 2 2005 Electroacoustics Sound level meters Part 2 Pattern evaluation tests IEC 651 Sound level meters IEC 61260 Electroacoustics Octave band and fractional octave band filters CISPR 22 1997 Information technology equipment Radio disturbance charact
306. ed in SM a and VM b 8 21 OPTIONS windows the selection of the format et 8 21 OPTIONS windows the selection of the paper ejection 4 8 22 Displays with the request for the confirmation of the paper ejection pe 8 22 Display after a printing when there is not possible to eject a paper pp 8 22 Display in the main list the SETUP text highlighted displayed inVerSely 9 1 SETUP listin the SMi utet eei ter nb eo eI Pbi 9 2 SETUP lstanithe iste ete SUR eem ena eS PUEDES 9 2 SETUP list the LANGUAGE text highlighted displayed 9 3 Displays with the English version of the user interface 4 9 3 Displays with the Italian version of the user interface ee 9 3 Displays with the Polish version of the user interface 4 9 3 Displays with the Hungarian version of the user interface 4 9 3 Displays with the Flemish version of the user interface esses 9 3 Displays with the French version of the user interface nene ener 9 3 Displays with the Spanish version of the user interface 9 4 Displays with the German version of the user interface 4 9 4 Displays with the Turkish version of the user interface sesessssesseeeeeeeeeeeeee nene 9 4 Displays during the entering of the access code to the Russian version of the user interface ppp 9 4 Displays with the Russian version of the user interface available only on some ma
307. ed on the Figure below The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt lt gt lt gt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters SAVE FILE SS0CT SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF SHi Delete SH Insert Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name One can select the position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 7 3 G7 USER MANUAL SAVE FILE SRUE SAVE FILE 2 SRUE SAVE FILE 280TA SRUE SAVE FILE 25078 SRUE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAWE Press ESC ta SKIF Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete 5 Insert Delete Insert Delete SH Insert Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited The available ASCII characters can be changed using the lt A gt or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE FILE
308. ed when the conditions set in the MEASUREMENT SETUP sub list are fulfilled after pressing the START STOP push button or after receiving the proper control code remotely oa TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE SLOPE MSc R 10006 LEUEL 16806 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SLOPE modes selected In the case when the LEVEL is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the greater level than this determined in the LEVEL and in the other case the measurement result is skipped In the case when the LEVEL is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the lower level than this determined in the LEVEL and in the other case the measurement result is skipped ao ao MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER MEJOR 5412 RHMECTIA 168dB 168dB MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL modes selected In the case when the GRAD is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the greater level than this determined in the LEVEL and the speed of the signal changes is not less than that selected in the GRADIENT In the other case the measurement result is skipped Ll MEASURE TRIGGER GRAD 5412 GRADI
309. eene 6 16 Displays with the autoscale switched on and gf nennen nennen nre 6 17 DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM TYPE text highlighted pe 6 17 SPECTRUM TYPE windows with the available values et 6 17 DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM VIEW text highlighted pe 6 18 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the VIEW selection 6 18 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the TYPE selection et 6 18 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MAX selectigon et 6 18 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MIN selection pe 6 19 DISPLAY SETUP window the TOTAL VALUES text highlighted esee 6 19 TOTAL VALUES windows the weighting filters selection in SM nene 6 19 TOTAL VALUES windows in VM the TOTALx selected pt 6 19 TOTAL x windows the weighting filters selection in 6 20 TOTALx windows the TYPE selection 6 20 TOTALx windows CALIBRATION FACTOR setting pe 6 20 DISPLAY SETUP windows the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted seen 6 20 LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the VIEW parameter sese 6 21 Displays with the possible values of the VIEW parameter eene nennen nennen 6 21 LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the TIME parameter pp 6 21 Displays with the possible values of the TIME parameter pp 6 21 DISPLAY list the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted essent nenne 6 22 Displaysan the LOGGER VIEW sub list 2 trn pr e tienne ge dete e nere seen
310. el Wideband noise level measured with the voltage input short circuit 20 kHz band e with the HP filter lt 17 u Vnus e with the W Bxy filter lt 3 HVRMs e With the 2 filter lt 3 Vnus e with the W Bc filter lt 3 u Vnus e with the Wh filter lt 3 HVRMs Reference range 170 dB Level indication range from 100 dB to 10 2 dB related to the nominal range level plus the calibration factor C 30 G7 USER MANUAL Basic accuracy lt 0 2 dB for the temperature T 23 56 for sinusoidal signal 140 dBgys in the band 10 Hz 20 kHz with the Wh input filter Measurement error in the full temperature range lt 0 3dB when the temperature is from 10 to 506 for the sinusoidal signal 140 in the band 10 Hz 20 kHz with the H A input filter Input divider accuracy 0 1 dB Digital filters Low pass filters 8 eighth order elliptic filters with the cut off frequencies from 10 kHz to 78 125 Hz in the binary sequence Ripple in the pass band 0 1 dB Attenuation in the stop band gt 100 dB High pass filter HP filter see Appendix D for the frequency response characteristics Weighting filters see Appendix D for the frequency response characteristics e W Bxy from 1 Hz to 330 Hz e W Bz from 3 Hz to 1000 Hz e W Bc from 3 Hz to 1000 Hz e Wh from 1 Hz to 330 Hz C 31 G7 USER MANUAL C4 Miscellaneous specification of G7 Display Graphical the liquid crystals LCD type with
311. ement result is greater than threshold value d SOURCE setting selects source of measurement result to be compared with the threshold value One of three results sources may be selected PEAK 1 SPL 1 or LEQ 1 e ALARM LEVEL enables one setting up threshold value GF USER MANUAL Interface USB The G7 USB interface enables remote control of the instrument and data transfer up to attainable with 12 MHz clock There are two USB ports available on the G7 bottom panel USB Device port USB socket external view Table C 23 Pin out of the USB Device connector Host USB port USB socket external view Table C 24 Pin out of the USB Host connector E C 35 G7 USER MANUAL RS 232 interface optional The RS 232 interface option for the G7 is provided by means of the SV 55 interface It conforms to the EIA Standard RS 232C It enables the user to programme remotely all instrument functions and the transmissions to and from the analyser with the speed from 300 bit s to 115200 bit s The SV 55 must be connected to the G7 USB Host port and proper operation of this port has to be set up in the instrument s SETUP Menu before Below the SV 55 DB 09 F pin female connector pin out is given Table C 25 SV 55 interface description PC RS 232 SV 55 connector 9 pin connector DB 09 F Signal name Pin number 1 LSD 1 not connected __ 9 not connected El
312. empt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL Are uou Are uou sure EM sure Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message is displayed after the successful execution of all stages of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list 7 27 G7 USER MANUAL Clearing xem Please wait Deleted PRESS ANY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of LOGGER FILES selected 7 5 3 Deleting all setup files SETUP FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the SETUP FILES text usin
313. eneration SOURCE 9 6 6 Alarm level selection on the digital output of I O ALARM LEVEL 9 7 Activation of human vibration filters HUMAN VIB FILT 9 8 Selection of the current IEPE supply IEPE CURRENT 9 9 Reference signal in vibration measurements REFERENCE LEVELS 9 9 1 Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC 9 9 2 Setting the reference level of the velocity signal VEL 9 9 3 Setting the reference level of the displacement signal DIL 9 10 Parameters of remote communication REMOTE COMMUNICATION 9 10 1Selecting the type of remote communication TYPE 9 10 2Setting the packet size of the remote communication PACKET 9 11 Detector s type selection in the LEQ calculations RMS INTEGRATION 9 12 Setting the parameters of the serial interface RS232 9 12 1Setting the transmission speed of the serial interface BAUD RATE 9 12 2Setting time limit for the performance of serial interface operation TIME OUT 9 13 Programming the instrument s internal Real Time Clock RTC 9 14 The RT 60 averaging function RT60 AVERAGING 9 14 1The RT 60 averaging AVERAGING 9 14 2Resetting the averaging process AVERAGING CLEAR 9 14 3RT 60 averaging number AVERAGING NO 9 15 Setting the auxiliary parameters of RT 60 mode RT60 OPTIONS 9 15 1Setting the sound pressure level decay curve averaging SMOOTHING 9 15 2Setting the margin value of background noise level NOISE MAR 9 16 Selection of RT60 results parameters RT60 RESUL
314. enn 7 2 FILE Uistrof the nstr ment ete eere ie e tere ELO e EET e rate ee a tee es 7 3 SAVE window in the FILE hst eR tre nr req RED 7 3 Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name 7 3 Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited Ne 7 4 Display during the selection of the character pp 7 4 FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push button eese 7 4 FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons eese 7 4 Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data 7 5 Displays in the simplified edition of the file name and the execution of the saving 7 5 xi G7 USER MANUAL Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that 7 5 Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation and the return to the SAVE NEXT 7 5 Display after the SAVE operation when there were no results for StoTing essere 7 6 View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation 7 6 Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is not active pp 7 6 Settings and the FILE INFO after the performed measurement et 7 7 FREE SPACE window before and
315. ent results presentation DISPLAY MODES 6 1 6 1 1 Switching on off spectrum view SPECTRUM 6 8 6 1 2 Switching on off three profiles view 3 PROFILES 6 9 6 1 3 Setting on off statistics view in SM STATISTICS 6 11 6 1 4 Setting on off logger view LOGGER 6 13 6 1 5 Setting on off the view of the file description FILE INFO 6 13 6 2 Setting the parameters of the graphical modes DISPLAY SETUP 6 14 6 2 1 Setting the scale of the presentation and the display s grid DISPLAY SCALE 6 14 6 2 2 Selection of the Spectrum Type in VM SPECTRUM TYPE 6 17 6 2 3 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation SPECTRUM VIEW 6 17 6 2 4 Selection of the Weighting Filters TOTAL VALUES 6 19 6 2 5 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation LOGGER VIEW 6 20 6 3 Selection of the logger s file to the display presentation LOGGER VIEW 6 21 6 4 Setting the parameters of the display SCREEN SETUP 6 24 6 4 1 Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST 6 24 6 4 2 Automatic switch off of the backlight BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 6 25 6 5 Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY 6 25 G7 USER MANUAL 6 6 Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL 6 25 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS FILE 7 1 7 1 Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEXT 7 3 7 2 Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS 7 9 7 2 1 Saving data starting from the same address RAM FILE 7 10 7 2 2 Replacement o
316. ent results presentation in 3 PROFILES can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the 3 PROFILES text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored a a DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 3 SPECTRUM FILE IMFO Setting on and off the accessibility of three profiles presentation mode The exemplary measurement results presented in the 3 PROFILES mode when the results from three profiles are on the display are given below In the case of the 3 PROFILES in three consecutive lines the following data are seen the name of the function the result together with the units the filters and detector time constants in each profile in the case of sound mode and in the case of vibration mode the profil number P 1 P 2 P 3 The current real time the profile from which the result is displayed inversely and the name of the file in which the results are saved are displayed at the bottom At the right bottom there is another clock which displays real time in the case when the measurements are performed and the current second of the measurement in the opposite case The PEAK result does not depend on the detector type
317. er switching on the compensation filter the first measurement is made with 5 seconds delay OUTDOOR FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR AIRPORT compensation is OFF compensation is OFF compensation is OFF compensation is OFF Do you want to Do you want to Do you want to Do you want to switch it OH switch it OH switch it switch it OH ER END HO SEE HO ES HO END HO Displays with the question about switching on the compesation filter 9 4 Day time limits selection DAY TIME LIMITS The DAY TIME LIMITS enables the user to select the required by the local standards determination of the day and night These limits are used for the calculation of the Lden function cf App D for the definition In order to enter the window the user has to select the DAY TIME LIMITS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt a SETUP LANGUAGE CLEAR SETUP EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHAL 170 SETUP CURRENT SETUP list with the DAY TIME LIMITS text highlighted displayed inversely Two options are available 6H 18H and 7 19 The required limits can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push button ignoring a change made in the position
318. er of the statistical analysis in profiles the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 16 B 23 G7 USER MANUAL Results of the statistical analysis in profiles the presence depends on the SAVE STAT position cf Tab B 1 17 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 4 Structure of the file with the results from the VLM mode File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4_SLM or Tab B 1 4_VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended I O settings cf Tab B 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 VLM Main results cf Tab B 1 10 VLM RPM results cf Tab B 1 23 the presence depends on the RPM On flag File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 5 Structure of the file with the results from the DOSE METER mode File header cf Tab B 1 1 Unit and software specification cf Tab B 1 2 USER S text cf Tab B 1 3 Parameters and global settings cf Tab B 1 4 SLM or Tab B 1 4 VLM MEASUREMENT TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended settings cf Tab 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 Main results cf Tab B 1 10 DM Statistical levels cf Tab B 1
319. eration The instrument returns to the REPORT list when all data are transferred but if the Prompt parameter was selected path MENU REPORTS OPTIONS EJECT P Prompt the described in the PRINT RESULTS message is displayed on the display after the printing The user has to answer in this case if the Line Feed has to be added to the transferred data The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible Line Feed addition FILE TIME OUT PRESS ANY KEW Display during the file sending out when there is no data transfer 8 13 G7 USER MANUAL The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer or PC is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and it returns to the REPORT list after pressing a push button The exemplary printed file contents are presented below C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 17 55135 File name 06AUGO TITLE Col SETTINGS Device mode VIBR METER Input Accelerometer Device function 1 3 OCTAVE Meas star
320. ere are located the following control push buttons ENTER lt MENU gt lt SAVE gt lt 5 gt CAL PAUSE lt SHIFT gt Markers lt ALT gt Markers lt A gt lt gt gt Ww START STOP gt The name given in brackets denotes the second push button function which is available after pressing it in conjunction or in sequence with the lt SHIFT gt push button For the first two push buttons the name given in square brackets denotes also the third push button function which is available after pressing it in conjunction or in sequence with the ALT push button Control push buttons of the G7 instrument lt SHIFT gt The second function of a push button written in red colour on a push button can be used when the lt SHIFT gt push button is pressed This push button can be used in two different ways e as SHIFT in the keyboard e g while typing the filename both lt SHIFT gt and the second push button must be pressed in parallel e as 2nd Fun this push button can be pressed and released before pressing the second one or pressed in parallel while operating in 2nd Fun mode see the following notice with the second push button 2 1 G7 USER MANUAL The lt SHIFT gt push button pressed in conjunction with the ALT one enables the user to enter the Markers on the plots during the measurement Notice The operation of this push
321. eristics Limits and methods of measurement CISPR 16 1999 Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus and methods IEC 61000 4 2 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 2 Testing and measurement techniques Electrostatic discharge immunity test IEC 61000 4 3 2002 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 3 Testing and measurement techniques Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity test EN 61010 1 2001 or IEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 General requirements EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Low Voltage Directive Directive 2006 95 EC C 37 G7 USER MANUAL D DEFINITIONS AND FILTER CHARACTERISTICS D 1 Definitions and formulae D 1 1 Basic symbols and notation T Tb rw t current period of the measurement period after which the results are saved in the logger set in the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP period of the measurement is set in the INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGH PERIOD exposure time period during which a person is exposed to the action of noise This parameter can be set in the EXPOSURE TIME path MENU SETUP EXPOSURE TIME The available values are from 1 minute to 8 hours with 1 minute step period equal to 8 hours 28 800 seconds detector time constant is set in the DETECTOR equal to
322. es which are set here are taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results expressed in the logarithmic scale with the dB as the units In order to enter the position the user has to select the REFERENCE LEVELS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The selection of a parameter which level has to be set is done by means of the lt A gt v push buttons SETUP COMPEHSATIOH FILTER 5 DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME XTERHRL 170 SETUP IEPE CLRREHT SETUP list the REFERENCE LEVELS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 9 1 Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC In the ACC position the user can set the reference level of the acceleration signal It is possible to set this level from 1 ums to 100 ums with 1 ums step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be increased to 10 ums pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the ESC push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored oa a a REFERENCE LEUELS RFEFEREHCE LEUELS REFEREHCE LEVELS REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level setting of acceleration signal 9 9 2 Setting the reference level of the velocity signal
323. es the calculations of the dose meter results namely DOSE D_8h and LAV The exposure rate equal to three complies with ISO R 1999 Assessment of Occupational Noise Exposure for Hearing Conservation Purposes while equal to five complies with the American Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA The EXCHANGE RATE line is accessible after pressing the v push button the DOSIMETER SETUP widow The available values are as follows 2 3 4 or 5 They be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The DOSIMETER SETUP is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button mo mo mo mo D SIMETER SETUP D SIMETER SETUP D SIMETER SETUP D SIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEVEL S8dB CRITERION LEVEL 5096 LEVEL S dB CRITERION LEVEL G adB THRESHOLD LEVEL Hone THRESHOLD LEVEL Hone THRESHOLD LEVEL Hone THRESHOLD LEVEL Hone EXCHAHGE FATE RATE EXCHAHGE FATE EXCHANGE DOSIMETER SETUP windows the EXCHANGE RATE selection 5 24 G7 USER MANUAL 5 6 Selection of FFT analysis parameters FFT The FFT is accessible in the INPUT list when the FFT function is selected MEASUREMENT FUNCTION window path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION
324. esentation mode the selection of the statistical level sss D 6 Results shown in both presentation modes of statistical levels the change of the 2 2242 4 2 1 D 6 MENU FUNCTION and MODE windows sound mode selection pp D 9 INPUT and PROFILE x windows weighting filter Selectign D 9 Full band frequency characteristics of Z filter implemented in the instrument sese D 9 Low band frequency characteristics of the Z filter implemented in the instrument sees D 10 Frequency characteristics of the A filter implemented in the instrument pp D 10 Frequency characteristics of the C filter implemented in the instrument essere D 11 SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the FREE FIELD filter D 12 Frequency characteristics of the FREE FIELD filter implemented in the instrument RN D 12 SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the DIFFUSE FIELD filter D 12 Frequency characteristics of the DIFFUSE FIELD filter implemented in the instrument esses D 13 SETUP and COMPENSATION FILTER windows the activation of the OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL uia D 13 Frequency characteristics of the ENVIRONMENTAL filter implemented in the instrument D 14 SETUP and COMPENSATION
325. esented when the current measurement results are logged in the instrument s logger file Together with this icon the Loudspeaker icon is always displayed In the case when the Envelope icon starts flashing it means that the whole logger memory of the instrument is filled out The new measurement result is not saved in it If the user wants to save these results he has to DELETE some logger files and execute LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION Bell is displayed when overload has taken place during the last measurement cycle the icon is displayed also after the measurement and after loading the file with the overloaded results 1 19 pa 1 19 1 19 01 Displays with Headphone Envelope and icons 3 26 G7 USER MANUAL Timer icon flashing means that the instrument s Timer is switched on and the instrument is waiting for the set time of the measurement When the measurement was started by the Timer the icon is presented without flashing Arrows are flashing after pressing the ALT or lt SHIFT gt push button when the 2nd Fun is selected in the SHIFT MODE path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE SHIFT 2nd FUN that means other push buttons have second or third meaning i e after pressing the lt SHIFT gt the meaning of ENTER push button is MENU after pressing the ALT the meaning of lt ESC gt p
326. essed and in the file there are still the results The position of the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical one can be changed after pressing the lt A gt v push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the axis relation 6 23 G7 USER MANUAL The results from logger s file coming from different profiles are changed after pressing the lt A gt or lt Y gt push buttons after each pressing the result from the next profile is displayed Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the profile The results from logger s file coming from the same profile are displayed after each pressing of the lt ALT gt and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons Displays with the selected logger s file the mer of the result from a profile 6 4 Setting the parameters of the display SCREEN SETUP The SCREEN SETUP window enables the user to set the proper contrast of the display and switch on the backlight s automatic switch off after a certain period 30 seconds In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed SCREEN SETUP text of the DISPLAY list The SCREEN SETUP window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt 5 gt or the ENTER push button DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER BATTER UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list the
327. ete SH Insert Settings before the execution of the measurements All together eight different results coming from PROFILE 1 MAX MIN and RMS PROFILE 2 PEAK and RMS and PROFILE 3 MAX and MIN path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are saved every 100 milliseconds Therefore during 10 seconds integration period it gives 10 10 100 RECORDS path MENU DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW each containing eight values each two bytes long All results are saved in the logger s file named amp LOG101 The exact size of the amp LOG101 is not displayed only the approximate value 2 kilobytes can be visible in the logger files delete window path MENU FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES a PROFILE i gt PROFILEC2 PROFILES LOGGER lt 1 54 LOGGER RMS w a FILE INFO FILE INFO LE HAME EXAMP4 FILE 4 FILE SIZE 19466 ATE 26 MAR 2687 TIM 15 1 ELAPSED TIME 00 02 19 5 Settings and the FILE INFO during and after the measurements The size of the file is equal to 1946 bytes and it is visible in the FILE INFO window The detailed description of the level meter file structure is given in App B The 1 file saved in the result files memory decreases the amount of the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE memory by the value of the file size 1946 bytes plus 4 bytes containing the addresses of the previous file and 4 bytes containing the address of the next file all togethe
328. eturns to the DELETE sub list a SETUP gt ENTER gt Boe EU gt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt 58 PRESS ANY DELETE RESULT FILES i LOGGER FILES gt ENTER gt SETUP FILES Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion After the execution of the setup files removing from the memory usually the FREE SPACE memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE rests the same as before the deletion but TOTAL AVAILABLE memory is increased It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRAGMENT in which all files are moved to the continuous space In order to illustrate it let us consider the removing from the memory the setup file named SET3 After this only the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased path MENU FILE FREE SPACE gt ENTER gt SET3 Deleted PRESS ANY a oa a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15833098 bytes 12852764 bytes 12855094 bytes TOTAL _ AVAILABLE L GGER FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15855764 bytes 15805792 bytes 15858858 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE 15505792 bytes 15836384 bytes 15505792 bytes 15836384 bytes Execution of
329. f Tab B 1 5 LOGGER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 6 B 21 G7 USER MANUAL RECORDER TRIGGER settings cf Tab B 1 7 EXTended I O settings cf Tab B 1 8 Special settings for profiles cf Tab B 1 9 SLM or Tab B 1 9 VLM Header of the FFT analysis cf Tab B 1 13 Header of the file from the logger cf Tab B 1 25 Contents of the file from the logger cf Tab B 1 26 and the description in B 2 1 File end marker cf Tab B 1 27 B 2 1 The contents of the files in the logger The records with the results and starting from the internal software version 2 30 the records with the state of the markers as well as the records with the breaks in the results registration are saved in the files in the logger B 2 1 1 Record with the results The contents of the record with the results depends on the selected device mode measurement function and the value set in the LOGGER position of the PROFILE x and SPECTRUM sub lists The following elements can be present in the given sequence 1 results of the measurement from the first profile if the corresponding LOGGER position was active paths MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 LOGGER PEAK MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 LOGGER MAX MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 LOGGER MIN INPUT PROFILE 1 LOGGER RMS up to four words are written lt result1 gt PEAK result depending on the value of BufferP 1 cf Tab B 1 9 lt result2 gt MAX result depending on the value of BufferP 1
330. f the INPUT list in the LEVEL METER mode seen enne 3 8 Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP list in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of sound 3 10 Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP list in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration 3 11 Control diagramvof the DISPLAY list retra roter ere prenne ertet rc rh RT RE 3 12 Control diagram of the FILE 18 2 2 2 4 1 01 0 enenenen trennen E VEEE or Ero TE T 3 15 Control diagram of the REPORT 3 16 Control diagram of the SETUP list in the RT60 mode sess ener nenne trennen 3 19 Control diagram of the SETUP list in sound mode eese 3 22 BATTERY windows with different sources powering the instrument SA 15 external DC power adapter a SA 17A external battery pack b internal batteries c and USB power 0 3 22 Displays with Battery icon a and in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY b 3 23 Display with LOW rene eee Pere tere pe estere IE Eee Fe nee recep 3 23 Displays with the Computer icon and in the BATTERY window b RN 3 23 SCREEN SETUP windows BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT activation et 3 23 Displays after switching on the instrument in sound b or vibration mode C sse 3 24 Displays in one profile
331. f the existing files by the new ones REPLACE 7 10 7 2 3 Controlling the measurement statistics savings SAVE STATISTICS 7 11 7 2 4 Controlling the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE 7 12 7 2 5 Direct access to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function DIRECT SAVE 7 15 7 2 6 Saving maximum values in the spectrum SAVE MAX SPECT 7 16 7 2 7 Saving the lowest values in the spectrum SAVE MIN SPECT 7 16 7 3 Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD 7 17 7 4 Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE 7 19 7 4 1 Deleting files with the main results RESULT FILES 7 20 7 4 2 Deleting logger files LOGGER FILES 7 22 7 4 3 Deleting files with setup settings SETUP FILES 7 24 7 5 Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL 7 26 7 5 1 Deleting all result files RESULT FILES 7 26 7 5 2 Deleting all logger files LOGGER FILES 7 27 7 5 3 Deleting all setup files SETUP FILES 7 28 7 6 Merging file space DEFRAGMENTATION 7 29 7 6 1 Merging result and setup files memory FILES DEFRAGMENTATION 7 30 7 6 2 Merging logger files memory LOGGER DEFRAGMENT 7 31 7 7 Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE 7 33 7 8 Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE 7 34 7 9 Saving setup files in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP 7 35 7 10 Loading the files with the setup settings LOAD SETUP 7 39 7 11 Connecting the external USB memory stick DIRECTORY 7 40 7 12 Copying files to the external USB me
332. fter pressing the ESC push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window one has to press the ENTER push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES SETUP FILES Press ENTER to DELETE Press EHTER to DELETE RESULT FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER
333. g the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window one has to press the ENTER push button a f DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES 1 FILES 2 LOGGER FILES 1 LOGGER FILES 1 SETUP FILES SETUP FILES Press ENTER to DEL ETE Fress EHTER to DELETE SETUP FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL Are uou Are uou s
334. gt push button 7 1 Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEXT The SAVE is used for storing data in the internal non volatile FLASH DISC memory files are always written at the beginning of a free continuous space as a file see Appendix B for the file formats In order to enter the window the user has to select the SAVE text in the FILE list using the A or push button and press the ENTER push button There are two available functions the SAVE NEXT save a file with the name increased by one and SAVE save a file with the edited name These functions are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE SAVE E_NRME BSOCT FILE HBME BODCT m NN Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT Press UP to EDIT SAVE window in the FILE list The name of the file in which the measurements results are to be saved is displayed above the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a file is displayed in the case of the first entering to this position after power on The default name consists of the day and the month s abbreviation The line of the file s name edition FILE NAME is opened after pressing the lt A gt push button The user skip the file s name edition and start saving file pressing the ENTER push button or return to the FILE list pressing the lt 5 gt one The edition process is present
335. gt push button a oa BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor b Note The calibration factor is always added to the results in the VIBRATION LEVEL METER mode VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and the FFT analysis modes 4 3 3 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of acoustic signal The calibration for the sound measurements can be done in the following way 1 Select the calibration by measurement highlight the BY MEASUREMENT text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the ENTER push button 4 5 G7 USER MANUAL 2 Attach the acoustic calibrator SV 30A or equivalent 114 dB 1000 Hz to the microphone of the instrument Notice It is also possible to use the pistonphone which generates the signal ca 124 dB or different type of acoustic calibrator dedicated for 12 microphones In any case before starting the calibration measurement the user has to set by means of the lt lt gt push buttons the level of the signal generated by the given calibrator CAL LEVEL position of BY MEASUREMENT sub list which is usually stated in the calibration certificate of the unit the value of the CAL LEVEL set by the producer of G7 is equal to 113 9 dB the calibration factor value for 7052H microphone is within the range of 6 to 7 default value is equal to 6
336. h preamplifier SC 26 3 SC 26 10 m preamplifier SC 26 3 SC 26 10 10 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 12 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 16 1 5 1 6 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 20 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 25 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 6 0 6 0 6 31 5 0 5 0 4 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 4 40 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 0 2 50 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 1 0 1 63 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 80 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 125 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 160 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 250 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 315 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 630 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1250 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G7 USER MANUAL A dB with preamplifier SC26 3m SC26 10m Effect of extension cable for the measurements with Z filter for Uin 1VRMS Free Field frequency response Effect of reflections and diffraction from the case of the SLM Srednia Case Effect Algorith 03 Algorithm 03 with SA22 Microphone 7052H response Algorithm 03 free field response Algorithm 03 with Case Comp Filter Typi
337. h closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window ao L1 Ll HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP m HEASUR SETUP HEASUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY 20 START DELAY EA IMTEGE PERIOD IMTEGE PERIOD is IMTEGE PERIOD CYCLE Inf CYCLE Inf CYCLE 6 n 2 il LOGGER DFF LOGGER oF LOGGER oO MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 10 seconds step A Notice The minimum delay period is equal to 0 second In the CALIBRATION mode the delay period is equal to 5 seconds 5 1 2 Setting the integration period INTEGR PERIOD The INTEGR PERIOD defines the period in which the signal is being averaged during the sound level measurements The definitions of the measurement results in which the integration period is used is 5 2 G7 USER MANUAL given in App D The required value of this parameter can be set by means of the lt lt gt and confirmed by the ENTER push button The integration period INTEGR PERIOD can be set by pressing the lt gt gt or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons From 1 s to 59 s with 1 second or 10 seconds step oa oa oa HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY DL START DELAY DL START DELAY oa oa oa MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY ls sTRRT DELAY ls srRRT DELAY ls PERIOD BES PERIOD PERIOD CLE Inf CYCLE Inf CYCLE Inf
338. h pressing of the mentioned above push buttons oa SAVE SETUP FILE MET SAVE oa SAVE SETUP oa oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE MET SAVE FILE MET FILE LES MET SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP S5H Delete 5H Insert 5Hz Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SRUE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete 5H Insert 5Ht Delete SH Insert oa SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE oa SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE id SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP S5H Delete 5H Inzert Press ENTER to SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete SH Insert oa L oa SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE MET FILE MET FILE MET SAVE SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert SH Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete SH Insert Display during the selection of the character 7 36 GZ USER MANUAL Ll SAVE SETUP FILE B SRUE ao SAVE SETUP FILE HAME LEM SRUE SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE HRHE LEM E ME FILE HRHME LEM SRUE SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ES
339. h the American Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA The value of q used in the calculations of DOSE D 8h and LAV is taken from the formula Q q 4log2 10 for Q 3 for Qz3 D 1 G7 USER MANUAL LT the threshold sound level is set in the THRESHOLD LEVEL path MENU INPUT DOSIMETER SETUP THRESHOLD LEVEL The available values are as follows None 75 dB 80 dB 85 dB or 90 dB the criterion sound level is set in the CRITERION LEVEL path MENU INPUT DOSIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEVEL The available values are as follows 80 dB 84 dB 85 dB or 90 dB L t sound level a function of time measured with the selected time constant IMPULSE FAST or SLOW path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER and the weighting filter equal to A C or Z calculated from the formula L t 20 log La t sound level a function of time depends on the selected threshold level In the case when the None option was selected 1440 14 In the other cases when the THRESHOLD LEVEL path MENU INPUT DOSIMETER SETUP THRESHOLD LEVEL is equal to 75 dB 80dB 85dB or 90dB this sound level is taken from the formula D 1 2 Definitions of the quantities measured in sound mode PEAK value The PEAK value Peak Sound Pressure or Peak Sound Level depends on the weighting filter W equal to A C or Z and is calculated for the given T from the formula xj In the case of the PEAK value saved as the main re
340. he measurement the overload flag ccc equals to 0 or 1 time of the measurement ccc value in seconds the PEAK value ccc the value in dB the MAX value ccc the value in dB the MIN value ccc the value in dB the SPL result ccc the value in dB the LEQ result ccc the value in dB the SEL result ccc the value in dB the Lden result ccc the value in dB k flag determining the kind of the result the LEPd result ccc the value in dB nn the value of Exposure Time in minutes the Ltm3 result ccc the value in dB Z the Ltm5 result ccc the value in dB L nn the value L of the nn statistics ccc the value in dB couozzaud c 3X lt Notice In the case of Lden the value k placed in the parenthesis after the code B denotes the kind of the currently measured result The kind of the Lden result depends on the time during which the measurements were performed d denotes day e denotes evening and n denotes night The corresponding values of k parameter and the kind of the measured Lden result are presented below 1 Ldresul 2 Le result k 3 Lderesult k 4 Ln result k 5 Lnd result k 6 Len result k 7 result 4 GZ USER MANUAL The codes of the results from the DOSE METER mode are defined as follows V the under range flag ccc equals to 0 when the overload did not occur 2 when the under range took place
341. he plane of microphone diaphragm Table C 9 Typical effect of vibration parallel to the plane of microphone diaphragm f Hz 15 6 31 25 62 5 125 250 500 1000 2000 Typical vibration 4899 54 98 57 19 5425 52 11 54 89 59 60 57 07 C 6 G7 USER MANUAL Effect of accessories Effect of the SA 22 windscreen 1 5 0 5 dB 25 15 0 250 a N N Lo N N N q N O CN N N N e LO e LO CN LO T T N N LO N o e T CD lo E ml y rT t Hz SA 22 Free Field Characteristics Table C 10 Effect of the SA 22 windscreen Frequency Hz 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 Effect of the SA 22 windscreen dB 0 06 0 06 0 08 010 0 08 0 16 0 20 0 30 0 35 0 43 Frequency Hz 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Effect of the SA 22 windscreen dB 0 45 0 41 0 12 0 10 0 02 0 18 0 20 0 77 0 73 1 48 Table C 11 ACO 7052H microphone s pressure free field correction coefficients for the 0 deg incidence Freq 20 25 RE 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
342. he user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the SAVE window SAVE No results PRESS ANY Display after the SAVE operation when there were no results for storing A Notice During the execution of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function an additional window is displayed informing about the operation performed In the case of short files this window can be unnoticed by the user uiJRHHzi uiJhHnHzi SAVE OPTIONS Saving Saved O K LOAD SAVE FILE 81 JAHAL SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE DELETE Press ESC to SKIF DELETE ALL SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation As it was already written it is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE is not active path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE The presented below sequence of displays illustrates the situation when during the name edition process the user selected the name which was used before The instrument displays a special message and waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list oa oa SAVE 280CTO used FILE SRUE 280
343. hlighted displayed 9 15 RS232 windows the possible settings of the BAUD 9 16 RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 1 second step nennen nennen 9 16 RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 10 seconds step et 9 16 SETUP list RTC text highlighted displayed inversely esee 9 16 RTC windows with the different parameters to be set et 9 17 SETUP list the RT60 AVERAGING text highlighted displayed inVeTSely eee 9 17 RT60 AVERAGING window the AVERAGING activation pp 9 17 RT60 AVERAGING window the AVERAGING CLEAR Selectigon pt 9 18 RT60 AVERAGING window the change of AVERAGING NO after measurement position is not accessible csse tse eue nb A es eee oe ta nn a een 9 18 RT60 selected the SETUP list and RT60 OPTIONS window opened eee 9 18 RT60 OPTIONS window the SMOOTHING selection with the step equal to 1 sse 9 19 RT60 OPTIONS window the SMOOTHING selection with the step equal to 5 see 9 19 RT60 OPTIONS window the NOISE MAR selection with 0 14 9 19 RT60 OPTIONS window the NOISE MAR selection with 1dB 9 19 RT60 RESULTS selected in the SETUP list and the RT60 RESULTS window opened 9 20 RT60 RESULTS window unmarking option in 1 3 octave
344. hree elements RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES In order to enter the selected sub list the user has to select the proper text to display it inversely using the lt A gt v lt lt lt gt gt push buttons and then press the ENTER one The DELETE window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt one 7 19 G7 USER MANUAL 7 4 1 Deleting files with the main results RESULT FILES In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed RESULT FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the A v lt gt gt push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved result files in the flash memory one has to press the ENTER push button In the case when the result files were not saved in the memory the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT RESULT FILES L GGER FILES SETUP FILES z ENTER gt RESULT FILES selected to be deleted and the flash memory does not contain any file After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the RESULT FILES entering is impossible In such case the me
345. ilable only on some markets 9 2 Return to the factory settings CLEAR SETUP The CLEAR SETUP enables the user to return to the default set up of the instrument In order to enter the position the user has to select the CLEAR SETUP text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER C MPEHSRTIOUN FILTER DAY TIME LIMITS EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHRL 170 SETUP SETUP list the CLEAR SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely G7 USER MANUAL After entering this position the request for the confirmation is displayed The proper answer for the request is selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The instrument returns to the default set up after pressing the ENTER push button in the case when the answer YES was chosen oa oa CLEAR SETUP CLEAR SETUP Are uou Are uou sure sure Displays with the request for the confirmation for the CLEAR SETUP execution During the clearing process the message WAIT is displayed The following message is displayed after the return to the default settings and the instrument waits for the user s reaction SETUP CLEARED PRESS ANY KEY Displays during and after the execution of the CLEAR SETUP function The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing any push button with an exception of the lt SHIFT gt and the lt ALT gt one 9 3 Compensation filter selec
346. ilable options SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD o SOURCE available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O for SLOPE o LEVEL available values 24 136 dB LOGGER TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the triggering in logger o TRIGGER available values LEVEL LEVEL SOURCE RMS 1 LEVEL available values 24 136 dB PRE available values 0 50 for LOGGER STEP equal to 100 ms gt 0 0 5 0 s POST available values 0 200 for LOGGER STEP equal to 100 ms gt 0 0 20 0 s RECORDER TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the trigger of recording TRIGGER available options SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD SOURCE available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O for SLOPE LEVEL available values 24 136 dB 1 mm s 10 km s GRADIENT for GRAD available values 1 dB ms 100 dB ms 3 6 G7 USER MANUAL DOSIMETER SETUP CRITERION LEVEL EET THRESHOLD LEVEL None EXCHANGE RATE 3 a DOSIMETER SETUP _ CRITERION LEVEL 9008 THRESHOLD LEVEL EXCHANGE RATE mm Control diagram of the INPUT list in the DOSE METER mode FFT AVERAGING LINEAR FILTER BAND 2 11 2kHz WINDOW KAISER BES LINES 1 LOGGER Control diagram of the INPUT list in the FFT mode 3 7 G7 USER MANUAL TRIGGER SETUP ETUP REP CVCLE Infi LOGGER H LOGGER STEP is LOGGER NRME LOGSON SH lt Delete SH Inser n PROFILEC1 FIL
347. ile 2 in mode 12 2 e the HP1 filter is selected in profile 3 in VLM mode 11 3 the FAST detector is selected in profile 1 in SLM mode 1 1 the IMPULSE detector is selected in profile 2 in SLM mode C0 2 the SLOW detector is selected in profile SLM mode C2 3 e the detector 1 0s is selected in profile 1 in VLM mode E4 1 e the detector 1 0s is selected in profile 2 in VLM mode E4 2 e the detector 1 0s is selected in profile 3 in VLM mode E4 3 e the logger is not filled by the results from profile 1 in SLM mode 0 1 the MAX values are stored in the files of the logger from profile 2 in SLM mode B2 2 the RMS values are stored in the files of the logger from profile 3 in SLM mode B4 3 e the results of 1 1 or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis are not stored in the files of the logger in SLM mode 60 e the results coming from profile 1 are not saved in mode in the logger s file G0 1 the PEAK P P and RMS results from profile 2 are saved in the logger s file in VLM mode G15 2 the PEAK and MAX results from profile 3 are saved in the logger s file in VLM mode G7 3 e the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results are not saved in the logger s file in VLM mode 90 e the measurement results has to be stored in a file of the logger every 200 millisecond d200 e the integration time is equal to 1 second 015 e the measurement has to be repeated 5 times K5 A 2 G7 USER MANUAL
348. in the 1 profile Result 1 2 reserved Result 1 3 maximal value MAX in the 1 profile Result 1 4 minimal value MIN in the 1 profile Result 1 5 SPL value in the 1s profile Result 1 6 LEQ value in the 1 profile Result 1 7 Lden value in the 1s profile G7 USER MANUAL Result 1 8 Ltm3 value in the 1 profile Ltm5 value in the 1st profile reserved 15 Resul t 11 reserved underrange value in the 1s profile 08 id mm sub block s length overload time PEAK value in the 2 profile reserved maximal value in the 2 profile minimal value MIN in the pm profile SPL value in the 27 profile LEQ value in the 274 profile Lden value in the 2 profile Ltm3 value in the 2 profile Ltm5 value in the 2 profile reserved reserved underrange value in the 2 profile 08 id mm sub block s length reserved PEAK value in the 3 profile reserved maximal value MAX in the 3 profile minimal value MIN in the 3 profile SPL value in the 3 profile LEQ value in the 3 profile Lden value in the 3 profile Ltm3 value in the 3 profile Ltm5 value in the 3 profile Result 3 1 0 reserved Result 3 1 1 reserved underrange value in the 3 profile 46 UnderRes 3 Table B 1 10 DM Main res
349. ing on the external USB memory stick is also available as an option Fast USB 1 1 interface 12 MHz creates real time link for the PC front end application of the G7 instrument The HOST USB functionality is also available The USB HOST controller installed in the instrument enables the user to connect to this meter the USB memory sticks USB hard disks USB printers etc A PC using the optional interfaces RS 232 or IrDA can also remotely control the instrument The measurement results can be downloaded to PC using all mentioned above interfaces The instrument is powered from four AA standard or rechargeable batteries i e NiMH separate charger is required The powering of the instrument from the External DC power source or the USB interface is also provided Robust and lightweight design accomplishes the exceptional features of this new generation instrument 1 1 G7 as Sound Level Meter amp Analyser e noise measurements SPL LEQ SEL Ltm3 Ltm5 and statistics with Type 1 IEC 61672 2002 accuracy in the frequency range 10 Hz 20 kHz with ACO 7052H microphone e parallel IMPULSE FAST and SLOW detectors for the measurements with A C or Z filters two measurement ranges 24 dB RMS A 118 dB PEAK LOW and 44 dB RMS A 141 dB PEAK HIGH e 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE real time analysis optional 15 filters with centre frequencies 1 Hz 16 kHz Type 1 IEC 1260 and 45 filters with centre frequencies 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Type 1
350. ion modes 2 3 G7 USER MANUAL e change the statistical class the number displayed after the letter L in one profile and 3 PROFILES modes of result s presentation Some other possible reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt Y The As v push buttons enable one in particular to e change the mode of result s presentation e select the proper character from the list in the text edition mode switch the active sub list in a list e programme the Real Time Clock RTC and TIMER e activate markers 1 and 4 Some other possible reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt v The lt A gt v push buttons pressed in conjunction in sequence with the lt SHIFT gt enable one in particular to e change the relation between the Y axis and X axis of all plots presented on the screen e switch the profiles in one profile and STATISTICS modes of result s presentation e switch the active profile in PROFILES mode of results presentation Some other possible reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters Markers The Markers enable the user to mark special events which occurred during the performed measurements i e the airplane flight the dog s barking the t
351. ion of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The following weighting filters are available in the case of the FFT analysis in sound mode e 2 type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard A type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards C type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards In the case of vibration mode during the FFT analysis the following filter is available Z type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard FFT FFT FFT AVERAGING LINEAR AVERAGING LINEAR AVERAGING LINEAR FILTER FILTER FILTER FFT window the FILTER selection in sound mode 5 6 3 Selecting the analysis band of the signal BAND The BAND position enables the user to select the band in which the narrow band analysis of the signal has to be performed The user has the following possibilities 22 4 kHz 11 2 kHz 5 6 kHz 2 8 kHz 1 4 kHz 700 Hz 350 Hz 175 Hz and 87 5 Hz 5 25 G7 USER MANUAL The selection of the required value is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button HRN HANA
352. ires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The RT60 AVERAGING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button RT60 AVERAGING AVERAGING RUERRGIHG zz AVERAGING AVERAGING CLEAR No AVERAGING CLEAR HO AUERAGING HO 8 AVERAGING HO 8 RT60 AVERAGING window the AVERAGING activation G7 USER MANUAL 9 14 2 Resetting the averaging process AVERAGING CLEAR The AVERAGING CLEAR enables the user to reset the averaging process All averaged results are lost if not saved In this position two options are available YES clear and NO The selection is made by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the selection requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The RT60 AVERAGING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button a oa AVERAGING AVERAGING AVERAGING HO AVERAGING HO RT60 AVERAGING window the AVERAGING CLEAR selection 9 14 3 RT 60 averaging number AVERAGING NO This line is only for indicating purpose It shows how many measurements were taken to the averaging process calculation The position is not accessible The RT 60 AVERAGING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button a a
353. is given in the Appendix B Storing the sound measurement results as files in the instrument s FLASH DISC can be done by means of the FILE list In order to open the FILE list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons the FILE text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Main list the FILE text highlighted displayed inversely The FILE list contains the following items SAVE SAVE OPTIONS LOAD DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION CATALOGUE FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIRECTORY COPY FILES TO USB MOVE FILES TO USB 7 2 enables one to save the measurement results as a file in the instruments memory enables one to set the options of the measurement result savings enables one to load to the working space of the instrument s memory the measurement results saved in a file enables one to delete a selected file from the instrument s memory enables one to delete all files from the instrument s memory enables one to consolidate the flash memory after deleting some files from it enables one to overview the catalogue of the files saved in the instrument s memory informs the user about the capacity of the instrument s memory still available for storing the measurement results enables one to save the setup as a file in the instrument memory enables one to load to the working space
354. is impossible and the message is displayed 8 12 G7 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If no files were saved in the instrument s memory then after pressing ENTER a special message is displayed and the unit waits for the reaction of the user In this time any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button the instrument returns to the REPORT list Display in the REPORT list the PRINT FILE position when no files were saved In the consecutive lines of the display the current file number the total number of the files the file name file type date and time of registration are presented The change of the current file with the unit step can be done pressing the lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button the first file is available and after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button the last one is displayed b 4 SODUND E 14 MAR 2887 E 14 MAR 2887 11 43 82 12 31 22 Displays during the selection of the file to be printed The contents of the selected file is sent out to a PC after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The following message is displayed on the display during the printing PRIHT FILE Printing Display during the execution of the PRINT FILE op
355. isting file The main measurement results cf App B Lpeak Lmin SPL LEQ Laen Ltm3 Ltm5 for SOUND LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT and RT60 Leeak Lmax Lmin SPL LEQ Laen Ltm3 Ltm5 LAV and TLAV for DOSE METER PEAK MAX MIN RMS VDV for VIBRATION LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT are calculated in the period set in the INTEGR PERIOD These results can be saved in the result files of the instrument s memory by means of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function path MENU FILE SAVE In the case the INTEGR PERIOD is greater than 9 seconds it can be done also by means of the AUTO SAVE operation The name of the file for that operation is set in the FILE NAME window path MENU FILE AUTO SAVE FILE NAME In the case the REP CYCLE is greater than one the AUTO SAVE operation will be performed after the period set in the INTEGR PERIOD The name of the file with the main results is changed after each saving 5 6 G7 USER MANUAL In the same when the LOGGER is On the partial measurement results are calculated in the period set in the LOGGER STEP Up to 12 results can be logged simultaneously from three independent profiles of the instrument PEAK MAX MIN RMS for sound measurements or PEAK P P MAX RMS for vibration measurements from each profile path MENU INPUT PROFILE x where x 1 2 and 3 with time step down to 2 ms These results are saved in one logger s file memory
356. itions e 1 1000 FFT analysis band LO LINEAR L1 EXPONENTIAL Window in FFT analysis ri FFTanalysis band 22 4 kHz r2 FFT analysis band 11 2 kHz r3 FFT analysis band 5 6 kHz r4 FFT analysis band 2 8 kHz r5 FFT analysis band 1 4 kHz r6 FFT analysis band 700 Hz r7 FFT analysis band 350 Hz r8 FFT analysis band 175 Hz r9 FFT analysis band 87 5 Hz Averaging in FFT analysis 0 HANNING 1 RECTANGLE w2 FLAT TOP w3 KAISER BESSEL Measure Triggering mode TriggerMode a0 LINEAR al EXPONENTIAL Source of the measure triggering Signal for measurement functions M1 M6 M7 TriggerSource mO switched off OFF Source of the measure triggering signal for measurement function M2 TriggerOctSource 1 SLOPE m2 SLOPE m3 LEVEL m4 LEVEL m5 GRAD 50 5 51 EXT IO A 18 00 SPL 1 SPL from the first profile onn number of the filter in 1 1 OCTAVE spectra e 8 NOct Noct 15 number of filters in 1 1 OCTAVE analysis There are respectively 8 125Hz 9 250Hz 15 16kHz GZ USER MANUAL Source of the measure triggering signal for measurement function M3 TriggerTerSource Measure Triggering level TriggerLev in SLM mode t0 SPL 1 SPL from the first profile tnn number of the filter 1 3 OCTAVE spectra 23 NTer 45 number of filters in 1 3 OCTAVE anal
357. l electrostatic and radio frequency criteria Warm up time 1 min for 0 1 dB accuracy 6 4 GF USER MANUAL Typical stabilisation time after change in environmental conditions is 1 minute Typical stabilisation time after change the temperature in environmental conditions by 20 C is 1 hour Notice When the instruments are moved from a warm environment with high humidity to a colder environment care should be taken not to produce condensation inside the instruments In this case much longer stabilization periods may be necessary Effect of humidity lt 0 5 dB for 30 lt RH lt 90 at 40 and 1000 Hz Effect of magnetic filed 15 dB A or 25 dB Z for 80 A m and 50 Hz Effect of radio frequency fields meet requirements of IEC 61672 1 The greatest susceptibility the least immunity is achieved when in the SLM the Z weighting filter and FAST time weighting are selected and the SPL measurements are considered The greatest susceptibility is achieved when the SLM is placed parallel to the radio frequency field In addition if there is an extension cable the greatest susceptibility is achieved when the SLM and cable is placed along field and the cable is coiled as solenoid Effect of electrostatic discharge meet requirements of IEC 61672 1 The electrostatic discharge may temporarily affect on the measurement results The influence disappears immediately in the absence of exposure to the electrostati
358. l character between the available options The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the SETUP list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the selection is not confirmed In order to activate IIDA SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING the user has to introduce a special code VALID CODE a ENTER CODE ENTER CODE 97124119 PRESS ANY KEY S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete SH Insert Displays during the entering of the access code to SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING The USB host interface can be used to control the external USB memory disk USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING with the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems or IrDA Infrared Data Association interface USB IrDA based on the dedicated circuit STIr4200 Notice The converter SV 55 serves as the 5 232 interface The SV 55 connection to the USB Host socket is detected and after successful detection the headphone icon is switched on The transmission using the SV 55 is possible only in the case when the instrument is not connected to a PC with the USB Device port Notice The connection to the USB Host socket the USB disk switches off the instrument s internal flash memory All file functions and remote commands are redirected to the USB disk The internal flash memory is acti
359. lace during the last measurement period and it lasted in the last second of the measurement the overload flag ccc equals to 0 or 1 time of the measurement ccc value in seconds the PEAK value ccc the value in dB the P P value ccc the value in dB the MAX value ccc the value in dB the RMS value ccc the value in dB the VDV value ccc the value in dB lt The exemplary results of the instruments response after sending to it the following sequence of characters 42 1 coming from the first profile are given below for the case of the SLM mode 2 1 2 0 39 125 4 107 0 20 6 581 7 102 1 0118 0 4 112 1 480 102 1 103 9 2105 4 L 01 107 9 L 10 107 6 L 20 107 2 L 30 102 8 L 40 99 0 L 50 96 7 L 60 82 5 L 70 54 5 L 80 20 9 L 90 20 4 b for the case of the DOSE METER mode 2 1 v3 V0 T60 P116 0 M113 0 N20 6 S20 9 D14 d6635 A98 2 R98 2 U116 0 u142 8 E0 04 e21 14 1 480 98 2 J71 4 Y103 1 2102 9 L 01 113 5 L 10 96 1 L 20 82 8 L 30 21 3 L 40 20 8 L 50 20 7 1 60 20 5 1 70 20 4 1 80 20 2 1 90 20 1 and for the case of the mode 312 1 v0 V0 T1 P93 9 099 7 M45 6 R45 6 H85 0 5 G7 USER MANUAL Notice The presented above order of the measurement results sent out by the instrument does not depend on the sequence of the characters sent to the unit Example After sending to the instrument the string 32 1 T2 R V P L the unit sends out the
360. le deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space After removing EXAMP4 from the memory only the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased path MENU FILE FREE SPACE a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE GEXAMPS Deleted PRESS ANY KEY 15795754 bytes 15831326 bytes 15856668 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE Execution of the 9EXAMPS file deletion and the influence of this process the memory space 7 21 G7 USER MANUAL The displays above illustrates the erasing from the flash memory another file named EXAMP5 which was also 1946 bytes long the FILES FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged while the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased 7 4 2 Deleting logger files LOGGER FILES In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the A v push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved logger files in the memory one has to press the ENTER push button In the case when the logger files were not saved in the memory the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt L DELETE RESULT FILES P LOGGER FILES gt ENTE
361. lifier 7052H measuring prepolarised free field microphone 1 2 nominal sensitivity 22 mV Pa polarisation O V e SV 30A acoustic calibrator or equivalent e g B amp K 4231 Accessories included SV 12L Microphone preamplifier SC 16 USB 1 1 cable SC 35 Cinch plug to BNC plug cable 2 m Accessories available SC 26 Extension cable TNC plug to TNC socket 3 m SA 17A External battery pack SA 22 Windscreen Measured quantities The measured quantities for SLM mode are PEAK SPL MAX MIN LEQ RMS SEL Ltm3 Ltm5 LEPd OVL Lnn and additionally the measured quantities for DOSE METER mode are DOSE D8 h LAV SEL8 PSEL E E 8h The definitions for mentioned parameters are given in Appendix D Additional functions Overload See chapter 3 or Appendix A Under range See Appendix A Battery state indication See chapter 3 Conformance testing This chapter contains the information needed to conduct conformance testing according to the IEC 616772 standard Mounting for acoustical tests The microphone ACO 7052H and preamplifier SV 12L can be connected to the instrument in two different ways e directly attached on meter e with microphone preamplifier holder connected with SLM with the SC 26 extension cable Electrical substitute for microphones To obtain a BNC type electrical input a microphone must be replaced by electrical microphone impedance and cartridge capacitance 18 pF
362. list using the lt A gt v lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one SETUP list the USB HOST PORT text highlighted displayed inversely The socket USB Host can be used to serve as the input of the different interfaces RS 232 or USB The RS 232 interface in the G7 instrument is available as a hardware option a special interface named as the SV 55 with a dedicated microprocessor has to be attached to the socket USB Host 9 25 G7 USER MANUAL The RS232 is the default setting in this window Only in this option the USB host controller is awaken and the power consumption is the lower one An error occurs in the case of the connection to the socket the peripheral device of the different type than the selected one L1 oa USB HOST PORT SB HOST PORT SB HOST PORT DN p5232 R5232 USE IrDA USE USB DISK USB DISK USB DISK SRT SRT SRT RECORDIHG WAVE RECORDING WAVE RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING EVENT RECORDING EUEHT RECORDING a USB HOST PORT USB HOST PORT _ USB HOST PORT _ RS2S2 1 RE232 USE IrDA USB DISK USB DISK USB DISK SPT RECORDING SET RELUR SRT_RECORDING WAWE RECORDING RECORDING EVENT RECORDING RECORDING Displays the USB HOST PORT 1 1 1 1 1 The selection of the socket s functionality is made with the lt A gt wv or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons which moves the specia
363. list with the DIRECTORY text selected a and the DIRECTORY window opened b 7 40 FILE Bist th DIRECTORY iet Dre ERI WN RH 7 41 FILE list with the COPY FILES TO USB text selected a and the COPY FILES window opened b 7 41 RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation b 7 41 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 42 Display after the execution of COPY FILES TO USB operation and when the file exists already 7 42 FILE list with the MOVE FILES TO USB text selected a and the MOVE FILES window opened b 7 42 RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the MOVE FILES USB operation the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation b 7 42 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 43 Display after the execution of MOVE FILES TO USB operation a and when the file already exists in the USB memory D ss E 7 43 Display in the main list the REPORT text highlighted displayed inversely
364. llowing sequence of characters 1 The instrument outputs in this case a file containing all control settings given in Tab A1 in the format 1 X ccc X ccc X ccc Example The following sequence of characters send by the instrument as an answer for the mentioned above request 1 U957 N6909 WL6 06 W6 06 2 Q0 2 Z1 V0 M1 R2 P1 F2 1 F3 2 F3 3 f0 13 1 12 2 11 3 C1 1 C0 2 C2 3 E4 1 E4 2 E 4 3 B0 1 B2 2 B15 3 b0 G0 1 G15 2 G7 3 g0 d200 D1s K5 L0 r1 w0 a0 m0 s0 06 t17 75 n100 p20 q30 025 k30 A0 e120 c2 h1 x3 y0 z0 T1 Y3 S0 Xx0 Xz0 Xc0 Xs3 Xn500 Xa1 Xv1 Xd1 XA0 XRO XSO XMO0 Xm0 XP0 XDO Xr0 Xp90 Xu1 XT0 XL75 XQ25 Xq100 means that e the G7 is investigated U957 e serial number of the instrument is 6909 N6909 e the LEVEL METER has the software version number 6 06 WL6 06 e the software version is 6 06 2 W6 06 2 e the calibration factor is equal to 0 2 dB 00 2 e the SOUND METER mode is selected currently Z1 the VOLTAGE input is off VO the LEVEL METER is selected as the measurement function M1 e the range is HIGH R2 e the current displayed profile is 1 P1 the A filter is selected in in SLM mode F2 1 e the C filter is selected in profile 2 in SLM mode F3 2 e and the C filter is selected in profile 3 in SLM mode F3 3 the HP filter is selected for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis 10 e the HP10 filter is selected in profile 1 in VLM mode 13 1 the HP3 filter is selected in prof
365. logging the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER BAND and LOGGER The SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button INPUT SPECTRUM SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE FILTER PROFILE 1 gt ENTER gt FULL PROFILE 2 LOGGER 1 PROFILE 3 a b SPECTRUM selected in the INPUT list and the SPECTRUM window opened in sound mode a and in vibration mode b 5 7 1 Selecting the weighting filter during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER The FILTER influences the calculations of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis In the case of sound measurements there are Z A and C filters available In the case of vibration measurements only Z filer is available and the position is not accessible after entering the SPECTRUM window The frequency characteristics of those filters are given in Appendix D The selection of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The following weighting filters are available in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis in sound mode e 2 type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards e type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards
366. lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER one The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button oa a RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER a a RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE SOURCE NERMERETE LEUEL TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE LEVEL b RECORDER TRIGGER windows the source selection for SLOPE a and SLOPE b 5 4 3 3 Selecting level for recording trigger LEVEL The level of the triggering signal for recording LEVEL can be set in 1 dB step or 10 dB steps from 24 dB to 136 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt In the case of vibration measurements the level can be expressed not only in decibels path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SCALE LOG but also in linear units placing in the path L N instead of LOG oa a oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE ORMSCII SOURCE ORMSCID SOURCE ORMSCIO SOURCE ORMSCID REE LELEL LEVEL LEUEL LEVEL LEVEL 3 LEVEL 1 LEVEL ORMSCIY ORMSCIY RMSCIY Ll Ll Ll RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL SOURCE RMSe13 SOURCE RMSe13 SO
367. lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the lt gt push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page 8 8 Ll PRIHTIHG um im PRINTING num aims Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection The printed statistics examples format A5 and A4 are presented below No 12800 13 27 14 C SVANTEK G7 2007 08 03 v6 06 6 06 2 TITLE SS Device mode SOUND METER Input Microphone Field correction FREE Outdoor filter Off Device function LEVEL METER LEVEL METER version 6 06 eas start date 2007 08 03 eas start hour 13 09 54 RANGE 6 0 vut easure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle 1 Start delay 1 s Integration time 1 Calibre acboris 0 6 dB Calibration by Measurement Calibration date 2007 08 03 Calibration hour 12 39 58 Leq integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Filter A Z Detector FAS FAST FAST Logger Non Non Non Sarees STATISTICS eres Measurement tim 00 01 00 Profile 1 2 3 dB A dB C dB 101 52 6 62 3 87 0 L02 50 6 60 2 854 5 L03 49 4 59 1 84 0 104 48 0 58 6 83 3 105 47 3 58 3 82 7 106 46 8 58 82 1 107 46 5 57 0 83
368. lt ESC gt push button MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR START DAY 83 MAR START DAY 83 MAR START DAY 83 MAR START DAY 83 MAR START HOUR Bi START HOUR START HOUR 1 START HOUR REPETITION REPETITION 4a REPETITION 11 REPETITION 11 xe TIMER windows setting REPETITION parameter 9 18 6 Description of the exemplary timer function execution The TIMER function is used to programme the instrument s switch on at the given time and perform the measurements with the parameters set in the INPUT sub list Let us assume that the user wants to switch on the instrument the 1 of February at 13 25 measure sound during 10 seconds without using logger and save the results in a RES2 In order to do this the user has to set the parameters of the TIMER function path MENU SETUP the measurement parameters path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP activate the AUTO SAVE function path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS named the file the FILE NAME window is opened after switching on the AUTO SAVE function and finely switched off the instrument HERSUR SETUP START DELAY is MODE NE IMTEGR PERIOD l s TIMER START DAY H1 FEB REP CYCLE START HOUR 13 25 LOGGER OFF CT SAL SAVE MAX SPECT 9 24 G7 USER MANUAL oa FILE NAME S5H Delete
369. ltage impulse on the EXT I O will be able to switch on the instrument however in this case the minimal duration of the trigger impulse of 100 msec is necessary with uprising voltage slope 3 DIGITAL OUT two different functions are available in this mode 3 1 3 2 C 34 FUNCTION TRIG PULSE when this function is selected the EXT VO terminal is set as output which enables one to trigger another instrument one instrument or more with trigger inputs connected together in parallel output trigger impulse meets specification given below a trigger impulse is generated before every measurement b output voltage range from 0 V or 3 V triggering slope uprising d output impedance 51 Ohm e duration of the impulse ca 30 usec FUNCTION ALARM PULSE when this function is selected the EXT I O terminal is set as output which changes its output level when current result of measurement exceeds user programmable threshold level In this case the EXT I O output operates as output of analogue comparator with user programmable threshold This feature enables one to control an external device as alarm indicator or similar electrical specification of this output as follows 0 V to voltage range 51 Ohm output impedance b output produces a voltage level not impulse C ACTIVE LEVEL setting may be selected by the user in menu as LOW or HIGH If HIGH is selected the output alternates from 0 V to 3 V till measur
370. means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and confirmed by the ENTER Any changes made in the window are not confirmed in the case of pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the window is closed a SETUP REFERENCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS INTEGRATION RS232 RTC SETUP list the SHIFT MODE text highlighted displayed inversely 9 17 1 lt SHIFT gt ALT push button working mode selection SHIFT In the SHIFT the user can choose between 2nd Fun and Shift When the Shift text is selected the lt SHIFT gt and ALT push buttons operates as in the keyboard of a computer in order to achieve 9 20 G7 USER MANUAL the desired result the second push button has to be pressed in conjunction with the lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt one When the 2nd Fun text is selected the lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt push button operates in the sequence with the other one In order to select a desired mode of the lt SHIFT gt push button the lt gt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored SHIFT MODE SHIFT MODE SHIFT SHIFT ST SP Hormal ST SP Hormal SHIFT MODE windows the available SHIFT settings 9 17 2 START STOP gt push button working mode selectio
371. mory stick COPY FILES TO USB 7 41 7 13 Moving files to the USB memory stick MOVE FILES TO USB 7 42 REPORTS PRINTING REPORT 8 1 8 1 Edition of the user s text to be added to the reports TITLE 8 3 8 2 Printing of the measurement results PRINT RESULTS 8 4 8 3 Printing of the statistics of sound measurement results PRINT STATISTICS 8 8 8 4 Printing of the measurement results from the selected file PRINT FILE 8 12 8 5 Printing of the logger results PRINT LOGGER 8 17 8 6 Printing of the coefficients of the user filters PRINT USER FILTERS 8 17 8 7 Printing of the file s catalogue PRINT CATALOGUE 8 19 8 8 Selection of the printing options OPTIONS 8 21 8 9 Selection of the format of the print out FORMAT 8 21 8 10 Controlling the paper ejection after print out EJECT P 8 22 G7 USER MANUAL SETUP MENU SETUP 9 1 Setting the language of the user interface LANGUAGE 9 2 Return to the factory settings CLEAR SETUP 9 3 Compensation filter selection COMPENSATION FILTER 9 4 Day time limits selection DAY TIME LIMITS 9 5 Exposure time setting EXPOSURE TIME 9 6 Setting parameters of the Ext MO port EXTERNAL I O SETUP 9 6 1 Mode selection of the Ext I O port MODE 9 6 2 Digital output function selection of the MO socket FUNCTION 9 6 3 Polarisation selection of the digital output signal POLARISATION 9 6 4 Active level selection of the digital output signal ACTIVE LEVEL 9 6 5 Source signal selection for the alarm pulse g
372. n a a a OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS SMOOTHIHG SMOOTHIHG i i SMOOTHING HOISE MAR HOISE MAR HOISE MAR RT60 OPTIONS window the NOISE MAR selection with 0 1dB step L oa oa RT60 OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS SMOOTHING SMOOTHING SMOOTHING i i 3 HOISE MAR BERSE HOISE HOISE Se RT60 OPTIONS window the NOISE MAR selection with 1dB step 9 16 Selection of RT60 results parameters RT60 RESULTS The RT60 RESULTS appears in the SETUP list after selection of the RT60 function in the MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS window path MEN FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION This sub list is opened after the selection of the RT60 AVERAGING text from the SETUP list by means of the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one 9 19 G7 USER MANUAL RT60 RESULTS RT60 RESULTS 21151 ye 1 21131 E 2 3 E 2 3 RTC RTEB AVERAGING IE1L21L31 OPTIONS 1 E CZ IE1L21L31 IE1L21L 31 3 88kHz 1 21 51 1151 1151 1151 i8 8kHz 271 RT60 RESULTS selected in the SETUP list and the RT60 RESULTS window opened By marking E 2 or unmarking the options the user can set to each 1 3 octave band which of the reverberation time results will be presented in the visualization levels e E EDT the E
373. n ST SP In the ST SP the user can choose between Normal and Inverse When the Normal text is selected the instrument reacts on each of the START STOP push button pressing starting or stopping the measurements When the Inverse text is selected the START STOP push button operates in conjunction or in a sequence with the lt SHIFT gt one The measurements are started or stopped after pressing both push buttons In order to select a desired mode of the START STOP push button the lt gt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the ESC push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored f oa SHIFT MODE SHIFT MODE SHIFT _Shift SHIFT _Shift STSP EEREN ST SP SHIFT MODE windows the available ST SP settings 9 17 3 Setting ten statistical levels STATISTICAL LEVELS The STATISTICAL LEVELS position is available only in the case of the sound measurements in the MODE sub list the SOUND METER position is selected In the STATISTICAL LEVELS it is possible to select which ten statistical levels named from N1 to N10 has to be calculated displayed and saved in the files together with the main results In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the STATISTICAL LEVELS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push
374. n mode is changed to one profile STATISTICS and LOGGER or FILE INFO if all of them are currently available after pressing the lt A gt or v push buttons o Low a N3 66 6dB EE 69 EmA 71 2dB alae PARE xS UEM E Do 07 E 00 04 E 00 81 BE Fils 260FT3S 2220 Displays during the measurement performed LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER the first three and after saving the results the last one 6 1 3 Setting on off statistics view SM STATISTICS The possibility of the statistics results presentation can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the STATISTICS text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored The STATISTICS mode is taken off from the DISPLAY MODES window in VM a a DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM a FILE INFO b FILE IMFO Setting on a and off b the accessibility of statistics presentation mode The display with the statistics analysis results presents in the graphical form the values from L01 to L99 The Lxx level selected by the cursor is displayed in the bottom line together with its value and units dB The P valu
375. n order to enter this window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER VIEW text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The LOGGER VIEW window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt 5 gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the ENTER push button the settings are confirmed 6 17 G7 USER MANUAL DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER IEW DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM VIEW text highlighted 6 2 3 1 Selection of the graphical presentation type VIEW In the VIEW position the EXTENDED FULL and NORMAL texts are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons These texts correspond to the slightly different data presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes oa oa a SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH ES AVERAGED AVERAGED 1 MAX oo CJ 2 13 MIN CJ SPECTRUM VIEW windows the VIEW selection 6 2 3 2 Selection of the spectrum type for the presentation TYPE In the TYPE position the AVERAGED INSTANTENOUS MAX and MIN texts are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons Each text corresponds to the different spectrum type to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes m oa oa a SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH UIEM EXTENDED UIEM UIEM EXTENDED UIEM EXTEHDED TEPE HUERRGED
376. n other cases reserved AO_Source in case of ANALOG OUT and AO_DA 0 A 1 C 2 Z in other cases reserved Polarisation in case of DIGITAL OUT and TRIG PULSE 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE in other cases reserved B 7 G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 9 SLM Special settings for profiles in the case of SLM mode Word number Name Comment Oxnn05 05 id nn block s length 0x0307 used profile profile s mask Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 1 detector type in the 1 profile 0 IMP 1 FAST 2 SLOW FilterP 1 filter type in the 1s profile 0 Z 2 A 3 C BufferP 1 logger contents in the 1 profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 MAX 4 MIN 8 RMS CalibrFactor 1 calibration factor 10 dB in the 1 profile ProfileFlags 1 flags in the 1s profile Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 2 detector type the 2 profile 0 IMP 1 FAST 2 SLOW FilterP 2 filter type in the 2 profile 0 Z 2 A 3 C BufferP 2 logger contents in the 274 profile defined as a sum of 0 none 1 PEAK 2 MAX 4 MIN 8 RMS CalibrFactor 2 calibration factor 10 dB in the 2 profile ProfileFlags 2 flags in the 2 profile B 8 Oxmm06 06 id mm sub block s length DetectorP 3 Detector type in the 3 profil
377. nce more to the FILE NAME window a FILE NAME FILE NAME GRESH INCORRECT FILE NAME SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY zHi Delete SH Insert Displays after the incorrect file name edition When the AUTO SAVE option is active N after starting the measurements by pressing the lt START STOP gt push button the results are saved in the file with the selected name Depending on the instrument s mode and selected options the sequence of the displays available after each pressing of the lt A gt or v could be as presented below SPL Fast 56 0 1 1 gt RS File RES111 7 13 G7 USER MANUAL oa FILE INFO SPL Fast A FILE 111 FILE SIZE 4666 DATE Bi APR 2667 x TIME B amp 86 58 ELAPSED TIME 68 37 Frofiletl File RES111 RHS 1 FILE 81065147 FILE amp LOGiI4 7 INFO RMS 1 45 FILE BRESII4 FILE SIZE 388B 531 DATE 83 APR 2087 wed TIME 06 58 24 ELAPSED TIME a3 17 E 1 19 Measurement results VM presented after pressing the lt A gt or v In the case when from a profile more than one result was saved in the logger s file the other results are presented after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt ALT gt one a FILE amp L G147 Li seems T ai d ssimmselt ai d7 L 2 79
378. nd the display s grid DISPLAY SCALE The DISPLAY SCALE sub list enables the user to change the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results and switch on off the grid In order to enter this list one has to press the lt ENTER gt push button on the inversely displayed DISPLAY SCALE text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The DISPLAY SCALE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt ESC gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the lt gt push button the settings are confirmed f a oa oa DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SETUP SC DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SC LOGGER VIEW SPECTRUM TYPE LOGGER MIEM LOGGER a b DISPLAY SETUP windows in SLM a in VLM b in FFT SM c and in 1 1 and 1 3 OCTAVE VM d 6 2 1 1 Setting the scale of the measurement results presentation SCALE The SCALE position is accessible only in the case of vibration measurements path MENU FUNCTION MODE VIBR METER Two options are available LIN linear and LOG logarithmic In the case of the first one the graphical presentation and the units both are linear In the latter case the graphical presentation is given in the logarithmic scale and the measurement results are expressed in decibels the result is related to the values set in the REFERENCE LEVEL path MENU SETUP REFERENCE LEVEL It is possible to set the requi
379. ndow The DATE and TIME of the SAVE operation are displayed in the fifth and sixth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt 7 20 G7 USER MANUAL oa DELETE garira FILE HO MSPECT21 FILE EXAMPS CSOUND 1 WIBR LEVEL METER CSOUND 1 amp LnaG2 LOG FILE amp L G4a8 28 MAR 2887 21 288r DATE 25 2887 15 01 04 15 04 46 TIME 17 13 48 Selection of the RESULT FILES to be deleted The selected file is deleted after pressing the ENTER push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DELETE sub list FILE H FILE 19MARE4 CENTERS gt gt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt gt Deleted 19 MAR 2887 18 48 28 PRESS ANY KEW L DELETE DELETE FILE HO RESULT FILES gt ENTER gt FILE NAME 19 65 LEUEL METER CSOUND LOG FILE DATE 19 MAR 2667 TIME 16 58 28 LOGGER FILES
380. ndows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measurements The characteristics of the filters are given in App D The selection of the required filter is made with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The user can enter the FILTER line in the PROFILE x sub list pressing the lt A gt v push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 5 3 2 RMS detector selection DETECTOR In the instrument the following RMS detectors are available IMPULSE FAST and SLOW in the case of sound measurements and 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s in the case of vibration measurements The selection of the required detector is made with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The user can enter the DETECTOR line in the PROFILE x sub list pressing the A v push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button FEOUFILEC3 PROFILEC2 gt PROFILECi gt FILTER FILTER A DETECTOR DETECTOR LOGGER PEHK L 1 LOGGER L 1 LOGGER MAY C J LOGGER MAY L LOGGER MIN C LOGGER C LOGGER RMS LOGGER
381. ng any time the lt ESC gt push button FFT FFT AUERAGING LINEAR LINEAR 2 2 2 22 4kHz 22 4kHz ETE HRHHIHG HRMHIMG EE 1 FFT window the LINES selection 5 26 G7 USER MANUAL 5 6 6 Enabling the FFT spectra time history logging LOGGER The LOGGER enables to record spectra of the FFT analysis in the logger file The activation of the logger is possible only if LOGGER functionality has been activated in the MEASUREMENT SETUP sublist path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER ON In order to switch on the logger of the FFT analysis the user has to press the lt gt gt push button and the ENTER one If instead of the ENTER push button the ESC one is pushed the selection is ignored and the FFT sub list is closed FFT FFT RUERRGING LINERR RUERRGING LINERR FILTER Z FILTER Z OZZ dkHz z HHHHIHG 13228 window the LOGGER activation 5 7 Selection of 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave spectrum parameters SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM appears in the INPUT list when the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE function is selected in the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE This sub list is opened after the selection of the SPECTRUM text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The SPECTRUM consists of the parameters which influence the calculation and
382. ng in the logger to be displayed after setting LOGGER as active tcs elencate Nd rate aiat tete 6 3 Measurement results in SM made with linear integration presented in one profile 6 3 Measurement results in VM presented in one profile mode essent rennen 6 4 Measurement results made with exponential integration in SM presented in one profile mode 6 4 Measurement results made with exponential integration in SM saved in the file named MAR11 presented in one profile mode e eee Et TO RU seein beste e doeet A 6 4 Displays with the statistics made with linear integration presented in one profile mode 22 2 2 1 6 5 Displays with the statistics made with exponential integration presented in one profile mode 6 5 Measurement results in SM and unknown profile presented with the biggest fonts in one profile mode 6 6 Measurement results in VM and unknow profile presented with the biggest fonts in one profile mode 6 6 Displays during the measurement performed in SOUND LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER EE 6 6 Displays during the measurement performed VM with the active LOGGER an envelope icon 6 7 Displays after stopping the measurements with the name of the logger s file the data are
383. ng the existing file changing the name and saving data All changes introduced to the file name during the edition are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE option was entered The return after the edition to the line with the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text is possible after pressing the v push button The simplified edition consists in the addition at the end of the file name the natural number The increase by one of the number is made automatically After the execution of the saving operation the new file name is displayed and the instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT In the next attempt of saving data the new name is displayed in the FILE NAME line and that name is increased by one during the saving operation SAVE SAVE FILE 2380CTS FILE 2380 T 1a SAVE MERT 2380CT10 SAVE MERT 2380CT11 Saved D K Saved D K Press ENTER to SAVE aus Press ENTER to SAVE aus Fress ESC to SKIP Fress ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Displays in the simplified edition of the file name and the execution of the saving operation The number can be changed from 0 to N The only limitation of the N value is the length of the file name which cannot be longer than eight characters In the case when such limitation i
384. not contain any file ppt 7 20 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 20 Selection of the RESULT FILES to be deleted eene 7 21 Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion iet rrt Ste e teens reete Poen 7 21 Execution of the 9 EXAMPA file deletion and the influence of this process the memory space 7 21 Execution of 5 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 21 G7 USER MANUAL LOGGER FILES selected to be deleted and the memory does not contain any file 22222121 7 22 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in 7 22 Selection of the LOGGER FILES to 2 2 40 4 1 00 000000000000 een rennen ennt 7 23 Execution of the LOGGER FILES deletion sees enne nette trennen nenne trennen 7 23 Execution of the amp LOG107 file deletion from the logger memory and its influence on the memory space LOGGER AV AILABEB oie tte te ee e ee Ee e este ee Tae Ion 7 23 Execution of the amp LOG113 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory 7 24 SETUP FILES selected to be deleted and the instrument s memory does not contain
385. nt from the master one e the source of any alarm signal in the case of certain circumstances occurred during the measurements i e the level of the input signal was higher than selected one The more detailed description of the Ext I O is given in App C To select the mode the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the line with the MODE text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes 10 SETUP AHALOG OUT DV L oa EXT 1 0 SETUP EXT 140 SETUP MODE DIGITAL IM MODE DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION EXT TRIGGER FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION NEG EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the MODE selection In the case of ANALOG OUT selection there are two options DIRECT and D A Digital Analog To select the option the user has to place a special character in the line with the option s name using lt lt gt lt gt gt and lt A gt v push buttons In the case of D A option the SOURCE position appears on the display The available sources are as follows C 2 1 Hz 2 Hz 20 Hz The selection of the SOURCE is made by means of lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER L I 0 SETUP EXT SETUP I SETUP EESTI ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT ol DIRECT y E 1 hl L L L I
386. nt s calibration CALIBRATION 4 2 4 3 1 The calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of acoustic signal 4 3 4 3 2 Calibration BY SENSITIVITY in the case of vibration signal 4 4 4 3 3 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of acoustic signal 4 5 4 3 4 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of vibration signal 4 7 4 3 5 History of the calibration LAST CALIBRATION 4 8 4 3 6 Automatic reading of a vibration transducer parameters TEDS 4 9 5 MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS SETTING INPUT 5 1 5 1 Selection of measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP 5 2 5 1 1 Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY 5 2 5 1 2 Setting the integration period INTEGR PERIOD 5 2 5 1 3 Setting the number of repetition of measurement cycles REP CYCLE 5 4 5 1 4 Logger functionality switching On Off LOGGER 5 5 5 1 5 Setting time period between two writings to the logger s file LOGGER STEP 5 5 5 1 6 Logger file name edition LOGGER NAME 5 6 5 2 Measurement range setting MEASUREMENT RANGE 5 7 5 3 Setting parameters in a profile PROFILE x 5 8 G7 USER MANUAL 5 3 1 Weighting filter selection in a profile FILTER 5 9 5 3 2 RMS detector selection DETECTOR 5 10 5 3 3 PEAK result selection for saving in logger s file LOGGER PEAK 5 10 5 3 4 MAX result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER 5 11 5 3 5 P P result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER P P 5 12 5 3 6 MIN result selection for saving in a logger
387. o perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 15 Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE not active pp 7 15 Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE nenne 7 16 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MAX SPECT in SM a and in VM b 7 16 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MIN SPECT in SM a and in VM 6 7 16 FILE list with the LOAD text highlighted displayed inversely seen 7 17 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 17 Display during the execution of the LOAD operation et 7 17 Exemplary contents of the LOAD WindgdgW et 7 18 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 et 7 18 Display during the execution of the loading function et 7 18 Displays after the execution of the LOAD operation sese trennen tren 7 18 Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a DOSE METER 7 19 Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a LEVEL METER 7 19 FILE list with the DELETE text highlighted displayed inversely pe 7 19 RESULT FILES selected to be deleted and the flash memory does
388. o press the ENTER push button which closes the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list Notice It is not possible to change the measurement function during the measurements The instrument displays in this case for about 3 seconds the text MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS In order to change the mode of the instrument the measurement must be finished 4 3Instrument s calibration CALIBRATION The instrument is factory calibrated with the supplied microphone for the standard environmental conditions Because the microphone sensitivity is a function of the temperature ambient pressure and humidity when the absolute sound pressure level value is important the calibration of the measurement channel has to be done In order to select a calibration function the user has to enter the CALIBRATION sub list to select the CALIBRATION text using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one when this text is displayed inversely The CALIBRATION sub list consists of four positions BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT which are used to perform the calibration LAST CALIBRATION which contains the list of the performed in the past the calibration measurements and the obtained results and TEDS which is used for automatical reading of vibration transducer parameters a MENU FUNCTION UMCT ION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCT IOM CALIBRAT LOM THPUT DISPLAY REPORT SETUP a b Displays with the main list the FUN
389. o print out the statistics of the measurement results this position is not available in the case of vibration measurements PRINT FILE that enables the user to print out on a printer the selected file with the measurement results or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT LOGGER that enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT USER FILTERS that enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument or to send them to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT CATALOGUE that enables the user to print out the catalogue of the files OPTIONS that enables the user to determine the options of the report ______ ___ _____ __ m FRIMT STATISTICS RINT FILE RINT STATISTICS PRINT LOGGER INT FILE PRINT USER FILTERS R PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT CATALOGUE FRIHT USER FILTERS REPORT windows in SM SOUND METER mode RESULTS REPORT REPORT PRINT RESULTS PRIHT RESULTS FILE PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows in the vibration mode 8 2 G7 05 MANUAL Notice All reports are printed in the character format using the ASCII set Notice The abb
390. o the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes ao EXT 1 0 SETUP DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION FUNCT LOH POLARISATION RCTIUE LEUEL LOW SOURCE 12 ALARM LEVEL 199 dB oa SETUP EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the FUNCTION selection 9 6 3 Polarisation selection of the digital output signal POLARISATION In the POLARISATION it is possible to select which polarisation of the signal negative or positive will be valid In order to select the polarisation the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the POLARISATION text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes L EXT SETUP EXT SETUP TAL OUT TAL OUT MODE DIGI MODE DIGI UNCTION TRIG PULSE TRIG PULSE F POLARISATION 5 EXTERNAL IO SETUP windows the selection 9 6 4 Active level selection of the digital output signal ACTIVE LEVEL In the ACTIVE LEVEL it is possible to select which level of the signal should be treated as a valid one negative or positive logic 9 9 G7 US
391. of a free continuous space as a file see Appendix B for the file formats In order to enter the window the user has to select the SAVE SETUP text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push button and press the ENTER one FILE DELETE ALL DEFRRGMENTRTIDH CATALOGUE FREE SPACE LOAD SETUP SAVE SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely the FILE list There are two available functions the SAVE NEXT save a setup file with the name increased by one and SAVE save a setup file with the edited name These functions are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 7 35 G7 USER MANUAL oa ao SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE SET FILE SET SAUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT Press UP to EDIT SAVE SETUP window in the FILE list The name of the file in which the setup settings are to be saved is displayed above the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a setup file is displayed in the case of the first entering to this position after power on The default file name for setup settings is SET The line of the setup file s name edition FILE NAME is opened after pressing the lt A gt push button The user can skip the setup file s name edition and start saving file pressing the lt ENTER gt push button or return to the FILE list pressing the lt ESC
392. of the DELETE ALL operation for all type files simultaneously 7 6 Merging file space DEFRAGMENTATION The DEFRAGMENTATION is used to make the file memory continuous All new files are saved starting from the beginning of the free memory space The memory occupied by the deleted file assuming that the file was not the last one remains unused for the next files saving After the removing a file the files memory becomes discontinuous with unused parts which cannot be utilized in the future The situation changes after the process called defragmentation During this process the files saved in the files memory are moved in order to obtain the continuous occupied space The files merging is performed separately for two parts of the instrument s memory the FILES DEFRAGMENT is used to join the result and setup files and LOGGER DEFRAGMENT is used in the case of the logger Before the defragmentation the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterizing the result memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE usually differ between each other After this operation these two parts are equal The same situation is in the case of the LOGGER FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterizing the logger file In order to enter the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list the user has to select the DEFRAGMENTATION text in the FILE list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt DELETE ALL DEF RAGMENTATIOM CATALOGUE
393. of the instrument when the calibration factor is set to 0 0 dB 1 Vnus 5 96 at 138 dB indication of the instrument when calibration factor is set to 0 0 dB Frequency Band 3 dB 1 0 Hz 22 6 kHz Output impedance 51 0 196 The user in MENU SETUP EXTERNAL I O SETUP window set one of EXT I O modes which are available in the instrument ANALOG OUT DIGITAL IN DIGITAL OUT 1 ANALOG OUT when the measured signal from the measurement channel is fed to EXT I O connector the output levels and the impedance are as shown above 2 DIGITAL IN when the EXT TRIGGER function is activated the external triggering of the instrument may be provided In order to do that the user has to select TRIGGER and to set SOURCE EXT IO path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER The external signal for triggering is specified as follows 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 Trigger voltage threshold level is set to 1 V Trigger voltage slope path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER set by the user as SLOPE uprising default or SLOPE falling auxiliary Minimal duration of the trigger impulse 10 useconds 100 hsec release time after previous measurement is necessary before next trigger Recommended trigger voltage should not exceed 5 V Input impedance in this DIGITAL IN mode ca 10 kOhm 100pF ESD type safety When the instrument is switched off in the DIGITAL IN mode the vo
394. of the instrument s memory the selected setup saved in a file this position appears only in case when external USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it informs the user about connected memory stick the free space on USB memory stick number of directory the number of files enables also to edit the name of the directory this position appears only in when the external USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it enables to copy files from the internal memory of the instrument to the connected USB memory stick this position appears only in case when USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it enables the user to move files from the internal memory of the instrument to the connected USB memory stick GZ USER MANUAL Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and A or lt SHIFT gt results a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list L RD DELETE DELETE RLL SAVE SETUP DEFRAGMENTATION FILE list of the instrument In each available position any change is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt ESC
395. ommunity noise performed in the outdoor monitoring station using SA 201A protection available values or 1 OUTDOOR AIRPORT it enables the user to switch on the compensation filter which should be used in a case of the measurements of the airport noise performed in the outdoor monitoring station available values or 1 EXTENSION CABLE it enables the user to switch off all compensation filters except the internal noise which should be done in a case of the measurements performed with the usage of the extension cable available values or DAY TIME LIMITS window which is available only for sound measurements specifies the time limits for the instrument to operate in the DOSE METER mode with the full 8h working time assumed available values 8 16 9h 17h EXPOSURE TIME window which is available only in sound mode available values 1 s 8h EXTERNAL SETUP ANALOG OUT DIGITAL IN FUNCTION EXT TRIGGER DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION POS NEG ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL LOW HIGH SOURCE PEAK 1 SPL 1 LEQ 1 ALARM LEVEL available values 30 0 dB 140 dB IEPE CURRENT it enables the user to select current IEPE supply available values 1 5 mA or 4 5 mA REFERENCE LEVELS inthe case of vibration measurements e it enables the user to set the reference level of the acceleration for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB deci
396. on VEL velocity and DIL displacement The selection is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER to confirm Ll Ll oa TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTALx windows the TYPE selection 6 2 4 2 Setting the calibration factor for the presented spectrum in VM CAL F In the CAL F the user can introduce CALIBRATION FACTOR value from 60 0 dB to 60 0 dB using lt gt gt push buttons with 0 1 dB step or using lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the lt SHIFT gt with 1 dB step In order to confirm all changes made in this window the user has to press the ENTER After pressing ESC the settings made there are ignored and the instrument returns to the TOTAL VALUES window Ll Ll oa TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 FILTER 51 TYPE BEC CAL F TOTALx windows CALIBRATION FACTOR setting 6 2 5 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation LOGGER VIEW The LOGGER VIEW enables the user to change the shape of the graphical presentation and a TIME parameter In order to enter this window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER VIEW text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The LOGGER VIEW window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt ESC gt the settings made there not confirmed or the ENTER push button the settings are confirmed L DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SETUP DISPLA
397. on the settings are confirmed a DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM LIE TOTAL WALUES LOGGER MIEM DISPLAY SETUP window the TOTAL VALUES text highlighted Ll oa L1 TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL D T TRL a TOTAL D T TRL 2 T TRL 2 T TRL 2 TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES windows the weighting filters selection in SM In the case of vibration mode after entering the TOTAL VALUES position on the display appears sub list with the TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 and TOTALS positions The selection of the position is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER for the confirmation a oa f TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL 2 TOTAL 3 TOTAL TOTAL VALUES windows VM the TOTAL selected In the TOTALx window for user filters S1 S2 S3 selected in the FILTER position the TYPE and CAL F positions appear on the display TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 FILTER EMEN FILTER FILTER FILTER ACC ACC ACC CAL F B CAL F B CAL F B 6 19 G7 USER MANUAL TOTAL 3 FILTER TOTAL x windows the weighting filters selection in VM 6 2 4 1 Selecting the type of the spectrum in VM to be presented TYPE In the TYPE three options are available ACC accelerati
398. on Level Meter Analyser VLM 1 Sound Level Meter Analyser SLM 6 UnitSubtype unit subtype 1 7 FileSysVersion file system version 8 LevelMetVersion level meter version 9 SoftwareSubversion software subversion Table B 1 3 USER s text dn Name Comment 0 OxnnO3 03 id nn block s length 1 title text the user s text two characters in a word finished with one or two null bytes B 2 G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 4 SLM Parameters and global settings in the case of SLM mode Word number Name Comment 0 04 04 id block s length MeasureStartDate measure start date MeasureStartTime measure start time DeviceFunction device function 1 LEVEL METER 2 11 OCTAVE analyser 3 1 3 OCTAVE analyser 4 DOSE METER 6 FFT analyser 8 RT60 function Measurelnput measurement input type 2 Microphone measurement range Range 1 LOW 2 HIGH UnitFlags calibration flags repetition cycle RepCycle 0 infinity nnnn number of repetitions 1 1000 NofProf number of profiles 3 StartDelay start delay time specified in seconds 0 60 IntTimeSec integration time specified in seconds field correction MicFieldCorr 0 FREE 1 DIFFUSE detector s type in the LEQ function Legint 0 LINEAR 1 EXPONENTIAL SpectrumFilter 1 1 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis filter 0 Z 2 A 3 C SpectrumBuff 1
399. ore the fulfilment of the triggering condition PRE In the PRE line the number of the results registered in the logger s file before the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be set This number is within the limits 0 50 and can be set with the step equal to one using the lt gt gt push buttons or with the step equal to 10 using the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt HERHSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER START DELAY z LEUEL LEUEL LEUEL RHS RHEL lada 18708 B B 5 Hs B B B HERSUR SETUP L GGER TRIGGER _ L GGER TRIGGER _ START DELAY 1 5 LEWEL LEWEL INTEGR PERIOD RMS i3 RMS 13 i 12 6 mis FY 12 6 mis mbes E 51 B fart irat LOGGER 105115 TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection in vibration mode Time period of the measurements which are saved in the logger before the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be calculated multiplying the value set in the PRE by the value set in the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display 5 19 G7 USER MANUAL Ll HERSUR SETUP START DELAY 11 5 IMTEGE PERIOD REP CYCLE L GGER oa LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL m HEASUR SETUP START DELAY 11 5 IMTEGE PERIOD CYCLE L1 LOG
400. other case the existing file is overwritten 12350CTS 12380CTS used Saved PRESS ANY KEY 55 ANY KEY Displays during the file saving when the REPLACE is switched off and on After pressing the ENTER push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the REPLACE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active N after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt 5 gt push button 7 2 3 Controlling the measurement statistics savings SAVE STATISTICS The SAVE STATISTICS is used to set self saving together with the measurement results the statistics of the measurements V to switch off this possibility Together with the measurements 100 class statistics are calculated the values named from 101 to 199 The activation or deactivation of the SAVE STATISTICS is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons Notice This position was created to save the memory of the instrument in the case when the knowledge of the statistics is not necessary Each registration of the statistics requires 600 bytes of the memory Ten selected statistic levels are always saved with the main results a f SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS SAVE
401. oustic signal is parallel to the microphone s grid with correction of SA 203 outdoor microphone kit effect EXTENSION CABLE in case of this option only internal noise compensation is switched on option can be used in case when the microphone is connected with the instrument by the cable 9 5 G7 USER MANUAL o a COMPENS FILTER COMPENS FILTER OMPENS FILTER OFF Off 1 FREE FIELD FREE FIELD FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR AIRPORT EXTENSION CABLE OUTDOOR AIRPORT OUTDOOR AIRPORT ERTEHSIUH CABLE EXTENSION CABLE 1 D 1 1 l 1 OUTDOOR EHUIROH 1 OUTDOOR EHUIROH OUTDOOR ENVIRON a Ll OMPENS FILTER OMPENS FILTER COMPENS FILTER off orf 1 off FREE FIELD FREE FIELD 1 FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD C 1 DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR EHUTROH OUTDOOR EMNUIRDH 1 OUTDOOR EHUIROH OUTDOOR AIRPORT 1 OUTDOOR AIRPORT J OUTDOOR AIRPORT EXTENSION CABLE EXTENSION CABLE CABLE Compensation filter window with all available options During the calibration by measurement the selected compensation filter is automatically switched off At the first measurement after the calibration on the display appears a question whether the user wants to switch on the filter which was switched on before the calibration again The selection of YES or NO is made with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and for confirmation the user has to press lt ENTER gt Aft
402. owing weighting filters are available in a profile of the instrument in the case of sound measurements e 7 type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard A type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards e type 1 according to the IEC 651 and IEC 61672 1 standards oa L1 PROFILE 3 PROFILE i gt PROFILECZ PROFILE x windows the selection of the weighting filter in SM in the case of acceleration measurements vibration HP1 HP3 10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg and Wb PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt PROFILECi gt FROFILECi gt FILTER S FILTER N FILTER DETECTOR 1 85 LOGGER 1 LOGGER LOGGER MAM 1 LOGGER MAM LOGGER RMS 1 LOGGER RMS L1 PROFILEC1 PROFILEC1 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter acceleration measurements in the case of velocity measurements vibration Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 and VelMF oa oa a a PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt FILTER EICHENEEEEEEENI acH FILTER EST Len LOGGER MAE LOGGER MAH LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements in the case of displacement measurements vibration Dil1 Dil3 and Dil10 5 9 G7 USER MANUAL PROFILE 4 gt PROFILE 4 gt PROFILE 4 gt FILTER FILTER SSC NN LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 wi
403. p log4 sSvn lt z HV_WH svn 4 4 tr x Seved Vin nnne 24 uo EE LL Qsavexxsvn amp logxxx svn 2 setup files main result files time history files Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation without the USB CHOST Notice The instrument s ogger memory is independent from the results and setup memory The capacity of the available memory is equal to 32 MB and is divided between logger 15 859 224 bytes and results and setup settings 16 252 428 bytes Notice The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required When the user connects to the instrument the USB memory stick the data storing in the internal instrument s memory is not available any more The user can only copy or move data from the internal memory of the device and store new data in the USB memory stick The scheme of the memory organization of the instrument with the USB memory stick connected is presented below 3 29 G7 USER MANUAL integration time results RAM load save setup SVAN 956 8 9 ONLY amp time1 srt 23MAR svn car1 svn set svn car2 svn amp time2 wav save1 svn amp log4svn 1 HV WH svn Qsave2svn E save3 svn S lt 1 200 222 I savexxx svn i s setup files main result files time history time domain amp log2 svn EX
404. path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 7 16 GZ USER MANUAL 7 3 Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD The LOAD is used for loading data file from the FLASH DISC e g for the verification or comparison The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the LOAD text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected using the A v lt lt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button FILE SAVE SAUE OPTIONS DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION FILE list with the LOAD text highlighted displayed inversely A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 3 seconds After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the file loading is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the LOAD window the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the ESC ENTER the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP push
405. power spectrum calculated in real time with Overlapping and linear averaging Overlapping factor gt 37 for 22 4 kHz band gt 6896 for 11 2 kHz band 8496 for 5 6 kHz band gt 9296 for 2 8 kHz band gt 96 for 1 4 kHz band C 26 gt 9876 gt 99 gt 99 gt 99 Time window for 700 Hz band for 350 Hz band for 175 Hz band for 87 5 Hz band Hanning Averaging Linear G7 USER MANUAL C 27 G7 USER MANUAL C 3 Specification of G7 as vibration level meter System configuration G7 with SV 39A seat accelerometer or 3032M2 accelerometer Accessories included SC 61 TNC to BNC integrated connector Accessories available SV 39A Seat Triaxial accelerometer 100 mV g 10 mV from 0 5 Hz to 3 kHz 3023M2 Triaxial accelerometer 10 mV g 1 mV ms 4 pin side connector hole mounting SC 39S Cable used to connect the Seat Accelerometer SV 39A or triaxial accelerometer 3023M2 System conforms to the ISO 8041 ISO 2631 1 ISO 5349 and ISO 10816 standards Notice With DYTRAN 3023M2 accelerometer the overall system specification conforms to the ISO 5349 standards for the Human Hand Arm response to the mechanical vibration meeting requirements for Type 1 Meter See Appendix C 1 for other available accessories Measured quantities The measured quantities in the vibration meter mode are RMS PEAK P P MTVV or MAX The definitions for mentioned parameters are given in Appen
406. push button when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the window and the return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 7 31 G7 USER MANUAL Ll oa LOGGER DEFRAG LOGGER DEFRAG Are uou Are uou sure EM sure Confirmation windows during the execution of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed and after few seconds instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed after pressing the ENTER push button on the active YES option the instrument checks whether the used logger files memory is continuous or not If this memory is continuous the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not executed and the special message is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list
407. push buttons and press the ENTER In the VIEW window one can select one of three mentioned above filters S1 S2 and S3 The selection of the filter in this sub list is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons oa SPECTRUM BASED IEWU EDIT SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the VIEW text highlighted The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the USER FILTERS sub list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button ignoring a change made in the position UIEM UIEM VIEW windows the filter selection After pressing the ENTER push button on the displayed inversely text the proper sub list is opened containing the values of the coefficients for all SPECTRUM BASED 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters It is not possible to change the values The selection of the displayed coefficients in the selected filter is performed by means of the lt A gt v push buttons S1 filter windows 9 20 1 2 Setting the coefficients of the user filters set EDIT The EDIT sub list enables the user to select which filters should be edited the available options are as follows S1 S2 S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the EDIT text in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER 9 29 G7 USER MANUAL oa SPECTRUM BASED
408. quired for their activation 1 7 Current list of G7 options and accessories The current list of G7 options and accessories are presented below G7 G7 2 G7 4 G7 5 G7 9 G7 10 G7 15 SV 55 SV 56 SA 22 Type 1 Sound amp Vibration Analyser including 1 1 octave analyser 1 8 octave analysis option for the G7 FFT analysis option for the G7 RT60 option for G7 Human Vibration filters option Dosimeter option for the G7 without SV 25 microphone Time domain signal recording to the USB Flash Disk srt or wav format RS232 interface option IrDA interface option Windscreen for 1 2 microphone G7 USER MANUAL SA 43 SA 45 SA 46 SA 47 G7 Carrying case for instrument and accessories Carrying case for instrument and accessories waterproof Carrying belt bag for instrument leather Carrying bag for instrument and accessories fabric material accessories included 7052H prepolarised microphone SV 12L preamplifier SC 16 cable SC 09A cable SA 22 windscreen SvanPC for Windows 2000 XP software G7 USER MANUAL 2 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE INSTRUMENT The control of the instrument is developed in the fully conversational way The user can operate the instrument by selecting the proper position from the MENU list Thanks to that the number of the control push buttons of the instrument is reduced to nine 2 1 MNOAAP WN H Control push buttons on the front panel On the front panel of the instrument th
409. r path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER is presented as the last element of the first line A C or Z The result of the measurement together with its unit dB for almost all results 96 for DOSE D 8h and OVL and Pa h for E and E 8h is given in the second line The profile the results are coming from is visible in the bottom of the display Profile 1 Profile 2 or Profile 3 The line showing the value of the result in the analogue like form together with the appropriate scale is presented at the left side of the display The real time clock is visible in the bottom right corner of the display The selection of the result is made pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons If the measurement results are saved in the internal memory in a file its name is presented under the profile s number 6 7 G7 USER MANUAL Measurement results from DOSE METER made with exponential integration presented in one profile mode 6 1 1 6 8 SPL Fast 55 Profileci3 LEQ Fast A 00 5 11 E Gh Fast A 0 00 Profileci3 h h Loa Fast A 91 9 1 19 DOSE Fast 0 Profileci3 SELS Fast A 95 1 Frafilecl L PSEL Fast 5 9 ap Profileci3 dix 1 19 MIN Fast 44 b 1 1 a DISPLAY MODES ECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER FILE IMFO oa DISPLAY MODES SPEC
410. r 1954 bytes The size of the logger files memory the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE is also decreased by the value of 2064bytes 8 bytes for the addresses 1682 bytes for the selected results from the profiles and 374 bytes for the additional information described in details in App B oa a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE Sj TOTAL AWAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE ei TOTAL AVAILABLE FREE SPACE window before and after saving the EXAMP4 and amp LOG100 files All four result files EXAMP1 EXAMP2 EXAMP3 and EXAMP4 and two logger files amp LOG100 and amp LOG101 described in the examples are visible in the CATALOGUE window path MENU FILE CATALOGUE 7 2 Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS The SAVE OPTIONS sub list is used for the selection of the options of data storing in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument The sub list is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the SAVE OPTIONS text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected using the lt A gt v2 7 9 G7 USER MANUAL lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button DELETE RLL DEFRAGMENTATION FILE list with the SAVE OPTIONS text highlighted displayed inversely It is possible to write data into the same part of the memory starting all the time with the same address RAM FIL
411. r FILE INFO if all of them are currently available after pressing the A or v push buttons 6 5 G7 USER MANUAL Measurement results in VM and unknow profile presented with the biggest fonts in one profile mode When the measurements are performed what is indicated on the display by the loudspeaker icon the clock displayed in the right bottom shows the current second of the measurement The value presented there belongs to the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD The envelope icon visible above and below indicates that the selected results from the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are logged o SPL Fast Z LEQ Lin SEL Lin Lin 60 8 aa 60 5 an 51 4 an 1134 1 59 Profile Profilec3 gt Profilec3 gt bini gie Fast we Fast o bin 60 0 5 80 7 87 5 an A 862 Profilecs gt Profile x Profile x Profile x n LT n ods n ode Displays during the measurement performed in SOUND LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER an envelope icon 6 6 G7 05 MANUAL RMS 2 TE 2 Tee 2 45 3 76 7 50 o 00 1 19 Frafileci Profileci3 2 Te 2 z MAX 2 nee 143 15 9 fey 3 11 2 Frofilecl X Frofilerl Prafileci X 00 91 99 01 Displays during the measurement performed VM with the active LOGGER an envelope icon The results can be saved using SAVE SAVE
412. r file i e during the execution of the AUTO SAVE function CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 in the CATALOGUE window 7 8 Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE The FREESPACE is used to read out the free space in the FLASHDISC memory of the instrument In order to enter the window the user has to select the FREE SPACE text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER CATALOGUE SAVE SETUP LOAD SETUP FREE SPACE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list The files memory in the instrument is divided into two separate parts One part is dedicated for saving the result and setup files and its size is equal to 16252428 bytes The second part is used for saving the logger files and its size is equal to 15859224 bytes The FREE SPACE window in the instrument after the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is presented below 7 34 G7 USER MANUAL a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE Aj TOTAL AWAILABLE FREE SPACE window after the execution of the DELETE ALL operation The FREE SPACE window contains four numbers First two named FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterize the result and setup files memory The files are always saved starting from the beginning of the continuous memory space The size in bytes of this space is gi
413. r the given T from the formula PEAK max a t In the case of the PEAK value saved as the main result T When the PEAK value is saved in the files of the logger time history T Tp P P value The P P result saved in the logger s file is calculated according to the formula P 0 aw t min 0 a w t For the result saved in the files of the logger time history T Tp MAX result The MAX result saved in the logger s file is calculated according to the formula MAX py t The MAX main result is calculated according to the formula pwy t for t 1second MTVV result The Maximum Transient Vibration Value MTVV saved as the main result is defined according to the ISO 8041 standard as MTVV max py t for 1 second RMS result The RMS result is calculated according to the formula 11 RMS 2 S For the RMS result saved in the files of the buffer time history T Tb VDV result The fourth power vibration dose value VDV expressed in meters per second taken to the power of 1 75 m s is calculated from the formula T A VDV f r t D 8 G7 USER MANUAL D 2 Frequency characteristics of the implemented digital filters D 2 1 Digital weighting filters implemented in sound mode The sound mode is selected in the MENU FUNCTION MODE window SOUND METER a FUNCTION MODE VIBRATION METER MEASUR
414. rain s drive etc The logger has to be switched on path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER On in order to activate the markers and one or more logger options LOGGER PEAK LOGGER MAX LOGGER MIN LOGGER RMS for sound measurements LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS for vibration measurements in profiles have to be chosen path MENU INPUT PROFILE x In order to enter the marker the user must press lt SHIFT gt and ALT push buttons simultaneously during the measurement The ENTER MARKER window opens and there are four available marker numbers To choose marker number 1 the user must press A push button number 2 lt gt number 3 lt gt gt and number 4 v The ENTER MARKER window closes automatically and chosen marker is activated after pressing lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt again active marker number will be highlighted In order to switch off the marker the user has to open the ENTER MARKER window and press this push button which refers to the marker to be switched off The current state of the markers is indicated in the logger s file cf App B for details and can be used to show them using dedicated presentation software 2 4 G7 USER MANUAL ow ENTER MARKER Display with the MARKERS after pressing lt ALT gt and lt SHIFT gt together rm Low Low rz ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER Bit Oo ow Ll ow Low
415. rection FREE Outdoor filter Off Device function DOSE METER eas start date 2007 08 03 eas start hour 14 03 56 E LOW Criterion level 80 dB Threshold level None Exchange rate 3 dB Exposure time 08h00 easure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle 1 Start delay 1 s Integration time 30 s Calibr factor 6 6 dB Calibration by Measurement Calibration date 2007 08 03 Calibration hour 12 39 58 Leq integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Profile 1 2 3 Filter A C Z Detector FAS FAST FAST Logger Non Non Non E ap is STATISTICS eee SDATISITICS Measurement tim 00 00 30 Profile 1 2 3 Profile 1 2 3 A dB C dB dB A dB C dB 101 56 592 0 71 0 L51 48 7 54 8 61 53 L02 55 8 59276 70 2 L52 48 6 54 7 61 3 L03 55 5 59 3 69 3 L53 48 5 54 7 61 2 104 55 72 59 0 68 7 L54 48 5 54 6 61 1 105 54 9 58 8 68 3 155 48 4 54 5 61 0 106 54 6 58 7 68 0 156 48 3 54 5 61 0 107 54 3 58 6 67 4 157 48 3 54 4 60 9 108 54 0 58 5 66 9 158 48 2 54 3 60 8 109 53 8 58 3 66 7 159 48 1 54 2 60 7 110 59 17 58 2 66 5 L60 48 1 54 2 60 6 L11 53 5 58 1 66 53 L61 48 0 54 1 60 5 L12 53 4 58 0 66 1 L62 47 9 54 0 60 4 113 53 2 5 9 65 9 L63 47 8 54 0 60 3 L14 Sogi SFB 6547 L64 47 8 33 9 60 2 L15 5249 Ds 65 6 L65 41 7 53 8 60 1 L16 52 8 571 6 65 4 L66 47 6 59 7 60 0 L17 52s 7 65 3 L67 47 5 53 6 597
416. red option using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing the ENTER push button The return without taking into account any change is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In the case of the sound measurements the SCALE position is not active All results are presented in the logarithmic scale DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE SCALE LOG K Z M odx JG DYHAMIC GBdB 200M 4 GRID w AUTOSCALE J GRID 4 AUTOSCALE Displays with the possible options of the vibration SCALE 6 14 G7 USER MANUAL RMS 1 RMS 1 45 B37 E114 cB Frafiletl Frafiletl Measurement results VM presented in linear a and logarithmic b scale 6 2 1 2 Scaling the vertical axis of the graphical mode presentation DYNAMIC The DYNAMIC enables the user to select the proper scaling of the graphical mode presentation In the case of the vertical axis one can obtain the double four times and eight times expansion as the default the vertical axis corresponds to 80 dB after expansion it corresponds to 40 dB 20 dB and 10 dB respectively using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation oa oa L1 oa DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LOG z LOG LOG LOG EZE SATX P TOIR GRID iE GRID
417. rements are not performed If the option is active V after pressing the ENTER and ALT push buttons the results are saved in the file with the automatically incremented name and the proper message is displayed for a few seconds The proper setting of the DIRECT SAVE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE OPTIONS window without RAM FILE position the selection of the DIRECT SAVE After pressing the ENTER push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the DIRECT SAVE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active N after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt 5 gt push button During the execution of the measurements pressing the ENTER and ALT push buttons causes disregarding the option set in the DIRECT SAVE that the message presented below is displayed MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The presented below displays illustrates the difference in the user interface execution after pressing the lt ENTER gt and lt ALT gt push buttons in the case when the measurements are not performed and the DIRECT SAVE is not active 1 and active V
418. resented below G7 USER MANUAL C SVANTEK TITLE Device mode INPUT orita ine e tens Field correction Device function G7 N SOUND M R Arenas Microphone FREE LEVEL 0 12800 2007 08 03 Outdoor filter LEVEL METER version v6 06 6 06 2 12 42 54 8 5 G7 USER MANUAL Meas start hour Measure trigger Repeat cycle Integration time Calibration by Calibration hour Profile 1 12 42 04 Off 2 10 s Measurement 12339258 2 3 Detector FAST Meas start date 2007 08 03 RANGE ss Logger trigger Off Start delay 1 Calibr factor 6 6 dB Calibration date 2007 08 03 Leq integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Filter A G Z Logger Non Non Non RESULTS Measurement tim 00 00 10 Prof 1 2 63 7 dB 68 9 dB MAX 48 5 dB 56 1 dB MIN 41 8 dB 50 2 dB SPL 48 5 dB 55 9 dB 44 0 53 0 dB SEL 54 0 dB 63 0 dB Ld 44 0 dB 53 0 dB 44 0 53 0 Ltm3 46 2 dB 55 4 dB Ltm5 47 5 dB 55 6 dB 101 49 5 56 5 dB 110 45 3 54 7 120 44 6 54 0 130 44 2 53 5 dB 140 43 8 53 1 dB L50 43 5 dB 52 7 160 43 2 52 3 dB L70 43 0 dB 51 9 dB L80 42 6 dB 51 4 dB L90 42 2 dB 51 0 dB 76 70 58 64 74 6
419. results of measurement coming from the first profile in predefined described above order 32 1 V0 T39 P125 4 R102 1 L 01 107 9 L 10 107 6 L 20 107 2 L 30 102 8 L 40 99 0 L 50 96 7 L 60 82 5 L 70 54 5 L 80 20 9 L 90 20 4 A Notice The value displayed on the screen during the result s presentation is sent out from the instrument in the case when nn is not given after X character A Notice All bytes of that transmission are ASCII characters A 4 Function 3 Read out of the measurement results in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode 3 function enables one to read out the current measurement results in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode 3 function format is defined as follows 3 The device responds sending the last measured spectrum when the instrument is in STOP state or currently measured spectrum when the instrument is in RUN state in the following format 3 lt Status Byte gt lt LSB of the transmission counter MSB of the transmission counter gt lt data byte gt lt data byte gt Status Byte gives the information about the current state of the instrument D7 D D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO where D7 means that overload does not happen means that overload appeared 0 1 D6 O means that spectrum is not averaged 1 0 means that spectrum is averaged the instantaneous current result RUN State 1 the final result STOP State DO to D4 reserved bits D5
420. reviation SM mode refers to the SOUND METER mode VM mode refers to the VIBRATION METER mode 8 1 Edition of the user s text to be added to the reports TITLE The TITLE enables the user to edit the text added to the file and to the report to be printed This operation is performed in the same way as it was described in the case of the FILE NAME window In order to enter the position the user has to select the TITLE text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt lt lt gt A lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons and press the ENTER one L REPORT REPORT PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT STATISTICS RIHT FILE PRINT LOGGER a PRINT USER FILTERS zib PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the TITLE selected in SM a and VM b The text edition is made using the A v lt lt gt lt gt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons The lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons are used for changing the position of the edited character The number counted from the beginning of the text of the edited character is displayed in the first line of the display in the brackets The text is limited to 128 characters oa TITLE C361 YAT a TITLE C351 HVRT a TITLE C181 TITLE 1 AIRPORT Hotel SH Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete SH gt Insert 5 1 SH gt Insert 3 DELetE SH Insert Displays in the text edition of the report s header The lt A gt
421. rkets 2 222 1 21 9 4 SETUP list the CLEAR SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely 9 4 Displays with the request for the confirmation for the CLEAR SETUP execution seen 9 5 Displays during and after the execution of the CLEAR SETUP function sese 9 5 SETUP list the COMPENSATION FILTER text highlighted displayed inversely pp 9 5 Compensation filter window with all available OptigmnS essere eene nnne eene ener 9 6 Displays with the question about switching on the compesation filter 3 9 6 SETUP list with the DAY TIME LIMITS text highlighted displayed inversely pe 9 6 Displays with the available DAY TIME LIMITS seen nennt trennen reete 9 6 SETUP list with the EXPOSURE TIME text highlighted displayed inversely pp 9 7 EXPOSURE TIME wihdOWs n reticere ettet eret eie otro aet ee ht eire bo eee Eee even actes 9 7 SETUP list the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text highlighted 9 7 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the MODE selection 4 9 8 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows D A selection 4 9 8 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the source selection for D A option pp 9 8 MEASURE TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection 4 9 9 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the FUNCTION selection 4 9 9 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the POLARISATION selection pt 9 9 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ACTIVE LEVEL selection pe 9 10 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the SOURCE selection
422. rking with 12 MHz clock Thanks to its speed it is widely used in all PC In the instrument the standard 4 pins socket is used described in details in Appendix C The USB Host interface can be used to connect the external USB Memory Stick or USB hard disk enabling the device to register virtually infinite sequence of measurement results The additional multi purpose input output socket called Ext I O is RCA Jack Cinch socket On this socket in the case when the Analogue Output functionality is selected the signal from the input of the analogue digital converter before the correction is available This signal can be registered using magnetic recorder or observed on the oscilloscope The Digital Input as another functionality serves as the external trigger while the Digital Output is used to generate the trigger pulse or alarm pulse from the instrument To the Ext Pow socket located on the bottom cover of the instrument dedicated for the connector type 5 5 2 1 mm the user can connect the external power 110 220 V mains adapter The instrument can be charged from the external DC source from 6 V to 15 V The current consumption depends on the voltage of the power supplier Notice Switch the power off before connecting the instrument to any other device e g a printer or a Personal Computer 2 6 G7 USER MANUAL Front panel of the G7 instrument in 1 1 scale 2 7 G7 USER MANUAL
423. rm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the OPTIONS sub list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the OPTIONS sub list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button oa oa ao OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS FORMAT A4 FORMAT FORMAT _Ad EJECT EJECT P OPTIONS windows the selection of the paper ejection The request is displayed after the printing of the measurement results the statistics of the results the contents of the selected file the contents of the selected file in the logger and the catalogue of the files PRINT RESULTS PRINT STATISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P position of the OPTIONS sub list The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page oa oa PRINTING PRINTING ae mE aaa mM Displays with the request for the confirmation of the paper ejection The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not eject a paper The instrument waits for the reaction of the user an
424. rns the following sequence of characters 7 IE For the unknown function and or in the case of the other error all these functions return the following sequence of characters 7 A 9 Function 9 Write in of the data file into the internal Flash Disc 9 function enables the user to write in the data file into the internal Flash disc memory The data file formats are given in Appendix B 9 function formats are defined as follows 4 2 FILE_LENGTH DATA the setup file where FILE_LENGTH length of the file in bytes DATA binary content of the file A 10 Control setting codes The control setting codes used in the G7 instrument the internal software revision 6 04 are given in the table below Table A 1 Control setting codes Group name Code description code Unit type U U957 read only Serial number N read only LEVEL METER software version Ww WLxxx revision number read only Software version WL Wyyy yyy revision number read only Calibration factor Q Qnnnn nnnn real number with the value of the calibration factor e 99 9 99 9 Met d Z Z0 VIBRATION METER Zi SOUND METER Voltagelnput Voltagelnput V VO off Vi on M1 LEVEL METER M2 1 1 OCTAVE analyser Measurement function M Mas OCTAVE analyser M4 DOSE METER 6 FFT analyser M8 RT60 R1 LOW pange R R2 HIGH P1 PROFILE 1 read only Results displayed on the screen P P2 PROFI
425. rns current real time clock settings in the format 7 RT hh mm ss DD MM YYYY where hh mm ss denote the time and DD MM YYYY gives the date 7 RT hh mm ss DD MM YYYY This function sets the current real time clock and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RT 7 AS This function returns current real time and date settings for the AutoStart function in the format 7 AS e hh mm DD Rhh Rmm where e 1 if AutoStart function is switched ON in SINGLE mode e 2 if AutoStart function is switched ON in MULTI mode or if it is switched OFF hh mm gives the time DD gives the day for the current date Rhh Rmm gives the repetitions time A 10 G7 USER MANUAL 7 AS e hh mm DD Rhh Rmm This function uses the given time and date settings for AutoStart function and returns the following sequence of characters 7 AS 7 1 Reserved 7 SC Reserved 7 DA This function deletes all files result files and setup files The function returns 7 DA This function is not accepted while the instrument is in the RUN state 7 LP Reserved 7 BP Reserved 7 ME This function returns the size of internal flash memory in format 7 ME FlashMB 7 LS setup_name This function loads setup and writes settings into EEPROM The selected file must exist The function returns 7 LS 7 SS This function creates setup file based on the current settings The function returns 7 SS 7 HO This function enables one to cali
426. s 2 averaged results G7 USER MANUAL RT60Method_p calculation method 1 DECAY 2 IMPULSE RT60Spectrum type of spectrum 1 11 OCTAVE 2 1 3 OCTAVE buff_step_p logger time step in milliseconds ResponseTime_p 1 30 Reserved reserved DispSmooth 0 15 NoiseMargin 0 20 10dB RT60Averaging d em RT60MeasureNo averaging number Table B 1 21 RT60 results block Name Comment 0x001B 1B id 00 block s length in the second word BlockLength 7 N2 1160 fregq N1 rt60 freq 1 N max total 9 LowestFreq the lowest 1 2 OCTAVE frequency 100 Hz 80 NTer _ NTotal N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq i N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq tercje tercje N max total 1 i N1 1160 freq N2 1160 freq i N_tercje tercje N max total 1 rt 20fi 1 1160 freq N2 rt60 freq tercje max total 1 rt 30 i N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq i N_tercje max total 1 i N1 1160 freq N2 1160 freq Huser i N_tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 i N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq tercje tercje N max total 1 i N1 1160 freq N2 1160 freq corel i N_tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 i N1 1160 freq N2 1160 freq corn tercje N_tercje N_max_total 1 cor rt user i i N1 rt60 freq N2 rt60 freq tercje tercj
427. s the 2 number In the case the directories do not exist these numbers are equal to zero The DIR NAME enables one to edit the directory name the 1 number or displays its name The help lines are placed at the display s bottom There are two ways of the current directory selection e the name edition in the DIR NAME line The default name consists of the day number and the month abbreviation The not existing directory will be created e the selection of the existing directory by means of the lt gt gt push buttons pressed in the line with the DIR NO text The name of the selected directory is displayed in the DIR NAME line The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the FILE list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the selection is not confirmed The selection of the directory is obligatory during the initialisation process In this case also the lt ESC gt push button confirms the settings DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY FREE SPACE 62977 EB FREE SPACE 62992 KB FREE SPACE 62997 DIR HO l 2 DIR HO 2 2 DIR H DIR 81 DIR 1 DIR 11JHH Please wait Counting files Edit directory name Edit directory name SH Delete 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete S5H Insert S5elect directory Contents of the DIRECTORY window In
428. s the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button L L R5232 R5232 R5232 R5232 BAUD RATE RATE ln RATE EELEE RATE H TIME OUT OUT TIME OUT 9 15 G7 USER MANUAL oa R5232 R5232 R5232 R5232 BAUC EIS RUD RATE AUG RATE PETS BAUD RATE IME OUT IME OUT RS232 windows the possible settings of the BAUD RATE 9 12 2 Setting time limit for the performance of serial interface operation TIME OUT The TIME OUT value shown in the inversely displayed line is increased or decreased by one with each pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step is increased decreased to ten after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one The default value of this parameter is equal to one but it can be too short period for the printers which are not too fast In such case the TIME OUT parameter has to be increased The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made in the window or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes made there L BAUD RATE 115266 BAUD RATE 115266 ERUD RATE TIME QUT TIME OUT RS232 window the setting of
429. s achieved and the instrument can not change automatically the file s name the only possibility is to edit new file name A Notice The files can be overwritten the use of the same file name without any warning if the REPLACE option is switched on path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE a SAVE SAVE FILE 12380CTS FILE 125 12380CT9 SAU 12380CT9 7 L Press ENTER to SAVE eaves mo Dum Press ENTER to SAVE EUN Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation As it was already written the instrument attempts to save a file after pressing the ENTER push button The saving is not possible in the case when the instrument is measuring the signal The special message is displayed for about 3 seconds in this case and the instrument returns to the SAVE window SAVE FILE HANE S30CTH MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation and the return to the SAVE NEXT The presented below message is displayed after trying to execute the save operation in the case when no measurements were performed and there are no results to be saved The instrument then waits 7 5 G7 USER MANUAL for the reaction of t
430. s are present on this list DISPLAY MODES enables one to select the mode of the measurement results presentation DISPLAY SETUP enables one to change the scale in the graphical modes of result s presentation and the parameters of the logger s result presentation LOGGER VIEW enables one to select and present the results stored in the logger s files SCREEN SETUP enables one to set the contrast and the switch on off the backlight timeout of the instrument s display BATTERY it informs the user about the source of powering of the instrument and current power supply voltage UNIT LABEL informs the user about the serial number of the instrument the version of the internal software and the standards to which conform the measurement results In each available position any change is performed by means of the and A v push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER SCREEH SETUP BATTERY UNIT LABEL Display with the DISPLAY list 6 1 Selection of the modes of measurement results presentation DISPLAY MODES The DISPLAY MODES sub list enables one the selection of the currently available modes of displaying the results of measurement The sel
431. s assume the settings presented below where one measurement is performed with the integration period equal to 10 seconds the statistics are not saved but this time the LOGGER is activated On The measurement results are saved in the file named oa oa a SAVE OPTIONS HERSUR SETUP FILE NAME START DELAY SKAMFS IMTEGE PERIOD m REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP lans LOGGER 105188 7 5Hi Delete SH Insert Settings before the execution of the measurements All together eight different results coming from PROFILE 1 PEAK MAX MIN and RMS PROFILE 2 PEAK and RMS and PROFILE 3 MAX and MIN path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are saved every 100 milliseconds Therefore during 10 seconds integration period it gives 10 10 100 RECORDS path MENU DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW each containing eight values each two bytes long All results are saved in the logger s file named amp LOG100 The exact size of the amp LOG100 is not displayed only the approximate value 2 kilobytes can be visible in the logger files delete window path MENU FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES L __PROFILEC2 PROFILECS3O LOGGER 15481 gt FILE HO L G FILE 6 06188 RECORDS 188 MAX MIH RMS 4 PO2 PERK RMS LOGGER RMS vl i E 5 Low a FILE INFO FILE INFO FILE ESAMPS FILE ESAMPS ZE 4666 IME 14 58 x ELAPSED TIME
432. s been already copied to the USB stick a message ALREADY EXIST is presented on the display as well as the name of the file D a a COPY FILES a6JnH Files Copied O K PRESS ANY KEY b ALREADY EXISTS D E P a Display after the execution of COPY FILES TO USB operation a and when the file exists already b 7 13 Moving files to the USB memory stick MOVE FILES TO USB The MOVE FILES TO USB is used for moving files from internal instruments memory to the USB memory stick The proper window is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the MOVE FILES TO USB text in the FILE list is displayed inversely The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button D FILES TUP FILES DIRECTORY 257 b Press EHTER to MOVE COPY FILES USE a FILE list with the MOVE FILES TO USB text selected a and the MOVE FILES window opened b The MOVE FILES TO USB sub list consists of three positions RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES and DIRECTORY position with the name of the file in which the files from the internal memory of the instrument will be stored In order to activate required position the user has to place the special character in the line with the RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES text using the lt gt gt or v push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when no option is selected the window is closed and
433. s file LOGGER MIN 5 12 5 3 7 RMS result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER RMS 5 12 5 4 Triggering mode and parameters selection TRIGGER SETUP 5 13 5 4 1 Trigger parameters setting MEASURE TRIGGER 5 13 5 4 2 Trigger parameters in logger setting LOGGER TRIGGER 5 16 5 4 3 Trigger parameters for recorder setting RECORDER TRIGGER 5 21 5 5 Selection of dose meter parameters DOSIMETER SETUP 5 23 5 5 1 Setting criterion sound level CRITERION LEVEL 5 23 5 5 2 Setting criterion sound level THRESHOLD LEVEL 5 24 5 5 3 Setting criterion sound level EXCHANGE RATE 5 24 5 6 Selection of FFT analysis parameters FFT 5 25 5 6 1 The averaging of spectra in the FFT analysis AVERAGING 5 25 5 6 2 Selecting the weighting filter during the FFT analysis FILTER 5 25 5 6 3 Selecting the analysis band of the signal BAND 5 25 5 6 4 Selecting the time window for the FFT analysis WINDOW 5 26 5 6 5 Selecting the number of the lines of FFT analysis LINES 5 26 5 6 6 Enabling the FFT spectra time history logging LOGGER 5 27 5 7 Selection of 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave spectrum parameters SPECTRUM 5 27 5 7 1 Selecting the weighting filter during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER5 27 5 7 2 Selecting the band during the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis BAND 5 28 5 7 3 Activation of logger for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results LOGGER 5 28 6 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE DISPLAY DISPLAY 6 1 6 1 Selection of the modes of measurem
434. s switched on T1 e the delay of the start of the measurements is equal to 3 seconds e the instrument is in the Stop state SO the ANALOG OUT is selected for MODE in the EXT SETUP Xx0 the TRIGGER PULSE is selected as the FUNCTION in the EXT I O SETUP 20 the LOW is selected as the ACTIVE LEVEL in the EXT I O SETUP 0 the PEAK value from the first profile is selected as the SOURCE in the EXT I O SETUP Xs3 the ALARM LEVEL set in the EXT SETUP is equal to 50 0 dB Xn500 e the reference level for the acceleration measurements is equal to 1 um s Xa1 e the reference level for the velocity measurements is equal to 1 nm s Xv1 e the reference level for the acceleration measurements is equal to 1 pm Xd1 e the auto save is switched off e the RAM file is switched off XRO e the statistics are not saved 50 the saving of Max spectrum is switched off XMO e the saving of Min spectrum is switched off 0 the in SAVE OPTIONS is switched off XPO the DIRECT SAVE in SAVE OPTIONS is switched off XDO the RPM measurement is switched on 0 the PULSE in the RPM measurement is set to 90 pulses rotation Xp90 the RPM is measured in RPM units Xu1 the TRIGGER in the LOGGER TRIGGER is set to OFF e the LEVEL in the LOGGER TRIGGER is set to 75 dB XL75 the PRE in the LOGGER TRIGGER is set to 25 XQ25 the POST in the
435. saved 6 7 Measurement results from DOSE METER made with exponential integration presented in one profile mode 6 8 DISPLAY MODES windows in SM SPECTRUM position accesible pp 6 8 DISPLAY MODES windows 1n VM iie Ds pre URP RECUPERA USER 6 8 Displays in SPECTRUM mode for 1 1 OCTAVE a 1 3 OCTAVE b and FFT eene 6 9 Setting on and off the accessibility of three profiles presentation mode pp 6 9 Measurement results in 3 PROFILES mode 4 6 9 Results in 3 PROFILES mode SM selection of the result in a Profile pp 6 10 Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the result in a profile esses 6 10 Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the PTofile et 6 10 Displays with the statistics made with linear integration presented in 3 PROFILES mode 6 10 Displays during the measurement performed in SM with the active LOGGER eee 6 11 Displays during the measurement performed in LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER the first three and after saving the results the last One 4 6 11 Setting on a and off b the accessibility of statistics presentation 6 11 Results presented in the statistics presentation InOde esses 6 12 Instrument s default Lxx levels presented in the graphical form et 6 12 Results presented in both statistic presentation modes et 6 12 Results presented in
436. second profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s available detector time constant in vibration measurements o IMP FAST SLOW available detector time constant in sound measurements LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the second profile o PEAK P P MAX RMS in the case of vibration measurements o PEAK MAX MIN RMS in the case of sound measurements PROFILE 3 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used in the third profile during the measurements 2 HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 01110 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb available filters in vibration measurements 2 A C available filters in sound measurements DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the third profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s available detector time constant in vibration measurements o IMP FAST SLOW available detector time constant in sound measurements LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the third profile 3 5 G7 USER MANUAL o PEAK MAX RMS in the case of vibration measurements o PEAK MAX MIN RMS in the case of sound measurements gt SPECTRUM sub list this sub list is not available in the case of the SLM or VLM it appears on the display in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyser e FILTER position a
437. sed for editing the name One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The available ASCII characters can be changed using the lt A gt or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons L1 oa Ll HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP Bs 5 1 5 LOGGER NAME 100514 1 LOGGER amp LDG13 iP LOGGER eLocil i S5H Delete 5H Inserz2 5Hz Delete 5H Inserz 5Hz Delete S5H Inser z LOGGER NAME edition in MEASUREMENT SETUP The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing the ENTER push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT one oa oa oa MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP REP CYCLE Inf PREP CYCLE Inf REP CYCLE Inf LOGGER on LOGGER on INCORRECT LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER STEP LOGGER NAME LOGGER STEP LOGGER aoa LOGGER LOGGER song SH Delete SH Inserz 5H Delete SH Inserz PRESS ANY KEV SH Delete SH gt Inser gt Displays during the attempt of overwriting the ex
438. sh buttons and press the ENTER one FILE DELETE DELETE RLL DEFRAGMENTATION FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP CATALOGUE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list In the case when the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the CATALOGUE the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the lt ESC gt lt ENTER gt the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP push button the instrument starts the measurement oa CATALOGUE HO FILES CATALOGUE window when the memory is empty In the case when the result and setup files memory in the instrument is not empty some files are stored another window is displayed in which the same data about the existing in the instrument files as in the FILE LOAD window are presented The current number of the file and the total number of the saved result and setup files is displayed in the first line of the window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE or
439. so the corresponding place remains empty In the case of sound measurements when the measurement result LEQ SEL Lden LEPd and Lxx depends on the linear RMS integration currently set in the RMS INTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION the L is placed instead of the letter S or I Fast Slow Impulse In the case of the exponential RMS integration the kind of this detector is displayed S or I 288 2 PEAK 647 mms 39 SEL ProFilecs Ise 18 s File i60CT 18 12 ns HMTUU 435 mrfst Profileci E 12 ue 11 1 _ Measurement results 3 PROFILES mode 6 9 G7 USER MANUAL The presented result in a selected profile is changed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons as presented below for sound and vibration measurements 79 2dB A zZ F E F Frofilecz Frofilecz Frofilecz Frofilecz 1246 iz 1E isis i26 Results in 3 PROFILES mode SM selection of the result in a profile n n n n GRE 288mms DOU 351nnm 5 75 Fcl 0X 00 00 04 Pos 2 amp 17nmm z 2 amp 17nmm z 2 amp 17nmm z 64 7 rms ES HTUU 2368 res HTUU 2368 refs HTUU 438 2 HTUU 4238s Profileci Profileci Profilecia Profilecia 17 50 File 13APRe Ee File 13RPRB och 138 File 13APRe och ET File 13hRPRB och Results in 3 PROFILES mode VM selection of the result in a profile
440. ss the lt ENTER gt push button in order to accept the measurement result The calibration factor is calculated stored and displayed cf next Figure after pressing the ENTER push button Notice The user has to press the lt ESC gt push button in order to quit the calibration procedure without saving the calibration factor oa Ll BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEVEL CAL LEUEL 113 98dB CAL RESULT a Displays after the measurements a and after the acceptance of the value of the calibration factor b 4 6 G7 USER MANUAL During the calibration by measurement the compensation filter set in the COMPENSATION FILTER window path SETUP COMPENSATION FILTER is automatically switched off At the first measurement after the calibration on the display appears a question whether the user wants to switch on the filter which was switched on before the calibration again The selection of YES or NO is made with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and for confirmation the user has to press ENTER After switching on the compensation filter the first measurement is made with 5 seconds delay OUTDOOR ENUIRDHN FREE FIELD DIFFUSE FIELD OUTDOOR AIRPORT compensation is OFF compensation is OFF compensation is OFF compensation is OFF Do you want to Do you want to you want to Do you want to switch it switch it switch it switch it HO ES Hd
441. ssage is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The same data about the existing in the instrument files as in the FILE LOAD window are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE RESULT FILES one pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line of the window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT or RT60 and the mode SOUND or VIBR are given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the DELETE wi
442. ssing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page Ll PRIHTIHG PRINTING E m num im Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection The similar message is displayed after sending out the statistics of the results the contents of the selected file the contents of the selected file in the logger and the catalogue of the files PRINT STATISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS and PRINT CATALOGUE The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer or a PC is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list Another message is presented and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user in the case when there is no data to be printed 8 7 G7 USER MANUAL PRIHT RESULTS TIME OUT PRESS ANY b PRESS ANY PRINT RESULTS Ho results a Displays during the results printing when there is no transfer a and no data b 8 3 Printing of the statistics of sound measurement results PRINT STATISTICS The PRINT STATISTICS enables the user to print the results of the statistics
443. stics of the Dill digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM D 19 Characteristics of the Dil3 digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM D 20 Characteristics of the Dil10 digital filter implemented for the displacement measurements in the VM D 20 SETUP and ENTER CODE windows the activation of human vibration option pp D 20 SETUP windows after the successful activation of human vibration Option D 20 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of old weighting filters in human vibration Option esses D 21 Characteristics of the W Bxy digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM sess D 21 Characteristics of the W Bz digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM see D 21 Characteristics of the H A digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM sees D 22 Characteristics of the W Bc digital filter implemented in the instrument in the VM pp D 22 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of new weighting filters in human vibration 22 240422221 D 23 Characteristics of the Wk digital filter implemented in the instrument in the eee D 23 Characteristics of the Wd digital filter implemented in the instrument in VJME eene D 24 Characteristics of the Wc digital filter implemented in the instrument in
444. sult T When the PEAK value is saved PEAK 20 og max 0 in the files of the logger time history T Tp SPL function The SPL function Sound Pressure Level gives an equivalent of the Sound Level Meter according to the IEC 651 Standard meeting the requirements for the Type 1 instrument The value of the functions depends on the weighting filter W equal to C or Z path MENU INPUT PROFILE FILTER and is calculated from the formula SPL 20 gl max Pull 0 where T the last second of the measurement D 2 G7 USER MANUAL MAX result The MAX result means the maximal value on the detector output for the integration period The MAX result for the period of 1 second is equal to the value of the SPL function The MAX result is calculated according to the formula MAX 20 Pall 0 In the case of the MAX value saved as the main result T Te When the MAX value is saved in the files of the logger time history T Tp MIN result The MIN result is calculated according to the formula MIN 20 gl mm eei 0 In the case of the MIN value saved as the main result T When the MIN value is saved in the files of the logger time history T Tp LEQ function The LEQ function enables the user to calculate the RMS value of sound pressure in the given time period The instrument operates as the standard Integrating Sound Level Meter and conforms to the IEC 804 Standard
445. sume the settings presented below where one measurement is performed with the integration period equal to 10 seconds nothing is saved in the logger but this time the statistics are also stored The measurement results are saved in the file named EXAMP2 ao L1 a HERSUR SETUP SAVE OPTIONS FILE NAME START oa FILE INFO DELAY ds IMTEGE PERIOD ifs CYCLE H FILE 2 FILE SIZE 1946 LOGGER M EA P 16 ELAPSED TIME 80 B88 10 SAUE MAX SPECT SHi Delete SH Insert Zs Settings and the FILE INFO after the performed measurements The size of the file is now equal to 1946 bytes and it is visible in the FILE INFO window The detailed description of the level meter file structure is given in App B The 2 file saved in the result files memory decreases the amount of the FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE memory by the value of the file size 1946 bytes plus 4 bytes containing the addresses of the previous file and 4 bytes containing the address of the next file all together 1954 bytes The size of the logger files memory the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE is not changed as the LOGGER path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP was not activated a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 2867624 8676 5865 255 FREE SPACE window before and after saving the 9 2 file 7 7 G7 USER MANUAL Example 3 Let u
446. sung amp Schall Wiedenrholunsen ITALIANO l schen Log Datei amp LOG Logger FLEMISH alles l schen Datum amp z MAR 2887 Loggerzeit is FRAH AIS Defragmentation Zeit 16 51 54 Logger Hame amp LOG16 oa DIiL LANGUAGE gt 1 FLEMISH n 1 FRANCAIS z AYARLARI S L SONU LARI YAZDIR 1 MAGYAR 6NGD B HD z L M T ISTRTISTIK HZDFR 1 POLSKI MRRUZ KAL ZAH DOSYAYI YAZDIR 1 EXT AYARI YAZICI HAFIZASI LOGGER HRHME amp L G16 CURRENT PRINT USER FILTERS Displays with the Turkish version of the user interface For activation of the Russian version of the user interface the special code has to be entered VALID CODE PRESS ANY KEY a ENTER CODE 1 411 a ABEK LANGUAGE gt _ FLEMISH FRANCAIS MAGYAR POLSKI P JCCEHPI TURKISH a ENTER CODE E SH Delete 5H Insert 5H Delete SH gt Insert Displays during the entering of the access code to the Russian version of the user interface Ll Ll RHGURGE gt FLEMISH I 3blk c LANGUAGE gt MAGUER HRETE BS PB TIPOEMBIP NEMATE MEER PEU POLSKI CURRENT 3KPRHR Her perdie Eno PYECKHH TURKISH CELME BEDA Displays with the Russian version of the user interface ava
447. t a FILE NAME Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME confirmation and return to the FILE list The edition of the file name in the FILE NAME window is performed almost in the same way as it was described in the case of the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt A v and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters including the starting special character which cannot be edited One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The available ASCII characters can be changed using the lt A gt or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one Additionally the character can be also changed using the A or v push button this functionality is not available in the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons The edition is finished after pressing the ENTER push button The edited name is compared with the file names existing in the catalogue In the case when the file with the same name already exists the special message is displayed and after pressing any character except the lt SHIFT gt or ALT one the instrument returns o
448. t lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER SETUP RTC SHIF T MODE STATISTICAL LEUELS USB HOST PORT SETUP list the USER FILTERS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 20 1 Setting filter coefficients for octave analysis SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS The SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS sub list enables the user to introduce the values of the filter coefficients correcting the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis The results of the analysis the TOTAL values can be modified by the introduced factors In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the USER FILTERS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER The USER FILTERS sub list contains 3 sub lists VIEW EDIT and CLEAR 9 28 G7 USER MANUAL USER FILTERS USER FILTERS windows SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected 9 20 1 1 Looking at the coefficients of the user filters set VIEW The VIEW sub list enables one to look at the coefficients of the USER FILTERS sets saved in the instrument under the names 1 S2 S3 The coefficients can be set by the user in the instrument by means of the EDIT option or sent to it together with the name by means of the interface using 6 function cf App A for the description In order to enter the sub list the user has to select in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list the VIEW text using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt
449. t gt gt lt SHIFT gt RMSCL 57 LEVEL 1_ LELEL GRADIENT GRADIENT MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB ms and 10 dB ms step up MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD SOURCE RHEI lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt 5OURCE RMEL source 1 RHECIA 1 LEUEL LEW LEUEL BRRDIEHT GRADIENT EE MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB ms up and 1 dB ms down 5 4 2 Trigger parameters in logger setting LOGGER TRIGGER The LOGGER TRIGGER parameters influence the way the measurement results are saved in the logger It is a contexts sub list in which the triggering in logger can be switched off or on TRIGGER in the case when on LEVEL the source of the triggering signal is determined SOURCE its level can be selected LEVEL the number of the results saved in the logger before the fulfilment of the triggering condition PRE and the number of the results saved in the logger after 5 16 G7 USER MANUAL the fulfilment of the triggering condition POST If the triggering signal is greater than the selected in the LEVEL the logger contains e the measurement results registered directly before the fulfilment of the triggering condition time of the registration can be calculated by multiplying the value set in the PRE by the
450. t gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE LOG SCALE LOG D HRMIC 88dB D HRMIC BBdB 4 200M 21 200M 1 ix GRID GRID AUTOSCALE 1 AUTOSCALE Displays with the com switched on and off 6 2 1 5 Switching on off the autoscale in the graphical mode presentation AUTOSCALE The AUTOSCALE enables the user to switch on or off the autoscaling of the plot in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE spectrum presentation mode The activation deactivation of autoscale is made by placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the AUTOSCALE text by means of the 6 16 G7 USER MANUAL push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored oa oa DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LOG LOG B BdB S8dB 1 ix 421 GRID TV GRID 3 TV AUTOSCALE AUTOSCALE Displays with the autoscale switched on and off 6 2 2 Selection of the Spectrum Type in VM SPECTRUM TYPE The SPECTRUM TYPE enables the user to change the spe
451. t gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt ILE HO 1189 FILE H ILE 19 ILE 19 LEVEL METER LEVEL METER E 19 MAR 2887 E 19 MAR 2887 16 16 68 16 58 28 Exemplary contents of the LOAD window Notice Many result files can be associated with one logger file i e during the execution of the AUTO SAVE function Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing the ENTER push button The message with the name of the selected file is displayed during the execution of the loading operation 4 O1JAH1I9 Loading Display during the execution of the loading function The next message is displayed after successful end of loading operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list OLJAN21 GRESi Loaded Loaded Loaded RLL PRESS ANY KEY PRE 5 ANY 5 ANY KEY lt A KEY gt LCEFRAGMENTATION Displays after the execution of the LOAD operation 7 18 G7 USER MANUAL The contents of the loade
452. t lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt 7 22 G7 USER MANUAL DELETE DELETE FILE HO ESCIGUE 16 13 16 FILE HO L G FILE amp L0G111 LOG FILE LOGS L B FILE 8108118 L G FILE amp L0G111 L G SIZE 1 KB L G SI2E 2 KB L G SIZE 1 KB L G SIZE 1 KB PC15 PERK MAS RMS Pc132 PEHE MAs RMS lt 12 MAR RMSI PCIS PEREK RMS Pe2o PEAK MAS 22 RMS PC2o PEAK 2 gt MAX MIH RMS 52 MAX RKMS PC33 MHA 52 RMS lt 52 RMS Selection of the LOGGER FILES to be deleted The selected file is deleted after pressing the ENTER push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DELETE sub list H i gt lt ENTER gt gt amp LOG111 gt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt Deleted MIH RMS Po2o PEAK MAS RHS POSo PEAK RMS PRESS ANY KEW DELETE ists gt ENTER gt SETH
453. t push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button SETUP SETUP SETUP EXTERHAL SETUP APP RS232 Al SHIFT CLEAR SETUP RTC steer Eee LEVELS COMPEHMSATION FILTER SHIFT MODE DAY TIME LIMITS STATISTICAL LEWELS USB HOST PORT EXPOSURE TIME RMS IHTEGRHTIDH IMER USER FILTERS EXTERHRL 170 SETUP SETUP list in the SM A Notice The abbreviation SM Sound Mode refers to the sound mode SOUND METER and the proper functions dedicated for the measurement and analysis of the acoustic signal LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT DOSIMETER and RT60 VM Vibration Mode refers to the vibration mode VIBRATION METER and the proper functions dedicated for the measurement and analysis of the vibration signal LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT S REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS INTEGRATION ER S232 USB HOST PORT USER FILTERS WIBRATION UNITS E LEVELS REMOTE SETUP list in the VM 9 1 Setting the language of the user interface LANGUAGE The LANGUAGE enables one to select the language of the user interface In order to enter the list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LANGUAGE text of the SETUP list The sel
454. t the result is displayed on the display in the bottom line a ow o BY HERSUREHEHT BY HERSUREHEHT BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEWEL CAL LEWEL CAL LEWEL 146 906 CAL MEASURE RMS 4 7 G7 USER MANUAL Displays during the calibration measurements oa oa MEASUREMENT EY MEASUREMENT CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL 148 dB CAL RESULT EHEHE Displays after the calibration measurements The calibration procedure should be repeated a few times to ensure the integrity of the calibration The obtained results should be almost identical with 0 1 dB difference The reasons for unstable results are as follows e the calibrator is not properly attached to the instrument e there are external disturbances e the calibrator or the measurement channel the accelerometer or the instrument itself are damaged A Note During the calibration period external disturbances vibrations or acoustic noise should not exceed 100 dB 5 Press the lt ENTER gt push button in order to accept the measurement result The calibration factor is calculated stored and displayed cf Fig below for logarithmic and linear scale path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SCALE after pressing the ENTER push button Ll BY HERSUREHEHT L BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEVEL gt lt ENTER gt gt CAL LEVEL oa MEASUREMENT CAL LEVEL gt lt ENTER gt gt Displays after pressing the lt ENTER gt push bu
455. t date 2007 08 06 Meas start hour 17 52 52 Range HIGH Ref level for Acc 1 um s2 Ref level for Vel 1 nm s Ref level for Dil 1 pm Measure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle 1 Start delay 1 s Integration time 30 s Calibr factor 0 0 dB RMS integration Linear Spectrum filter Z Spectrum in logger None Profile 1 2 3 Filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Detector 1205 1 05 1 05 Logger Non Non Non RESULTS Measurement time 00 00 30 Prof 1 2 3 PEAK 794mm s2 525mm s2 543mm s2 1 36 m s2 1 00 m s2 989mm s2 MAX 282mm s2 150mm s2 79 4mm s2 RMS 122mm s2 93 3mm s2 62 4mm s2 VDV 442mm sX 305mm sX 204mm sX Remark X 1 75 1 3 OCTAVE m s2 04e 02 98e 02 68e 02 98e 02 88e 02 32e 02 02e 02 16e 02 03e 02 70 02 79e 02 38e 02 85e 02 3 0 OOF 6 C0 PO PO IB EB EF OO s NO P2 NO 4 C C0 Po P2 CO w 8 14 S ES CS OO 0 QOO OD c o0 NO CO 10 12 16 20 25 31 40 50 80 100 125 160 200 Fi HP
456. tBand band of the FFT analysis 1 22 4 kHz 2 11 2 kHz 3 5 6 kHz 4 2 8 kHz 5 1 4 kHz 6 700 Hz 7 350 2 8 175 2 9 87 5 2 FftWindow window in the FFT analysis 0 HANNING 1 RECTANGLE 2 FLAT TOP 3 KAISER BESSEL FftAverag type of averaging in the FFT analysis 0 LINEAR FftSampFreq sampling frequency I 41 reserved Table B 1 14 FFT analysis results word Name Comment number 0x0012 12 id O block is longer than 256 words the length is given in the second word FftBlockLength 2 NFftTot 2 1920 1 1923 FFTIi value of the FFT line 10 dB i 1 1921 Table B 1 15 Statistical levels Word number Comment 17 id nn block s length pp used profile rr profile s mask number of statistical levels N number of the Lnn statistics 0 1 value of the Lnn statistics for profile p p 1 pp G7 USER MANUAL Table B 1 16 Header of the statistical analysis in profiles Mh Name Comment 0 0 09 09 id nn block s length 1 0x0703 03 number of profiles 07 active profiles mask 2 Oxmm0A 0 id mm sub block s length 3 NofClasses 1 number of classes in the 1 profile 120 4 BottomClass 1 bottom class boundary 10 dB in the 1s profile 5 ClassWidth 1 class width 10 dB in the 1s
457. tant the results are displayed with the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x DETECTOR Fast Slow or Impulse When this option is selected in vibraton mode the value of the RMS function depends on the detector time constant 9 12 Setting the parameters of the serial interface RS232 The RS232 enables the user to programme the RS232 interface transmission speed BAUD RATE and to set the time limit before which the interface operation should be performed TIME OUT In order to enter the position the user has to select the RS232 text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER SETUP EXTERHRL 170 SETUP EPE I CURREHT REFERENCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUN ICAT IOH RMS INTEGRATION SETUP list the RS232 text highlighted displayed inversely 9 12 1 Setting the transmission speed of the serial interface BAUD RATE The RS 232 interface transmission BAUD RATE speed can be selected from the following available values 1200 bits second 2400 bits s 4800 bits s 9600 bits s 19200 bits s 38000 bits s 57600 bits s or 115200 bits s The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The other RS 232 transmission parameters are fixed to 8 bits for data No parity amp 1 Stop bit The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which cause
458. th 1 NofHist number of histograms number of 1 1 OCTAVE 15 or 1 3 OCTAVE 45 filters and TOTAL value 1 2 NofClasses number of classes in the histogram 120 3 BottomClass bottom class boundary 10 dB 4 ClassWidth class width 10 dB Table B 1 19 Results of the statistical analysis made in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE mode Comment 14 id 01 number of the histogram 1 1 OCTAVE or Y 1 3 OCTAVE 1 Sub blockLength 2 NofClasses 2 242 2 3 Histogram 1 1 first counter for the first 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter 4 5 Histogram 1 2 second counter for the first 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter 14 id 02 number of the histogram 1 1 OCTAVE or BE 22214 1 3 OCTAVE 1 Sub blockLength 2 NofClasses 2 242 2 3 Histogram 2 1 first counter for the second 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter 4 5 Histogram 2 2 ice counter for the second 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE 0 14 14 id nn NofHist number of the last histogram 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 1 Sub blockLength 2 NofClasses 2 242 D Histogram nn 1 first counter for the last 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter 4 5 Histogram nn 2 second counter for the last 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE filter Table B 1 20 RT60 parameters block ore Name Comment number 0 Oxnn1A 1A id nn block s length type of results in block 1B 1 RT60SaveMode 1 result
459. the SET3 file deletion and its influence on the memory space The displays below illustrates the erasing from the flash memory another file named SET8 the FILES FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged while the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased oa a L FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mI FILES FREE SPACE m Bu Fue Deleted 1586823 1586823 2 6 bytes 6 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE PRESS ANY KEY 15885792 bytes 15885792 bytes Execution of the SETS file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 25 G7 USER MANUAL 7 5 Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL The DELETE ALL is used to remove all files from memory In order to enter the position the user has to select the DELETE ALL text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The DELETE ALL sub list consists of three positions RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES a E ETEE SAVE SAVE OPTIONS LOAD DELETE DEFRAGMENTATION DELETE ALL text highlighted displayed inversely the FILE list 7 5 1 Deleting all result files RESULT FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the RESULT FILES text using the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list a
460. the CONTINUE position to YES or NO If YES is chosen to confirm the change the ENTER should be pressed the instrument returns to the active mode of result presentation starting the new measurement process If NO is chosen to confirm the change the ENTER should be pressed the instrument returns to the active mode of measurement result s presentation without starting the new measurement process 9 22 2 Checking free space on the USB disk USB DISK FREE SP In order to switch on the displaying of the message the user has to place by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the special character in the warning s position The window is closed the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or ESC push button ignoring a change made in the position 9 32 Ll HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 71 USB DISK FREE SF MER FREE SPACE 52 Ll HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 7 USB DISK FREE SFP FREE SPACE 52 G7 USER MANUAL WARNINGS windows USB DISK FREE SP selected 9 22 3 Minimum USB disk memory free space setting MIN FREE SPACE In this line the user can determine the amount of the USB disk memory free space HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP FREE SPACE ao HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED 1 USB DISK FREE SP FREE
461. the attempts for the access code entering is limited After three unsuccessful essays the possibility is blocked Displays with the highlighted elements of the main list After double pressing of the MENU push button the scrolled list of recently accessed menu items appears on the display The example of this list is presented below Such solution enables one to access the most frequently used lists quickly without the necessity of passing the whole path oa oa RECENT ITEMS RECENT ITEMS MEASUREMENT SETUP USB HOST PORT SAVE LOGGER TRIGGER PROFILE 3 SAVE LOGGER TRIGGER Display with the recently accessed menu items after double pressing of the lt MENU gt push button 3 1 G7 USER MANUAL After the selection of the desired list the lt A gt or v push buttons the user has to press the ENTER push button in order to enter it After this new sub lists positions elements or various data specification appear on the display MERHSLIKEMEHT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 b TRIGGER SETUP Displays with the main list a and the elements of the INPUT list b Next pressing of the ENTER push button enables one to access mentioned above sub lists HERHSUR SETUP START DELAY r Ss Inf Or MEASUREMENT SETUP window opened path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The desired position of a list is accessed after pressing the lt A gt or
462. the case of the TIMER function the directory selection is skipped and the default one is created The usage of the USB disk modifies a few windows and lists First of all the described above DIRECTORY window and COPY FILES TO USB MOVE FILES TO USB windows appear in the FILE list Additionally in some places concerning the file management the info about the name of the current USB disk directory is displayed in the upper line DIRECTORY the name of the current directory These places are as follows DISPLAY LOGGEH VIEW FILE LOAD FILE DELETE RESULT FILES FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES FILE DELETE SETUP FILES FILE CATALOGUE FILE LOAD SETUP The usage of the USB disk modifies also the execution of a few functions namely the DEFRAGMENTATON is not executed e the REAL TIME transmission is stopped e the remote file writing using the 9 function is not available e inthe FILE FREE SPACE window the free space and the total capacity of the USB disk are given e in the file report the name of the current directory of the USB disk is added 9 27 G7 USER MANUAL e the USB disk memory is not divided between the files and the logger so the free space concerns both logger and file memory The USB disk can be disconnected when the measurements are not performed and the results are presented The internal instrument s flash memory is initialised after switching off the USB disk In the USB disk that is divided into partitions its
463. the file loading is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when the setup files were not saved after entering the LOAD SETUP window the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the lt ESC gt ENTER the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP push button the instrument starts the measurement oa LOAD SETUP HO FILES Display during the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation The current number of the setup file and the total number of the saved setup files is displayed in the first line of the LOAD SETUP window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line 7 39 G7 USER MANUAL The date and time of the SAVE SETUP operation is displayed in the fourth and fifth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or A with lt SHIFT gt LOAD SETUE LOAD SETUP LOAD SETUP L RD SETUP FILE LEVNE ETUF DATE HOL 2006 TIME 28
464. the first pressing of any push button would cause the switch on of the backlight The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing the ENTER push button The return without taking into account any change is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a SCREEN SETUP COHTRAST oa SCREEN SETUP COHTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT LEAI MIH BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT Liiki a b SCREEN SETUP windows the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT active a and not active b 6 5 Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY The BATTERY enables the user to check the internal battery condition In order to enter the window one has to press the lt ENTER gt push button on the inversely displayed BATTERY text of the DISPLAY list The BATTERY window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or the lt ENTER gt push button oa DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER MJIEM COHTRRST BACKLIGHT DISPLAY window with BATTERY text highlighted The instrument can be powered from the external power supplier from the external battery pack from four AA standard or AA rechargeable batteries or from the USB interface when its USB Device socket is connected by means of the cable to a PC The view presented on the display in each case is different The current battery voltage is displayed together with its approximate state in the graphical form BATTERY BATTERY BATTERY BATTERY a
465. the instrument there are also windows which are used for entering text i e the name of the file the header for the printed reports from the measurements TITLE 6 HOTELE a TITLE i S5H Delete 5H Insert 5Hz Delete SH Insert Displays during the edition of the text which has to be printed as a header in the measurement reports path MENU REPORT TITLE Below the structure of the elements of the main list is presented The more detailed description of the FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP lists is given in the following chapters FUNCTION one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button MODE VIBRATION METER available values SOUND METER available values gt MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list LEVEL METER available values 1 1 OCTAVE available values 1 3 OCTAVE available values FFT available values RT60 function available only in sound meter mode available values DOSE METER function available only in sound meter mode available values CALIBRATION sub list BY SENSITIVITY e SENSITIVITY available values of sensitivity in mV Pa o 10gV ms 10 V ms in the case of vibration measurements and 50 hV Pa 50 V Pa in the case of sound measurements e CAL FACTOR it displays calculated calibration factor BY MEASUREMENT sub list e CAL LEVEL
466. the instrument returns to the FILE list The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button MOVE FILES RESULT FILES D ng HOUE FILES D a MOVE FILES RESULT FILES tal RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JHH a Press EHTER to LOGGER FILES A 1 LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JRHH DIRECTORY 25JHH Press EHTER to b Press EHTER to MOVE RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation a the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation b 7 42 GZ USER MANUAL After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT IM PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument starts the operation After the operation Files Moved O K message is presented on the display If the file already exist in the USB memory stick the message with the name of the file and ALREADY EXIST text is presented on the display D a a HOVE FILES Files a6JnH Moved ALREADY EXISTS
467. the instrument s internal timer TIMER The TIMER enables one to programme the internal timer The instrument can be switched on by itself in the programmed time and it can perform the measurements using the setup which was used before its switching off The selection of the parameter to be set is performed using the A v and the change of its value using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt In order to enter the position the user has to select the TIMER text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt Y lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER L SETUP RMS INTEGRATION RS232 RTC SHIFT MODE STATISTICAL LEVELS SETUP list the TIMER text highlighted displayed inversely 9 18 1 Selecting the mode of the timer function MODE The MODE of the timer function is selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the MODE text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list The timer can be switched off Off switched on only once SINGLE switched on many times regularly REGULAR with the period between two consecutive measurements set in the REPETITION line or switched on up to four times not regularly IRREGULAR in the time set in the TIMEx positions 9 22 G7 USER MANUAL The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings
468. time period taken from the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP e all measurement results up to the moment the triggering signal falls down the LEVEL e the results registered directly after the fulfilment of the triggering condition time of the registration can be calculated by multiplying the value set in the POST by the time period taken from the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the A v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the window requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the current display The LOGGER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button 5 4 2 1 Switching the logger triggering on and off TRIGGER The logger triggering of the measurements TRIGGER can be switched off using the push button or lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt The triggering is switched on if the LEVEL or LEVEL mode is selected using the lt gt gt push button or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER SOURCE SOURCE RMSe13 166dB PRE 8 PRE 0 anas a oa LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER ei LOGGER SETUP windows in vibr
469. tion COMPENSATION FILTER The COMPENSATION FILTER position is available only in case of the sound measurements in the MODE sublist the SOUND METER position is selected It enables the user to switch off or select the required compensation filter for sound measurements In order to enter the window the user has to select the COMPENSATION FILTER text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER Selection of the option is made by placing a special character in the line with the name of the proper option and pressing ENTER The frequency characteristics of the filters is given in App D CLEAR SETUP COMPEHSRTIUM FILTER DAY TIME LIMIT EXPOSURE TIME EXTERHRL 170 SETUP SETUP list the COMPENSATION FILTER text highlighted displayed inversely The following options are available OFF switches off the compensation filter and microphone noise compensation in other options microphone noise compensation is always switched on FREE FIELD compensation filter for the measurements performed in the free field conditions which corrects the case effect DIFFUSE FIELD compensation filter for measurements performed in the diffuse field conditions OUTDOOR ENVIRON compensation filter for measurements when the acoustic signal is perpendicular to the microphone s grid with correction of SA 203 outdoor microphone kit effect OUTDOOR AIRPORT compensation filter which is used when the ac
470. tion can be calculated multiplying the value set in the POST by the value set in the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display a MEASUR SETUP START DELAY PERIOD REF CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER amp LOG23 TRIGGER LEWEL oa HERSUR SETUP START DELAY INTEGR PERIOD LOGGER STEP LOGGER amp LOG23 oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY E IHTEGE PERIOD TRIGGER LEUEL TRIGGER LEWEL RMSeL gt 18706 3 85 29 85 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER STEPS 5 20 G7 05 MANUAL Ll ao oa oa HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER 1 LEWEL 1 LEWEL MSCI H oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY lsh IHTEGRE PERIOD REF CYCLE Inf LOGGER Un L GGER STEP LOGGER 105115 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER STEPS in vibration mode The value set in the POST is confirmed and the window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the ESC push button the window is closed ignoring the settings made in the POST 5 4 3 Trigger parameters for recorder setting RECORDER TRIGGER The RECORDER TRIGGER enables the user to set the parameters of time domain signal recording on the external USB memory stick path M
471. tivation or deactivation LOGGER If the logger is active the user can set the logging period LOGGER STEP and give a name to the logger s file LOGGER NAME In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the lt A gt v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the sub list requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the sub list The MEASUREMENT SETUP is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button L1 oa oa HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY EEEN START DELAY START DELAY i INTEGR PERIOD INTEGRE PERIOD PERIOD REP CYCLE REP CYCLE REP CYCLE L GGER L GGER LOGGER Displays with the MEASUREMENT SETUP window 5 1 1 Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY The START DELAY defines the delay period from the lt START STOP gt push button pressing to the start of the measurements the digital filters of the instrument analyse constantly the input signal even when the measurements are stopped This delay period can be set from 0 second to 60 seconds with 1 second step by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and with 10 seconds step with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The ENTER push button must be pressed for the confirmation of the selection whic
472. ton Shift or 2nd Fun ST SP available modes of the START STOP push button Normal or Inverse STATISTICAL LEVELS sub list which has is available only in sound mode available levels Nz1 10 20 90 TIMER sub list it enables the user to set time of the self switching on of the instrument specifies the mode of automatic power on available values e SINGLE START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on START HOUR specifies the time of automatic power on e REGULAR START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on START HOUR specifies the time of automatic power on REPETITION specifies time after which next automatic measurement will be executed e IRREGULAR START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on TIMEx enables the user to specify four times of automatic measurements USB HOST PORT it enables the user to choose with proper functionality of USB HOST socket for connection of the instrument to RS232 USB IRDA USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING USER FILTERS it enables the user to introduce the coefficients of the filters SPECTRUM BASED FILTER e VIEW it enables the user to select which filter used 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis should be viewed the available options are S1 S2 S3 and any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface e EDIT it enables the user to select which filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or
473. tton after calculation of the calibration factor value Note The calibration factor is always added to the measurement results in the LEVEL METER mode and to those coming from the frequency analysis 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT 4 3 5 History of the calibration LAST CALIBRATION In order to enter the LAST CALIBRATION window in which up to last ten calibration records are remembered the user has to select the proper text in the CALIBRATION window using the A v push buttons and press the ENTER one 4 8 G7 USER MANUAL oa CALIBRATION Lasi CALIBRATION Hr AUG 288r Br z3 AUG 2887 Bi AUG 288r AUG 2887 AUG 2087 B b Bi AUG zB 15 BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMEHT LAST CALIBRATION z4 H Displays the CALIBRATION window the LAST CALIBRATION text selected a the LAST CALIBRATION window opened with ten calibration records b In order to review the calibration record the user has to select the required line in the LAST CALIBRATION window using the A v push buttons and press the ENTER one The opened window contains the date and time of the performed calibration measurement the way the calibration was done BY MEASUREMENT or BY SENSITIVITY the desired calibration level CAL LEVEL in the case of the measurements and the obtained calibration factor CAL FACTOR LAST CALIBRATION LAST CA
474. ults in DOSE METER mode Word Name number Comment Oxnn07 07 id nn block s length 0x0307 used profile profile s mask G7 USER MANUAL 0 08 08 id mm sub block s length MeasureTime time of the measurement Result 1 1 PEAK value in the 1st profile Result 1 2 reserved Result 1 3 maximal value MAX in the 1s profile Result 1 4 minimal value MIN in the 1 profile Result 1 5 SPL value in the 1s profile Result 1 6 LEQ value in the 1st profile Result 1 7 Lden value in the 1st profile Result 1 8 Ltm3 value in the 1 profile Result 1 9 Ltm5 value in the 1st profile Result 1 10 LAV value in the 1 profile Result 1 11 TLAV value in the 15 profile UnderRes 1 underrange value in the 1s profile 0 08 08 id mm sub block s length OVL overload time Result 2 1 PEAK value in the 2 d profile Result 2 2 reserved Result 2 3 maximal value in the 2 profile Result 2 4 minimal value MIN in the 2 profile Result 2 5 SPL value in the 27 profile Result 2 6 LEQ value in the 274 profile Result 2 7 Lden value in the 2 profile Result 2 8 Ltm3 value in the 2 profile Result 2 9 Ltm5 value in the 2 profile Result 2 10 LAV value in the
475. ure EM sure Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message is displayed after the successful execution of all stages of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list 7 28 G7 USER MANUAL pm pm Defragmentation Clearing gt 1 gt Please wait Please wait Deleted 0 PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of SETUP FILES selection A Notice The execution of the DELETE ALL function described above takes place in the case when only one type of the files is selected in the DELETE ALL sub list If all types are selected simultaneously and the logger result and setup are saved only Clearing operation is performed but two times one time in logger files memory and one time in result and setup files memory After clearing all memory the defragmentation is not done The memory merging is done only in the case of setup and results memory as these two different types of files are saved together in the same space Clearing Clearing Dx EI Flease wait Flease wait Deleted PRESS ANY KEW Execution
476. ure time used for the LEPd measurement and other DOSE METER results This position is taken off from the menu in the vibration meter mode EXTERNAL VO SETUP it enables the user to select the available functionality of the Ext I O port HUMAN VIB FILT it enables the user to activate HUMAN VIBRATION FILTERS This position appears only in vibration mode before activation of those filters IEPE CURRENT it enables the user to choose current IEPE supply REFERENCE LEVELS it enables the user to select the reference level for the vibration measurements and it informs the user about the reference level in the sound measurements REMOTE COMMUNICATION it enables the user to select the type of remote communication and packet size for data transmission RMS INTEGRATION it enables the user to select the way of integration for the family of the LEQ measurements RS232 it enables the user to set the transmission speed and the timeout in the RS232 interface RTC it enables the user to set the Real Time Clock RT60 AVERAGING this position appears only in RT60 mode it enables the user to switch on and reset averaging and it informs the user how many measurement were taken to the averaging process calculation RT60 OPTIONS context position appears only in case of RT60 measurements it enables the user to set the auxiliary parameters of RT 60 mode RT60 RESULTS this position appears only in case of RT60 mode it enables the user set which of the rever
477. uring the performed 1 measurements in not more than selected 35 00 45 00 55 00 65 00 75 00 85 00 percentage of the observation period Sound Level Ln presentation in G7 Sound Level 85 00 4 El Test ul i I s B lima 1 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 78 81 89 97 Statistical Levels Ln Two presentation modes of the statistical levels are available in the G7 instrument In both modes the Ln values selected by the cursor are displayed in the bottom line together with its value and units dB The P value indicating the observation period equal to 100 ms it means that the statistical results are updated every 100 ms is placed at the end of the bottom line The profile s number the statistics are D 5 G7 USER MANUAL taken from the RMS detector Lin or Exp Fast Slow or Imp the filters name A C or Z and real time are displayed on the right side of the view in the first presentation mode The selection of the profile is made by pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or the lt SHIFT gt and v push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the lt ALT gt and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons HO RESULTS Results shown in the first presentation mode of statistical levels The selection of the Ln to be displayed is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The statistics L01 is immediately avail
478. user Any push button should be then pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one After pressing a push button the instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list Defragmentation Clearing gt DEFRAGMENTATION Please waiter Please wait finished PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The displays below illustrate the results of the FILES DEFRAGMENT after the execution the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE become equal while the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE Result of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 6 2 Merging logger files memory LOGGER DEFRAGMENT The LOGGER DEFRAGMENT is used to join the logger files memory In order to select this the user has to display inversely the LOGGER DEFRAGMENT text using the lt A gt or lt lt gt push button oa DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRRGMEHT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to continue the execution of the function one has to press the ENTER push button The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation The next pressing of the ENTER
479. ush button is changed into lt PAUSE gt Profileci3 E Frafileri Displays with Timer and Arrows icons Notice The time of the measurement is displayed in minutes and seconds in the range from 1 sec to 39 minutes and 59 seconds After this limit the hours and minutes are shown i e 00 40 Notice THE USER DYNAMICALLY MODIFIES THE DEFAULT SETUP The last set up of the instrument during the power off is stored and is available after power on 3 4 Selection of the working mode MODE The device can work in two modes vibration meter and sound meter A mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with the mode s name The position of the character can be changed using the A v push buttons After placing the character in the line with the option s name the user has to press the ENTER push button a FUNCTION MODE WIBRATION HETER UTERATIOH METER MEASUREMENT FUNCT IOHM SOUND METER x SOUND METER CALIBRAT IOH a b FUNCTION list opened MODE selected a and MODE sub list opened with all available modes b c 3 5 Activation of optional functions The 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE DOSE METER FFT RT60 and time history data LOGGER time domain signal recording human vibration filters are the optional functions broadening applications of the instrument Some of the additional functions are specified in the MEASUR FUNCTION path MENU FUNCTION others
480. v push button oa HERSUR SETUP START DELAY la LOGGER STEP LOGGER MEASUREMENT SETUP window the INTEGR PERIOD position accessible The change of the value in a selected position is performed by pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons 5 SETUP START DELAY ls INTEGR PERIOD REP CYCLE red LOGGER OFF Displays with the accessed INTEGR PERIOD position after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons respectively The ENTER push button is used for the confirmation of the selection in a position and for closing the opened sub list The sub list is closed ignoring any changes made in a sub list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button oa SPL Fast A Profilecia ROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP SETUF 125 Displays after three consecutive pressing of the lt ESC gt push button from the MEASUR SETUP sub list As it was mentioned some of the sub lists end with the windows informing the user about the state of the instrument available memory not existing files or loggers standards fulfilled by the unit etc In order to close such window the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button 3 2 G7 USER MANUAL moO FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE 16247414 bytes TOTAL AVAILABLE 16247414 bytes CATALOGUE LOGGER FREE SPACE 15366458 bytes Displays during and after the accessing the FREE SPACE window path MENU FILE FREE SPACE In
481. vailable types of the digital weighting filter used during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis o Z inthe case of vibration measurements and o 2 C inthe case of sound measurements e BAND o FULL in the case of vibration measurements and o FULL AUDIO in the case of sound measurements e LOGGER position it enables the user to save RMS results from 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE measurement function available values or V gt FFT sub list this sub list appears on the display in the case of the FFT analyser AVERAGING position it informs the user about the available averaging during FFT analysis e LINEAR in the case of vibration measurements e LINEAR EXPON in the case of sound measurements FILTER position available types of the digital weighting filter used during FFT analysis o Z inthe case of vibration measurements and o Z A C in the case of sound measurements BAND position available values of the bands of the FFT analysis 87 5Hz 175Hz 350Hz 700Hz 1 4kHz 2 8kHz 5 6kHz 11 2kHz 22 4kHz WINDOW position it informs the user about the available coefficients of time window HANNING RECTANGLE FLAT TOP KAISER BESSEL LINES available values 480 960 1920 LOGGER available values or V gt TRIGGER SETUP sub list in LEVEL METER mode path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION LEVEL METER MEASURE TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the triggering o TRIGGER ava
482. vated after disconnecting USB disk and the instrument After the USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING selection the device connected to that socket is recognised The warning appears on the display after the connection of the unknown device In the case the device declares the current consumption greater than 200 mA the dedicated warning is presented In the case the current consumption is greater than 250 mA the connected USB disk is switched off and special warning is displayed 9 26 G7 USER MANUAL In other cases the connected USB disk is initiated and the free space is determined USB DISK DIRECTORY C220 mH OVERCURRENT HEN UNKNOHN EXCEED POHER USB DISK 1 USB DISK CAPABILITY DISABLED Please wait 250 mH PRESS ANY KEY PRE 5 ANY 55 ANY KEY Counting free space Displays with the different USB disk warnings This operation can last up to few minutes depending on the disk s capacity The detection of the USB DISK is signalised by the paper sheet icon at the display s left corner Next the file s directory should be determined path MENU FILE DIRECTORY This directory can be created in the instrument or already existing one in the disk is selected The FREE SPACE denotes the available free memory on the connected disk The DIR NO shows the number of the selected directory the 1 number and the number of the existing directorie
483. ven in the FILES FREE SPACE position If the result and setup files were not deleted from the memory the number of bytes displayed in the TOTAL AVAILABLE position is the same as in the FILES FREE SPACE However if some of them were deleted assuming that they were not the last saved the memory used by them is empty but it does not increase the continuous space In such case the number given in the TOTAL AVAILABLE position is greater than that in the FILES FREE SPACE The DEFRAGMENTATION operation which merges files should be used to increase the FREE SPACE The next two numbers given in the FREE SPACE window named LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE characterize the logger files memory where the saving mechanism is the same Therefore the numbers presented in the FREE SPACE window depend the history of the measurements and the operations performed by the user a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mi AVAILABLE 15879858 bates FREE SPACE window with the number depending on the measurements and operations performed The window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the ENTER or lt ESC gt push buttons or it starts the measurements after pressing the START STOP one 7 9 Saving setup files in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP The SAVE SETUP is used for storing setup settings in the internal non volatile FLASH DISC memory files are always written at the beginning
484. vision dated as 1999 11 01 standards Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg and Wb They are currently used in many countries for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body _ PRDFILECL gt PRDFILECL gt PROFILE lt L gt PROFILE FILTER ME DETECTOR 1 LOGGER C 1 LOGGER LOGGER MAM 1 LOGGER RMS 1 RR FILEC15 wPR FILEC31 PRO FILEC31 PRO FILEC3 FILTER M DETECTOR 1 1 DETECTOR 1 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of new weighting filters in human vibration option The mentioned above filters can be set in the same manner as other filters in the PROFILE x windows The Wk filter is used for the assessment of the influence of the vibration signal on the human body in the z direction and for vertical recumbent direction It conforms to the ISO 2631 1 97 and ISO 8041 revision dated as 1999 11 01 standards dB 10 20 3 40 50 60 70 80 30 O06 0 13 0 25 0 50 1 0 2 0 4 0 5 0 16 0 32 64 128 254 512 Hz S455 26 8 13 6 Heit 60 3 RBid 0 3 0 3 2 3 8 0 14 8 25 9 42 7 60 8 dB Characteristics of the Wk digital filter implemented in the instrument in the HVM
485. wing sequence of characters 7 MB 7 TS This function returns the tonality tone seek in the format 7 TS xxx 7 5 This function sets the tonality tone seek dB where 10 50 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 TS 7 RE This function returns the tonality regression in the format 7 RE xxx 7 RE xxx This function sets the tonality regression in percentage where xxx e 50 100 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RE 7 This function returns the tonality tone band in the format 7 TB xxx This function sets the tonality tone band dB where 10 60 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 TB 7 SM This function returns the RT60 smoothing in the format 7 SM xxx 7 5 This function sets the RT60 smoothing where 0 15 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 SM 14 G7 USER MANUAL 7 NM This function returns the RT60 noise margin in the format 7 NM xxx 7 NM xxx This function sets the RT60 noise margin dB where xxx 0 200 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 NM 7 AV This function returns the RT60 averaging in the format 7 AV x This function enables x 1 or disables x 0 the RT60 averaging and returns the following sequence of characters 7 AV 7 AC 1 This function clears the RT6
486. x 2 DIFFUSE FIELD x 3 OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENT x 4 OUTDOOR AIRPORT x 5 EXTENSION CABLE 7 LA This function returns the current language in the format 7 LA xx where xx is language codes EN English IT Italian PL Polish RU Russian HU Hungarian TU Turkish NL Flemish FR French SP Spanish DE German 7 PO This function powers off the instrument 7 BD This function returns baud rate in the format 7 BD xxx 7 BD xxx This function sets baud rate and returns the following sequence of characters 7 BD where xxx means 8 115200 Xxx 7 57600 6 38400 5 19200 Xxx 4 9600 A 12 G7 USER MANUAL 3 4800 XXx22 2400 1 1200 7 TO This function returns RS232 time out in the format 7 TO xxx 27 TO xxx This function sets RS232 time out in seconds where e 1 60 and returns the following sequence of characters 7 7 WS This function returns states of warnings if results are not saved in the format 7 WS x 7 WS x This function enables x 1 or disables x 0 the warnings if the results are not saved and it returns the following sequence of characters 7 WS 7 RC This function returns the transition type for remote communication in the format 7 RC xxx Z7 RC xxx This function sets the transition type for remote communication and returns the following sequence of characters 7 RC where means
487. xecution of the PRINT USER FILTERS When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer or PC The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data In the case when the printer or PC is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data the message about the time limit is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list TIME OUT PRESS ANY Display during the file transfer from the logger when there is no data transfer The exemplary USER FILTER coefficients printed in A4 format look as follows C SVANTEK G7 No 12800 2007 08 06 v6 06 6 06 2 17559229 Sound meter mode filter 51 251 S1 Hz dB Hz dB Hz dB 0 80 INF 25 00 40 0 800 00 10 0 1 00 100 0 31b 50 50 0 1000 00 0 0 1225 90 0 40 00 60 0 1250 00 10 0 1 60 80 0 50 00 70 0 1600 00 20 0 2 00 70 0 63 00 80 0 2000 00 30 0 2 50 60 0 80 00 90 0 2500 00 40 0 8 18 G7 USER MANUAL 3 15 50 0 100 00 100 0 3150 00 50 0 4 00 40 0 125 00 90 0 4000 00 60 0 5 00 30 0 160 00 80 0 5000 00 70 0 6 30 20 0 200 00 70 0 6300 00 80 0 8 00 10 0 250 00 60 0 8000 00 90 0 10 00 0 0 315 00 50 0 10000 00 100 0 12 50 10 0 400 00 40 0 12500 00 INF 16 0
488. y the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty FREE SPACE it informs the user about the size of the available memory for saving the measurement results in the file FILES FREE SPACE the TOTAL AVAILABLE bytes of the memory the number displayed in the FILES FREE SPACE increased by the memory which was previously used the deleting files the next two numbers given in the FREE SPACE window named LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE characterize the logger files memory in the same way SAVE SETUP saves the current settings of the instrument with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons one can choose between two modes SAVE NEXT and SAVE These are similar to the options available while saving result files The SAVE mode enables to choose the file name manually In the SAVE NEXT mode the file name will be set automatically LOAD SETUP it enables the user to verify the list of setup files in the memory and to load the previously saved settings of the instrument the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when there is no setup files n __SAVE_ m m Press ENTER to SRUE LETE RLL Press ESC to SKIP DEFRAGMENTATION Press UP to EDIT a FILE oa REPLRCE LORD SRUE i DELETE RECT SRUE DELETE RLL SAVE MAX SPECT 1 DEFRRGMENTRTION Q SAVE MIN SPECT U oa P TIME 10 59 52 SRUE SAVE OPTIONS ERE 5 Es 2 3 LETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION DELETE RES
489. y push button should be pressed except the lt 5 gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list A EJECT PAGE TIME OUT PRESS ANY Display after a printing when there is not possible to eject a paper 8 22 G7 USER MANUAL 9 SETUP MENU SETUP The SETUP list contains different sub lists and positions Some of them are directly related with sound or vibration measurements and some with the settings of the hardware components of the instrument In order to open the SETUP list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the SETUP text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Display in the main list the SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely In the SETUP list the following items are available LANGUAGE it enables the user to set language of the user interface CLEAR SETUP it enables the user to return to the default factory setup COMPENSATION FILTER it enables the user to set the type of compensation filter for sound measurements This position is taken off from the menu in the vibration meter mode DAY TIME LIMITS it enables the user to select the hours limiting day and night for the calculation of the Lden result This position is taken off from the menu in the vibration meter mode EXPOSURE TIME it enables the user to define the expos
490. ysis There are respectively 28 125Hz 24 160Hz 45 20kHz Measure Triggering level TriggerLev in VLM mode Innn nnn level dB e 24 136 Number of records taken into account before the fulfilment of the triggering condition TriggerPre nxxx xxx level in dB e 60 200 Number of records taken into account after the fulfilment of the triggering condition TriggerPost pnn nn number of records saved in the logger before the triggering condition nn 0 50 Measure Triggering gradient in SLM mode qnnn nnn number of records saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition nn e 0 200 Measure Triggering gradient in VLM mode Onnn nnn gradient in dB ms e 1 100 Spectrum Band knnn nnn gradient in dB ms e 1 100 Exposure Time Criterion Level Threshold Level Exchange Rate FFT lines FFT logger 0 FULL A1 AUDIO ennn nnn time in minutes e 1 480 c1 80dB c2 84dB c3 85dB 4 90dB 0 None h1 75dB h2 80dB h3 85dB h4 90dB x2 2dB x3 3dB x4 4dB x5 5dB 0 1920 yl 960 y2 480 Logger 20 switched off Delay in the start of measurement zl switched on V TO switched off T1 switched on State of the instrument Stop or Start Ynn nn delay given in seconds e 0 59 S0 STOP

G7 manual _draft version

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents